SM 9410

Return to CD-ROM Collection Menu
Kodak PACS LINK 9410 ACQUISITION SYSTEM
Service Manual, Rev. C
Revision History
Warnings and Cautions
About This Document
Section 1 – System Description
Section 2 – Theory of Operation
Section 3 – Installation
Section 4 – Troubleshooting
Section 5 – Replacement Procedures
Section 6 – Additional Information
Section 7 – Parts Breakdown
Section A – Configuration Worksheets
862-8588
78-6970-8080-8
Revision History
The original issue and revisions of this Kodak PACS Link 9410 Service Manual are identified as follows:
Issue Date (Rev A): 08/99, (Rev B): 03/00, (Rev C): 03/01
This revision obsoletes all previous editions. All pages are dated March, 2001.
TOC
Section Rev. Text Rev. Pages Changed in Current Revision
Title/a C C -
Warnings C C -
TOC C C -
1 C C -
2 C C -
3 C C -
4 C C -
5 C C -
6 C C -
7 C C -
Appendix A C C -
Appendix B C C -
This page is intentionally blank.
Safety Instructions
Read and understand all instructions in this section before using the Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System.
Warning
This equipment is operated with hazardous voltage which can shock, burn or cause death.
• Remove wall plug before servicing equipment. Never pull on cord to remove from outlet. Grasp plug and pull to
disconnect.
• Do not operate equipment with a damaged power cord.
• Do not use an extension cord to power this equipment.
• Use only the power cord supplied with this equipment.
• Position the power cord so it will not be tripped over or pulled.
• Connect this equipment to a grounded outlet.
• Do not place a portable-multiple-socket outlet (power strip) on the floor. Mount the power strip on a wall or on
the underside of a table.
Warning
• Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
• Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
• Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the
network interface.
• Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Warning
Do not substitute or modify any part of this equipment without approval of Eastman Kodak Company.
Warning
This equipment is not contained in a sealed cabinet. Therefore, it must not be used in locations where it can come in
contact with liquids, including bodily fluids.
Warning
For continued protection against fire, replace fuses only with fuses of the same type and fuse rating.
Laser Warning
Avoid Laser Beam. The CD-ROM drive in this product uses an invisible 5-milliwatt laser beam. Laser
radiation may be present when the machine operates without panels or covers installed.
Use of controls or adjustments, or performing procedures other than those described in this document may result in
eye damage.
8628588 - 2001 March v

Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System Service Manual
Caution
Only trained service personnel are authorized to remove covers. There are no “user” serviceable parts in this machine.
Caution
General External Cleaning: This equipment may be cleaned with a damp cloth using water with mild detergent or
commercial electronic equipment cleaner.
Caution
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15
of the FCC rules. Those limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Caution
Do not use in the presence of flammable anesthetics, oxygen or nitrous oxide. This equipment does not have a gas-
sealed electronics enclosure and could ignite any flammable or explosive gases present in its environment.
Caution
This equipment is intended to connect to other medical devices. Only qualified service personnel may perform
installation and service maintenance. The laser in the equipment is not a patient device. Therefore, the equipment
must be installed no closer than 1.83 meters from a patient bed or chair.
Caution
U.S. Federal law restricts this device to the sale by, or on the order of, a licensed health care practitioner.
vi 2001 March - 8628588

Safety, Regulatory, EMC and CE Marking Compliance

All safety, regulatory, EMC and CE marking information is located in the Kodak DryView 8100 Laser Imager User
Guide.
Labels
The following label is located on the upper enclosure of the CD-ROM drive:
8628588 - 2001 March vii

This page is intentionally left blank.
viii 2001 March - 8628588

About this Document
About this Document
Warranty and Limitation of Liability

Important Notice to Purchaser:
Kodak warrants the PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System will be free from defects in parts, materials and
manufacture for a period of one (1) year from date of installation. For defects occurring during the warranty period
and about which Kodak has received notice during the warranty period, Kodak will replace warranty-covered items
and will provide free labor during normal business hours to perform warranty-covered work.
THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER PRODUCT WARRANTIES, EXPRESS AND
IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, AND THOSE
ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE. The express warranty does not apply to
the following: expendable parts; defects or damage incurred in transportation to the end-user; defects of damage due
to accidents, neglect, misuses, operator error, alteration, improper installation, or operation outside of published
specifications.
EXCEPT FOR THE REMEDIES STATED ABOVE, KODAK IS NOT LIABLE FOR DIRECT DAMAGES.
KODAK WILL NOT IN ANY EVENT BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL THEORY ASSERTED, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE AND STRICT
LIABILITY.
Audience
The primary audience for this User Guide is the key operator or the system administrator for the PACS Link 9410
Acquisition System and related Kodak Laser Imagers and imaging devices.
Packaging
This user guide is packaged with the CD-ROM disks and miscellaneous information sheet supplied with the PACS
Link 9410 Acquisition System.
Emissions
The PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System has passed RFI Emissions Testing. It was found that the PACS Link 9410
Acquisition System does not add to the emissions of the Dell™ computer supplied as part of this product. Therefore,
the PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System meets the same emissions standards as the Dell computer.
Refer to the Reference and Installation Guide supplied with the Dell computer for more information on the RFI
emissions standards and regulations that apply to the Dell computer.
8628588 - 2001 March ix

Please Note
The information contained herein is based on the experience and knowledge relating to the subject
matter gained by Eastman Kodak Company prior to publication.
No patent license is granted by this information.
Eastman Kodak Company reserves the right to change this information without notice and makes no
warranty, express or implied, with respect to this information. Kodak shall not be liable for any loss or
damage, including consequential or special damages, resulting from the use of this information, even
if loss or damage is caused by Kodak’s negligence or other fault.
Table of Contents
Description Page
Revision History ........................................................................................................... iii

Warnings and Cautions ................................................................................................ v
Safety, Regulatory, EMC and CE Marking Compliance.............................................. vii
About this Document .................................................................................................. ix
Table of Contents ....................................................................................................... x
System Description .......................................................................................................... 1-1
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 1-1
Input Options ................................................................................................................ 1-3
Output Options ............................................................................................................. 1-3
Supported Printers............................................................................................. 1-4
Local Printers ......................................................................................................... 1-4
Network Printers .................................................................................................... 1-4
Modem Board ................................................................................................... 1-5
User Control ................................................................................................................. 1-5
Service Access.............................................................................................................. 1-5
Service Maintenance Tool (SMT) ................................................................................ 1-5
System Configurations ................................................................................................. 1-6
Specifications.................................................................................................... 1-9
PACS Link 9410 System ....................................................................................... 1-9
IMS Keypad ........................................................................................................... 1-9
Host Control ........................................................................................................... 1-9
Theory of Operation ....................................................................................................... 2-1
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 2-1
Hardware Components ..................................................................................... 2-2
Computer ................................................................................................................ 2-2
Serial Communication Ports .................................................................................. 2-3
IMAGRAPHTM Video Interface Board ................................................................. 2-6
Digital Interface Board ........................................................................................... 2-12
Fiber Optic Output (FOPCIL) Board ..................................................................... 2-16
Copper Output (COPCIL) Board ........................................................................... 2-17
Modem Board ........................................................................................................ 2-17
x 2001 March - 8628588

About this Document
Software Components.................................................................................................. 2-18

Windows NTTM Operating System ....................................................................... 2-18
PACS Link 9410 Application Software ................................................................ 2-19
Service Maintenance Tool (SMT) ......................................................................... 2-21
pcANYWHERETM Remote Access Software ....................................................... 2-21
Related Components .................................................................................................... 2-22
UKEIB ................................................................................................................... 2-22
IMS Keypad .......................................................................................................... 2-23
Host Control Inputs ............................................................................................... 2-25
Uninterruptable Power Supply .............................................................................. 2-28
Installation ...................................................................................................................... 3-1
Introduction.................................................................................................................. 3-1
Equipment and Tools Required ................................................................................... 3-1
Obtaining Network ID Information ............................................................................. 3-2
Other Installation Information ..................................................................................... 3-3
Pre-Installation Steps ................................................................................................... 3-4
Hardware Installation and Setup Procedures ............................................................... 3-5
Set UKEIB Configuration Switches ...................................................................... 3-5
Set RocketPort Switches ....................................................................................... 3-6
Set Computer Voltage Select Switch .................................................................... 3-6
Set up Uninterruptable Power Supply ................................................................... 3-7
Connect Cables ...................................................................................................... 3-8
Video Input Cables .......................................................................................... 3-8
Digital Input Cables ......................................................................................... 3-17
Local Printer Cables ......................................................................................... 3-26
FOPCIL-to-Local Printer Cables ..................................................................... 3-26
COPCIL-to-Local Printer Cables ..................................................................... 3-27
Telephone Drop Cable ..................................................................................... 3-29
Setting Up Local Laser Imager Parameters ........................................................... 3-30
969 Laser Imagers ............................................................................................ 3-30
DryView 8700/8500 Laser Imagers ................................................................. 3-30
DryView 8800 Multi-Input Manager (MIM) ................................................... 3-31
8300 or 8600 Laser Imager .............................................................................. 3-32
DryView 8100 Laser Imager ........................................................................... 3-33
Accessing the PACS Link 9410 System for Service ............................................. 3-34
Connecting with a Monitor Kit ........................................................................ 3-35
Accessing the PACS Link 9410 using a Service PC ....................................... 3-37
SMT Configuration Procedures ............................................................................. 3-39
Clear Configuration Database .......................................................................... 3-39
Configure Serial Ports ...................................................................................... 3-46
Setting Up PACS Link 9410 Image Inputs ...................................................... 3-47
Digital Image Inputs ................................................................................. 3-47
Video Image Inputs ................................................................................... 3-48
Fine Tune Video Parameters ..................................................................... 3-52
Configuring PACS Link 9410 Outputs ............................................................ 3-57
Configuring Local Printers (COPCIL and FOPCIL) ................................ 3-57
Configuring DICOM-Print (SCU) Printers .............................................. 3-60
Set Up IMS Keypad Control Inputs ................................................................. 3-62
Configuring Host Control Inputs ..................................................................... 3-64
Configuring an HPT Keypad .................................................................... 3-64
Configuring an HPT Keypad Service Screen ........................................... 3-68
Configuring for No Keypad ...................................................................... 3-69
Configuring a Destination Switching Keypad .......................................... 3-73
Configuring for Network (DICOM Print Input) ....................................... 3-77
Backup SMT Configuration ..................................................................... 3-79
8628588 - 2001 March xi
Test Local Laser Printer ......................................................................................... 3-80

Print Test Images on Network Printers ............................................................. 3-80
Test Modem.................................................................................................................. 3-81
Final Installation Steps ................................................................................................. 3-82
Upgrade or Reload Software ........................................................................................ 3-83
Upgrade or Reload Software on the 9410 System........................................................ 3-84
Connect Monitor Kit ......................................................................................... 3-84
Reghosting the System ..................................................................................... 3-84
Load PACS Link 9410 Application Software .................................................. 3-86
Restore PACS Link 9410 Configuration .......................................................... 3-87
Upgrade Application Software ..................................................................................... 3-88
Load Application Software ............................................................................... 3-88
Restore PACS Link 9410 Configuration .......................................................... 3-88
Hardware Field Upgrade Procedures ................................................................ 3-89
Optional Input or Output Boards ........................................................................... 3-90
IMAGRAPHTM ISA Video Input Board ................................................................ 3-92
Additional Video Input Connection ....................................................................... 3-95
Digital Input Board ................................................................................................ 3-97
Additional Digital Input Connection ...................................................................... 3-99
FOPCIL Fiber Optic Output Board ........................................................................3-100
COPCIL Copper Output Board ..............................................................................3-102
Modem Board ........................................................................................................3-104
Y-Cable ..................................................................................................................3-106
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................. 4-1
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 4-1
Service Programs.......................................................................................................... 4-1
DBClean ................................................................................................................. 4-1
DBEmpty ............................................................................................................... 4-1
Troubleshooting Matrix................................................................................................ 4-2
Keypad Error Messages................................................................................................ 4-6
Application Programs ................................................................................................... 4-9
Logs ........................................................................................................................ 4-10
Viewing Logs ......................................................................................................... 4-14
Cutting and Pasting a Log ................................................................................ 4-15
Using Logs to Troubleshoot ................................................................................... 4-16
Log Examples ........................................................................................................ 4-16
JOBSPOOLER (Output Log) ........................................................................... 4-16
JOBSPOOLER with 952 Commands ............................................................... 4-24
JOBSPOOLER with DICOM Commands ........................................................ 4-30
PARSER952 (Input Log) .................................................................................. 4-35
SUPERSET Filter (Input Log) ......................................................................... 4-39
SERIALCOMM (Input Log) ............................................................................. 4-42
IMAGRAPHTM (Image Acquisition Log) ........................................................ 4-44
DPI4IMAGE (Image Acquisition Log) ............................................................ 4-45
DISOL (Input Log) ........................................................................................... 4-46
Event Viewer Log ............................................................................................. 4-52
Replacement Procedures ................................................................................................ 5-1
Introduction................................................................................................................ 5-1
Removing the Side Cover ......................................................................................... 5-2
Removing the Front Cover ........................................................................................ 5-2
Removing the Power Supply ..................................................................................... 5-3
Removing the Hard Drive ......................................................................................... 5-4
Removing the CD-ROM Drive ................................................................................. 5-6
Removing the 3-1/2 Inch Disk Drive ........................................................................ 5-8
Replacing Input/Output Boards ................................................................................ 5-9
xii 2001 March - 8628588
About this Document
Additional Information .................................................................................................. 6-1

Introduction.................................................................................................................. 6-1
Tools and Accessories.................................................................................................. 6-1
Service Maintenance Tool (SMT) ............................................................................... 6-2
Starting SMT ......................................................................................................... 6-2
SMT Help .............................................................................................................. 6-3
System Info Tab .................................................................................................... 6-4
I/O Card Setup Tab ................................................................................................ 6-5
Serial Port Setup .............................................................................................. 6-6
DPI-4 Digital Input Board Setup ..................................................................... 6-8
ImagraphTM Video Input Board Setup Screen ................................................. 6-9
Device Setup Tab .................................................................................................. 6-11
Local Laser Printer Select Screen .................................................................... 6-12
Local Printer Parameter Screen ....................................................................... 6-13
SCU Printer Select Screen ............................................................................... 6-16
SCU Printer Setup Screen ................................................................................ 6-17
Advanced Vendor Options Screen ................................................................... 6-20
IMS Keypad Setup Screen ............................................................................... 6-21
IMS Keypad Parameter Screen ........................................................................ 6-22
IMS Keypad Defaults Screen ........................................................................... 6-24
Host Keypad Setup Screen ............................................................................... 6-26
Host Keypad Add Screen ................................................................................. 6-27
Host Keypad Default Screen ............................................................................ 6-32
SCP Printer Selection Screen - Current Provider Screen ................................. 6-34
Print Server Parameter Screen ......................................................................... 6-35
SCP Printer Selection Screen - Registered User Tab........................................ 6-36
Remote User (SCU) Registration Screen ......................................................... 6-37
System Management Tab ...................................................................................... 6-40
Diagnostics Tab ..................................................................................................... 6-41
pcANYWHERETM on Service PC............................................................................... 6-42
Installing pcANYWHERE on a Service PC .......................................................... 6-42
Set Up pcANYWHERE Connection Items ........................................................... 6-43
Connecting Service PC via Remote Access .......................................................... 6-48
Combination Telephone/Network Connection ................................................ 6-49
Disconnecting Service PC from PACS Link 9410 .......................................... 6-52
Cable Pinouts ............................................................................................................... 6-53
Adapter Cables ...................................................................................................... 6-53
Digital Cable Pinouts ............................................................................................. 6-55
Transfer Function Table Sets ....................................................................................... 6-56
References ............................................................................................................. 6-56
Definitions ............................................................................................................. 6-56
TFT Set Selections ................................................................................................ 6-57
ULUT Set Selections ............................................................................................. 6-61
Selecting Transfer Function Table Sets ................................................................. 6-66
Parts Breakdown ............................................................................................................ 7-1
Introduction.................................................................................................................. 7-1
Computer Internal/External Components ................................................................... 7-2
Configuration Worksheets ............................................................................................. A-1
Introduction.................................................................................................................. A-1
Worksheets................................................................................................................... A-1
8628588 - 2001 March xiii

xiv 2001 March - 8628588

System Description
Section 1: System Description
Introduction
The Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System (PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System) is a flexible, modular,
image acquisition system that can perform the following functions:
• Capture images from up to three directly-connected, non-DICOM modalities (image source devices).
• Print images to a local printer, connected directly to the PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System.
• Convert images to DICOM 3.0 print-class protocol and send to DICOM 3.0 printers on an Ethernet network.
• Receive DICOM 3.0 print-class images from image sources on an Ethernet network. The PACS Link 9410
converts these images to 952 or Superset protocol and prints them on the local printer connected to the PACS
Link 9410 system. In this mode, the PACS Link 9410 acts as a DICOM print server.
The PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System is available in several system configurations. Not all configurations can
perform all of the above functions.
Keypads or
Host Control Consoles
Digital or Video Modalities
(Non-DICOM)
Keypad or
Host Control
Console Modality
Server
M9410 Kodak
Laser
Imager
Fiber Optic
or Copper
DICOM Net
DICOM
DICOM Printer
Printer
DICOM 3.0 Print
Class
9410-01L
Figure 1–1 PACS Link 9410 - Basic System.
8628588 - 2001 March 1–1

The two main types of PACS Link 9410 systems are:
• Modality Server: acquires images from digital and/or video modalities and prints the images to a local printer
or a network printer.
• Print Server: receives images from image sources (remote users) on a DICOM/Ethernet network and prints
these images to a local printer.
The Modality Server and Print Server functions can be combined in a single PACS Link 9410 system that is
sometimes called a “combination box.”
A standard Pentium™-based personal computer with the Windows NT™ operating system and Kodak-supplied
application software is the main control and processing device within the PACS Link 9410 system. Special purpose
input and output boards are added to the computer for various system configurations.
There is no monitor, keyboard or mouse connected to the computer. Technicians must connect a separate Service PC
to the PACS Link 9410 system for service access, or temporarily connect a monitor, keyboard and mouse.
1–2 2001 March - 8628588

System Description
Input Options
The PACS Link 9410 can be configured for the following image input interfaces:
Video Input: Requires an IMAGRAPH™ video interface board. A single video board provides inputs for four
video modalities, however, only three can be used in PACS Link 9410 systems. A serial port
expansion board (COM board), also required, provides serial communication ports for keypad
or host control connections. An Auto-SYNC™ feature on the IMAGRAPH video interface
board simplifies video setup.
The IMAGRAPH video board plugs into an ISA expansion slot in the computer.
Digital Input: Requires a DPI-4 digital interface board with either a DPC external breakout box or a Y-cable.
One digital interface board provides image inputs for two digital modalities.
The DPI-4 board plugs into a PCI expansion slot in the computer.
Network Input: A network interface port on the computer provides the connection point to an Ethernet 10BaseT
or 100BaseT network. The network connection is used for image input only if the PACS Link
9410 is configured as a print server or combination box, where images from network sources are
printed on the local printer. Incoming images from the network must conform to DICOM 3.0
print-class protocol.
The PACS Link 9410 Modality Server configuration can accommodate up to three video or digital inputs in any
combination. Only two of the three image inputs can be digital.
Output Options
The following output options are available for the PACS Link 9410:
Network Output: A network interface port on the computer provides the connection point to an Ethernet
10BaseT or 100BaseT network. The PACS Link 9410 system can be configured to send
images to as many as eight DICOM 3.0 print-class destination devices on the network. The
network interface along with DICOM print-class output software are standard on all PACS
Link 9410 systems.
Local Printer Output: The following two options are available for output to a local printer (only one output board
can be included in a PACS Link 9410 system):
Fiber Optic Output: A fiber optic output board (FOPCIL board) is required to drive Kodak laser imagers with
fiber optic inputs. The FOPCIL board provides a digital output interface compatible with
the digital input interface in Kodak laser imagers. Both image and COM outputs are fiber
optic.
The FOPCIL board plugs into a PCI slot in the computer.

Copper Output: A copper (electrical) output board (COPCIL board) is required to drive Kodak laser
imagers with copper image and COM inputs. The COPCIL board provides a digital output
interface compatible with the digital input interface in Kodak laser imagers. Both image
and COM outputs are copper.
The COPCIL board plugs into a PCI slot in the computer.
8628588 - 2001 March 1–3

Supported Printers
Local Printers
The following Kodak Laser Imagers can be connected to the PACS Link 9410 as local printers:
Fiber Optic Input Copper Input

969 DryView 8100
DryView 8500 Plus DryView 8300
DryView DryView 8500 Standard
DryView 8600
DryView 8700 Standard
Only one local printer can be directly connected to the PACS Link 9410. If two local printers are required, a DryView
8800 Multi-Input Manager (MIM) can be connected to the FOPCIL output board in the PACS Link 9410 system.
Two local printers can then be connected to the DryView 8800 MIM.
Network Printers
The DryView 8300 Laser Imager is a DICOM-compatible network printer that can be used as a network printer for
the PACS Link 9410.
The following Kodak Laser Imagers cannot be directly connected to a network. The imagers can serve as network
printers for a PACS Link 9410 Modality Server when connected to a common network by a PACS Link 9410 Print
Server or a 9400 AUB Print Server.
• 969 Laser Imager

• DryView 8100 Laser Imager
• DryView 8600 Laser Imaging System
In addition to the Kodak laser imagers, printers from other manufacturers that use the DICOM 3.0 Print protocol
have been qualified as network printers for the PACS Link 9410.
1–4 2001 March - 8628588

System Description
Modem Board
To provide service technicians with remote access, a modem board can be added to the PACS Link 9410 computer.
As part of the service agreement, the customer must furnish an analog dial-up telephone line.
If two or more PACS Link 9410 systems are linked by an Ethernet network, a modem is required in only one of the
linked systems. If telephone access is required on a PACS Link 9410 that does not have a modem, you can call a
system with a modem and rout the call over the network.
User Control
User control of the PACS Link 9410 is similar to controlling image input and printing on a Kodak laser imager.
Operators use either a Kodak keypad or a host control console (operator control panel on or near the image source
device) to acquire images, select output destinations and print images. There is a separate keypad or host control
console for each non-DICOM modality.
If a PACS Link 9410 system is configured to function as a print server, there is no operator control at the PACS Link
9410 system over print-server activities. The PACS Link 9410 system automatically receives any network images
addressed to it and prints the images on the local printer.
For more information on user control, refer to the PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System User’s Guide.
Service Access
The PACS Link 9410 system does not have a monitor or keyboard. To service the PACS Link 9410 system,
technicians must either connect a temporary monitor, keyboard and mouse, or use a Service PC with
pcANYWHERETM remote access software. The Service PC can be connected to the PACS Link 9410 computer in
two ways:
• Over an Ethernet network. The Service PC must contain an Ethernet interface for this connection.
• Over the dial-up telephone network using a modem. The PACS Link 9410 computer contains a modem card for
this purpose.
When the Service PC is connected to a PACS Link 9410 system using pcANYWHERE software, the monitor,
keyboard and mouse on the Service PC appear as if they are directly connected to the PACS Link 9410 computer.
Once connected, the technician can use the Service PC to access the Service Maintenance Tool (SMT) or any
Windows NTTM feature on the target PACS Link 9410 system.
Service Maintenance Tool (SMT)

The PACS Link 9410 application software includes a software tool that service technicians can use to:
• Enter site-specific configuration parameters when they install a PACS Link 9410 system.
• Perform system management functions, such as backup and restore of configuration parameters.
• Perform diagnostic tasks such as viewing system logs and monitoring system performance.
For more information on the SMT, refer to Section 6, Additional Information.
8628588 - 2001 March 1–5

System Configurations
The following drawings show several possible PACS Link 9410 system configurations.
Keypads or
Host Control Consoles
Digital or Video Modalities
(Non-DICOM)
Keypad or
Host Control Combination Box
Console Modality
Server
M9410 Kodak
Laser
Imager
Fiber Optic
or Copper
DICOM Net
DICOM
DICOM Printer
Printer
DICOM 3.0 Print
Class
9410-01L
Figure 1–2 Basic System
Digital or Video
Digital or
Video
Kodak Laser
Digital or Video M9410 Imager
Fiber Optic
or Copper
Modality Server
Combination Box
Figure 1–3 Standalone System
1–6 2001 March - 8628588

System Description
Kodak Laser
Digital or Video Combination
Imager
Box
M9410
Video
Fiber Optic
Digital or Video
DICOM 3.0 Print Class
Ethernet
Digital or Video
M9410
Video
Digital or Video
Modality Server
Figure 1–4 Two Systems Sharing One Laser Imager
Digital or Video
Digital or Video
Digital or Video
igital or Video
Digital or Video Digital or Video
Fiber
Kodak
Optic or Laser Kodak
M9410 Copper Imager Fiber Laser
M9410 Optic or
Copper
Imager
Combination
Box
Ethernet
DICOM 3.0 Print Class Combination
Box
Figure 1–5 Two Systems Linked to Shared Laser Imagers
8628588 - 2001 March 1–7

DICOM Modalities Kodak

(Print Class Users) Laser
M9410
Imager
Fiber Optic
or Copper
Kodak
Print Server Laser
DICOM Net Imager
M9410
DICOM 3.0 Print

Fiber Optic
Class or Copper
Print Server
Figure 1–6 PACS Link 9410 Systems used as Print Servers
1–8 2001 March - 8628588

System Description
Specifications
PACS Link 9410 System
The computer specifications are as follows:
• Machine size: width: 20.6 cm [8.1 in]

height: 44.4 cm [17.5 in]
depth: 43.7 cm [17.2 in]
• Weight: 14.9 kilograms [33.0 pounds]
• Serial number location: Label on computer case
• Electrical requirements: 90-135 VAC, 60 Hz or 180-265 VAC, 50 Hz (voltage range must be manually set)
• Operating Environment: 105C to 355C [505F to 955F] at 20%-80% RH max, non-condensing
• Storage/Shipping Environment: -405C to 655C [-405F to 1495F] at 5% to 95% RH, non-condensing
• Operating Altitude: up to 3048 m [10,000 ft.]
• Heat dissipation: 230 kcal per hour [913 BTU per hour]
• Power consumption: 200 Watts maximum
IMS Keypad
• Images can be acquired and stored in random or sequential order.
• Can be located up to one kilometer (3280 feet) from the Kodak PACS Link 9410 Workstation, when using a
fiber cable.
• Image formats available on the keypad vary depending on the destination selected on the keypad:
Destination Available Formats

969 and DryView 8700 Laser Imagers 1:1, 2:1, 4:1, 6:1, 9:1, 12:1, 15:1, 16:1, and 20:1.
DryView 8500 Laser Imager 1:1, 2:1, 4:1, 6:1, 9:1 and 12:1
DryView 8300 and 8600 Laser Imagers 1:1, 2:1, 4:1 and 6:1
Host Control
• RS232 or RS422 connection to the Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System or UKEIB.
8628588 - 2001 March 1–9

This page is intentionally left blank.
1–10 2001 March - 8628588

Theory of Operation
Section 2: Theory of Operation
Introduction
This section describes the hardware and software components that make up Kodak PACS Link 9410 systems (PACS
Link 9410 systems):
Hardware Components
• Computer
• Serial port expansion boards
• IMAGRAPHTM video interface board
• DPI-4 digital interface board and DPC breakout box
• FOPCIL fiber optic output board (local printer interface board)
• COPCIL copper output board (local printer interface board)
• Modem
• Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS)
Software Components
• Windows NT WorkstationTM operating system
• PACS Link 9410 Application software
• Service Maintenance Tool (SMT)
• pcANYWHERETM remote access software
Related Components
• IMS keypad
• Host Protocol Translator (HPT) keypads
• UKEIB
8628588 - 2001 March 2–1

Hardware Components
The components described in this section are part of the PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System.
Computer
The PACS Link 9410 is designed around a standard PentiumTM-based personal computer with the Windows NTTM
WorkstationTM operating system. The computer runs the application software, which controls all of the functions
performed by the PACS Link 9410 system. The standard computer hardware is supplemented by special purpose
input and output boards that plug into PCI and ISA expansion slots in a removable expansion card cage (Figure 2–1).
Note
Some Dell computers have a slide bar on the back that must be moved before the front release button will work.
Expansion
Card Cage
Cover Release
Button Release Lever 9410-27A
Figure 2–1 PACS Link 9410 Computer
2–2 2001 March - 8628588

Theory of Operation
Serial Communication Ports

RS422 serial ports connect keypad and host control inputs to PACS Link 9410 systems. A serial port is required for
each keypad and each host control input in a system. These serial ports are provided by several types of interface
boards. The two standard serial ports in the PACS Link 9410 computer (COM1 and COM2) are RS232 ports and
cannot be used for keypad or host control connections.
In PACS Link 9410 systems with an IMAGRAPHTM video board, serial port expansion boards are used for keypad
or host control inputs associated with the video modalities. The serial port boards plug into an ISA slot in the
computer, and are used in various PACS Link 9410 configurations. Two serial port boards are used:
• 2-port serial port board with RS422 interface.
• 4-port serial port expansion board with breakout box (either RS232 or RS422).
Figure 2–4 and Figure 2–5 show how the serial port boards are used along with the IMAGRAPH video board.
The PACS Link 9410 application software monitors the serial ports for commands sent from the keypads or host
control console and also sends back status information via the serial ports.
The following serial ports can be included in a PACS Link 9410 system. The port names are the same names used
by the Service Maintenance Tool (SMT) to identify and configure the ports.
Port Name Description

COM 1 Standard computer RS232 serial ports.
COM 2
COM 3 RS422 serial ports provided by an optional 2-port serial port board.
COM 4
COM 5 RS422 serial ports provided by an optional RocketPort serial port board.
COM 6
COM 7
COM 8
8628588 - 2001 March 2–3

2-Port RS422 Serial Port Board

Provides serial ports for connecting keypads and host control inputs to the PACS Link 9410 system. The 2-port serial
port board is usually used in systems with one or two modalities and plugs into an ISA slot on the computer expansion
chassis. For systems with three modalities, a RocketPort 4-port expansion board is used.
The two ports on the serial-port board are factory configured as ports COM3 and COM4. Switches and jumpers on
the board are used to set the port numbers and interrupt levels. Figure 2–2 shows the factory jumper and switch
settings for the 2-port board. Do not change these settings in the field.
Set the following parameters for each serial port using SMT (refer to Section 3 in this manual for procedures for
setting these parameters):
Host Control Input

Parameter IMS Keypad Setting Setting
Baud Rate 19200 1200
Parity (odd, even or none) None Even
Protocol SuperSet 952
Jumpers
COM3 Base
Address PORT #2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
COM 4
ON
Only 6 ON PORT #1
COM4 Base
Address
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 COM 3
ON
Only 2 & 6 ON
COM3 IRQ COM4 IRQ

2 3 4 5 6 7 X 2 3 4 5 6 7 X
J4 J3
Jumper in Jumper in
Position 7 Position 5
r9410-17L
Figure 2–2 2-Port Serial Board (RS422)
2–4 2001 March - 8628588

Theory of Operation
RocketPort Board
The RocketPort board, along with a companion breakout box, provides four serial ports for connecting keypads and
host control devices to the PACS Link 9410 system. The RocketPort board is usually used in systems with three
modalities and plugs into an ISA expansion slot in the PACS Link 9410 computer; for systems with one or two
modalities, use a 2-port expansion board.
The four ports on the RocketPort board are configured as ports COM5 through COM8. An 8-section DIP switch sets
the I/O Base Address for the 4-port board. Figure 2–3 shows the factory settings for these switches. Do not change
these settings in the field. Other parameters related to this board can be set using the Service Maintenance Tool.
An RS422/RS232 switch on the breakout box is factory set in the RS422 for each port. Leave the switches in this
position unless an RS232 host-control input is connected directly to a port (without a UKEIB interface box).
RocketPort Board
IO Switch Selector
1 2 3 4 5 6 78 Host
COM 5 0 COM 7
232 422 232 422
ON COM 6 COM 8
1st IS A
232 422 232 422
Rocket 4-Port Breakout Box

9410-18L
Figure 2–3 RocketPort Board and Breakout Box
Set the following parameters for each serial port using SMT (refer to Section 6 for information on using SMT):
Host Control Device

Parameter IMS Keypad Setting Setting
Baud Rate 19200 1200
Parity (odd, even or none) None Even
Protocol SuperSet 952
8628588 - 2001 March 2–5

IMAGRAPHTM Video Interface Board

The IMAGRAPH video interface board is a four-channel video frame grabber capable of capturing a wide range of
standard and non-standard video signals. Although there are four video input channels, only three can be used in
PACS Link 9410 systems. Figure 2–4 shows how the video board is used in a system with inputs from two video
modalities. The video modalities can be located up to 60 meters from the PACS Link 9410.
Video Image #1
Modality
Keypad or #1
Host Control
Console
for Modality #1
Coax
Control #1 Cables
UKEIB
Computer
IMAGRAPH
Video Image #2 Video Board
Modality
#2
2 - Port
Serial Port
Control #2 Board
UKEIB
Copper
Keypad or Cables
Host Control
Console
for Modality #2
9410-03L
Figure 2–4 Video Board Connections
2–6 2001 March - 8628588

Theory of Operation
There are two connections to the PACS Link 9410 system for each video modality.
• An analog video image input (connects directly to the video board).
• A Kodak keypad or a host control console associated with the modality (connects to serial port, usually through
a UKEIB).
Some modalities require two serial ports: one for a host control input and one for a destination switching keypad.
The keypad or host control device sends commands (e.g., an Acquire command) that indirectly control the video
board. The PACS Link 9410 application software monitors each serial port for keypad/host control commands,
interprets these commands and forwards appropriate control codes to the video board. The PACS Link 9410 system
also returns status codes to the keypad or host control device on the serial port.
If there are one or two video inputs, a 2-port serial port expansion board (Figure 2–4) can provide the keypad/host
control connections. If there are three video inputs (the maximum permitted), a RocketPort 4-port serial port board
(Figure 2–5) is required.
The IMAGRAPHTM board uses composite sync pulses, included in the video signal, if supplied by the video
modality. If not, an internal PLL (phase lock loop) circuit on the IMAGRAPH board generates the necessary sync
signals.
Modality 1
Coax
Video Image Modality 2 Cables
Inputs from
Modalities Computer
Modality 3
IMAGRAPH
Video Board
Modality 1
UKEIB 1 Rocket Port
4 - Port Serial Port
Control Breakout Board
Inputs from Modality 2
Box
Keypads or UKEIB 2
RS422
Host Control Input
Devices
Modality 3
UKEIB 3
Copper
Cables
9410-02L
Figure 2–5 Video Board Connections - Three Modalities
8628588 - 2001 March 2–7

Video Image Acquisition

The video board captures video frames from video modalities and converts the image data to digital form. This
process is controlled by the PACS Link 9410 application software. The main steps are:
1. A keypad or host control device sends an Acquire command to one of the serial ports.
2. The PACS Link 9410 application software interprets the command and notifies the video board, over the PCI
bus, to prepare for a frame grab operation.
3. The application software specifies the video input channel to be sampled, based on which serial port the acquire
command came from.
4. At the beginning of the next video frame, the video board samples the video signal on the specified channel and
converts it to digital pixel form (performs analog-to-digital conversion). The digital image is stored temporarily
in a buffer memory within the video board.
5. The application software reads the digital image from the buffer memory and stores it for further processing and
routing to an output device.
The video board can acquire from only one input channel at a time. The PACS Link 9410 application software honors
acquire commands in the order they are received.
Video Board Setup
When installing a PACS Link 9410 system with video inputs, you must enter video-board parameter values to
synchronize the video board with the connected modalities. These parameters are entered and adjusted using the
Service Maintenance Tool (SMT). You can enter separate parameter values for each video input channel.
To set the video parameters individually, you must have detailed specifications for the video frame you want
captured. An Auto-SYNCTM feature, initiated using SMT, simplifies video board setup and eliminates the need for
video specifications. The Auto-SYNC process can analyze an unknown video signal and automatically set the video
board parameters. If necessary you can then use SMT to fine tune any of the video parameter values to optimize
image quality.
Detailed setup procedures for the video board are located in Section 3 of this manual.
2–8 2001 March - 8628588

Theory of Operation
Video Board Layout

Figure 2–6 shows the location of connectors, configuration jumper blocks and LEDs on the ISA board.
LED’s
D1 D2 D3 D4
J3
Green J7 J4
Red J8 J5
J9 J6
J10
D1 D4 Pin 1
Pin 8
Coax
Connector
J2
J11
J12
J13
J14
J15
J16
ISA Bus
Connector
J17
J18
J19
J20
J21
Note: J3 through J22 are jumper blocks. J22

1 2 3 1 2 3
Key:
Jumper Jumper Jumper Jumper

Present not Across Across
Present Pins 1 and 2 Pins 2 and 3
9410-06L
Figure 2–6 Video Board Layout - ISA Version
Video Board Coax Connector Pin Usage

There are eight coaxial connectors on the edge of the video board, enclosed in single connector shell. Pins 1 through
4 are used for video image inputs (only three can be used in the PACS Link 9410 system). Pins 5 through 8 are used
for external sync inputs and are not used in the PACS Link 9410 system.
Pin 1 Analog video input channel 1 Pin 5 Not used

8628588 - 2001 March 2–9

Video Board LED Indicators
LED ON Indicates Description

D1 Green Channel 4 active When a green LED is ON, the video board is busy
acquiring an image on the corresponding input channel.
D2 Green Channel 3 active
D1 Red Host memory access The computer is unloading an image from the video
board buffer memory.
D2 Red Sync not detected No sync signals available on active input channels.
D3 Red PLL out of lock Unable to supply sync signals per video input.
D4 Red Interlaced (flashing) Interlaced mode in effect.
Configuration Jumpers
Figure 2–6 shows the factory-installed video board configuration jumper positions. In most installations these
jumpers are not changed in the field. Do not change any jumper positions without direction from Service Engineering.
Video Cable
An 8-channel coax cable assembly, supplied with the video board, connects to the video source devices (modalities).
A1
A2
Length: 4 ft. A3
A4 Video Image
Inputs
T1
T2
T3
T4 Sync Inputs
(Not Used)
Connects to
Video Board Coax
Connectors
9410-21L
Figure 2–7 Coax Cable Assembly
2–10 2001 March - 8628588

Theory of Operation
Video Input Signal Specifications

The video board can capture black and white video signals that meet the following specifications:
• Horizontal frequency: 15 to 78 kHz
Back Porch: 0.5 microseconds minimum
Blanking: 2 microseconds minimum
Horizontal sync pulse: 0.5 microseconds minimum
• Vertical frequency: 1 Hz to 200 Hz
Back Porch: 1H minimum
Blanking: 3H minimum
Vertical sync pulse: 1H minimum (where H = time from the start of one line to the start of the next line)
• External composite sync: Signal levels: Standard TTL levels (0 > 0.80 volts, 1 > 2.4 volts)
8628588 - 2001 March 2–11

Digital Interface Board

The DPI-4 Digital Interface Board captures images from modalities that transmit image data in digital. The DPI-4
board and companion DPC Breakout Box provide input connections for two 8-bit digital modalities. A 2-COM serial
card or RocketPort board are used for host control and keypad connection. The DPI-4 board plugs into a PCI slot in
the computer. Only one DPI board is allowed in a PACS Link 9410 system.
The DPI-4 board contains 32 megabytes of memory, of which 31 Mb is available for image capture. Using SMT, the
memory can be allocated to the two input channels based on image size. If image size is equal on both channels, you
should allocate 15 Mb to each channel. If image sizes on the two channels are unequal, allocate the memory in
proportion to image size.
Digital modalities can be located up to 60 meters from PACS Link 9410 systems. Figure 2–8 shows how a DPI-4
board is used in PACS Link 9410 systems. Figure 2–9 shows the DPC Breakout Box.
Digital Image
Keypad or Modality #1
Host Control Console
Control Computer
UKEIB
DPI-4
Control Board
UKEIB
Keypad or
Digital
Modality #2 Image
Serial
Port
(RS422)
Figure 2–8 Digital Input Connections
2–12 2001 March - 8628588

Theory of Operation
Each digital modality has two connections to the PACS Link 9410:
• A digital image input connects to an image port on the DPI-4 board.
• A Kodak keypad or a host-control console associated with the modality connects to a serial port on the
RocketPort board.
For some digital modalities two serial ports are required: one for a host control input and one for a destination
switching keypad
The keypad or a host control device sends commands (e.g., an Acquire command) that indirectly control the DPI-4
board. The PACS Link 9410 application software monitors each serial port for keypad/host control commands,
interprets these commands and forwards appropriate control codes to the DPI-4 board. The PACS Link 9410 system
also returns status codes to the keypad or host control device on the serial port.
Note
Host control and keypad inputs on a DPC box are not used.
Image Port Serial Ports

Data Error (not used) DPI-4 Digital
Req Interface Board
Power
A-Data A-Host Control A C-1 Keypad
B-Data B-Host Control B C-1 Keypad
Req
Data Image Port

Error
Computer
DPC Breakout Box
Figure 2–9 DPC Breakout Box Details
8628588 - 2001 March 2–13

DPC RS422/RS232 Configuration

The serial ports on the DPC breakout box should not be used.
DPI-4 Board Setup
When you install a PACS Link 9410 system with digital image inputs, you must enter parameter values for the image
data ports and for the serial ports that are used for keypad and host control inputs. Enter these parameters using the
Service Maintenance Tool (SMT). You can enter separate parameter values for each digital input channel and each
serial port. The following parameters must be entered:
Imager Port Parameters

Pixel depth
Header
Acquire Mode
Acquire Timeout
Transfer Rate
Aspect Ratio
Parity
Memory Allocation
Refer to Section 3 in this manual for detailed setup procedures and parameter values for the digital board.
2–14 2001 March - 8628588

Theory of Operation
DPI-4 Hardware Options

Memory Size Switch
The DPI-4 board contains memory that is used for temporary image storage. The board is designed for several
memory size options from 8 to 40 megabytes. In PACS Link 9410 systems, the memory size will always be 32 MB
and cannot be upgraded in the field.
Rotary switch SW1 on the DPI-4 board is factory set to match the memory size. The correct setting for 32 MB is
position 3 (midway between the 2 and 4 marks). Do not change this switch setting.
Terminating Resistors
Several pluggable terminating resistors (Figure 2–10) are factory-installed. Do not remove or change the position of
these resistors.
R10 R9
R7 R8 Rotary Switch
SW 1
R4 R3
Pluggable R6 R5
Resistors U30 Memory
U32 Memory
r9410-20L
Figure 2–10 DP1-4 Hardware Options
8628588 - 2001 March 2–15

Fiber Optic Output (FOPCIL) Board

The FOPCIL board is used to connect the PACS Link 9410 system to a local printer (laser imager) with fiber optic
image and COM (serial port) inputs. Figure 2–11 shows how the FOPCIL board connects to a laser imager (the laser
imager can be located up to 1000 meters away from the PACS Link 9410 system).
Note
The drawing does not show the exact position of the Image and COM connectors.
B-Lead B-Lead
B Fiber Optic Cables B
Image Image
Port A A Port
A-Lead A-Lead
A-Lead A-Lead
Fiber Optic Cables
COM A A COM
Port B Port
B
B-Lead B-Lead
FOPCIL Input Module or

PACS Link 9410 Computer Board Fiber Interface
(Rear) Board Laser Imager or
DryViewE 8800 MIM
9410-10L1
Figure 2–11 FOPCIL Board Connections
When installing a PACS Link 9410 system with a FOPCIL board, you must enter parameter values that correspond
to the laser imager to which the FOPCIL board connects. Adjust the FOPCIL parameters using the Service
Maintenance Tool (SMT). Refer to Section 3 in this manual for laser imager setup procedures.
2–16 2001 March - 8628588

Theory of Operation
Copper Output (COPCIL) Board

The COPCIL output board is used to connect the PACS Link 9410 system to a local laser printer (laser imager) with
copper image and copper COM (serial port) inputs. A COPCIL board is designed to drive a Kodak laser imager with
a digital image interface and a RS422 serial port (COM port) for control.
If the laser imager provides two COM ports for control input, the Y cable can be connected to either the COM 0 or
COM 1 port. With extension cables, the local laser imager can be located up to 60 meters from the PACS Link 9410
system. Figure 2–12 shows how the copper output board connects to a laser imager.
50-Pin Connector
50-Pin Connector Digital Image

Port
Image
Control
RS422 COM
Port
Y Cable (3 Meters)
PACS Link 9410 Computer Laser Imager with
(Rear) 74-0500-5864-8 9-Pin
Copper Image and Connector
COPCIL COM Ports
Output Board
9410-62L1
Figure 2–12 COPCIL Board Connections
Modem Board
An optional modem board can be included in the PACS Link 9410 system for remote maintenance access. If a modem
is installed, a service technician can use a Service PC with pcANYWHERETM to access the PACS Link 9410
computer over a telephone line and run the Service Maintenance Tool (SMT) software.
If several PACS Link 9410 units are connected to a network, usually only one unit is equipped with a modem. A
Service PC can access any PACS Link 9410 unit on the network by first calling the unit that contains a modem and
then connecting to another PACS Link 9410 unit using a pcANYWHERE connection over the Ethernet network.
8628588 - 2001 March 2–17

Software Components
Windows NTTM Operating System
All PACS Link 9410 systems are provided with the MicrosoftTM WindowsNTTM WorkstationTM operating system.
WindowsNT is a high-end, high-reliability operating system that has a user interface nearly identical to
Windows 95TM.
Most software-related maintenance procedures on the PACS Link 9410 system are performed using the Service
Maintenance Tool (SMT). However, a few tasks require service technicians to interact directly with Windows NT.
These tasks include:
• Enter network parameters for the PACS Link 9410 system.
• Run the DBClean program - used to clear print jobs that are hung up (incapable of being printed) from the system.
• Run the DBEmpty program - used to clear the configuration database.
• Start SMT.
• Reload software.
2–18 2001 March - 8628588

Theory of Operation
PACS Link 9410 Application Software

The PACS Link 9410 application software consists of several subprograms called processes which control the 9410
operation. For any PACS Link 9410 system, the processes that run depend on the input and output options and the
way they are configured with SMT. Table 2–1 identifies these processes.
Table 2–1 PACS Link 9410 Application Software Processes

Process Description
DBService Provides an interface to the PACS Link 9410 data repository for access by job processes and
translators. Supports print job management, equipment information, status interfaces and
administrative interface.
Supervisor Starts all necessary PACS Link 9410 child programs and passes correct instance numbers to each
program so the correct configuration information can be accessed. Monitors child programs. Closes
child programs. Restarts print jobs that were in process if processing failed.
JOBSPOOLER Provides support for job transmission through the PACS Link 9410 system. JOBSPOOLER is
instantiated multiple times to support job processing for each destination. Jobs are created in the
database from the different input interfaces. JOBSPOOLER is instantiated to access the jobs from
the database and output them to the correct destination.
DISOL Provides DICOM Support as a Print SCP. Accepts DICOM print requests and formats them for
output to a network printer. Returns printer status to client.
Serial Comm Supports serial communication between processes. One copy runs for each serial port configured
for an IMS Keypad or host control input. (Applies only to the serial ports provided by the 2-Port
Serial Port Board or the RocketPort Board - COM 3 through COM 8.)
952 Parser Reads data from the 831/952 serial port, handles all ack/nack processing and sends the message to
be interpreted. Accepts responses and transmits them out across the serial port.
One copy runs for each host control input configured.

SuperSet Parser Interprets Imation’s SuperSet command protocol (from an IMS keypad). It accepts SuperSet packets
from the serial data port, unpacks them and sends them to the processor for interpretation. It will
also accept responses from the processor, pack and output them across the serial port to the IMS
keypad.
One copy runs for each IMS Keypad configured.

IMAGRAPHTM Provides support for the video interface in PACS Link 9410 system. Configures each channel on the
image acquisition card from the configuration file in the database. Acquires 8-bit image snapshot
into an image buffer. Reads image into PACS Link 9410 memory. Saves image in a flat file and then
saves the database entry describing the image.
One copy runs for each configured IMAGRAPH video input channel.
DPI-4 Image Provides support for digital image acquisition on PACS Link 9410 system. Configures digital image
channel from configuration file in database. Acquires 8-bit digital image. Reads image into PACS
Link 9410 memory. Saves image in a flat file and saves database entry describing the image.
One copy runs for each configured DPI-4 digital input channel.
DPI-4 Serial Provides command support for digital image acquisition. Configures serial channel from
configuration file in database. When requested by client, accepts a command buffer, frames it based
upon the command set and sends command out to the serial port. Processes command data received
from serial port. Processes retries.
One copy runs for each serial port on the DPC Breakout Box configured for a keypad or host control
input.
8628588 - 2001 March 2–19
The application software starts automatically and runs continuously when the PACS Link 9410 system is powered
up unless a service technician stops it using the Service Maintenance Tool (SMT). The application software must be
stopped before SMT is used to configure the system.
When the PACS Link 9410 application software is running, the active processes appear in the Windows NT task bar
at the bottom of the screen. The active processes are removed from the task bar when the application software is
stopped.
The application software includes a database that contains the configuration parameters that Service Technicians
enter from SMT when they install a PACS Link 9410 system.
2–20 2001 March - 8628588

Theory of Operation

The Service Maintenance Tool is a software tool that is resident in the PACS Link 9410 system and is used by Service
Technicians. Refer to Section 6 for a detailed description of SMT. SMT has three main functions:
• System Configuration - used to load configuration parameters into the PACS Link 9410 system.
• System Administration - functions include starting and stopping application software, creating and restoring
back-up files and database maintenance.
• Diagnostic - tests the FOPCIL and COPCIL printer interface boards. Also lets service technicians view several
logs that are useful for troubleshooting.
pcANYWHERETM Remote Access Software

pcANYWHERE remote access software allows a Service PC to connect to a PACS Link 9410 system over an
Ethernet network or a dial-up telephone line. Both the PACS Link 9410 system and the Service PC must have
pcANYWHERE software installed. In the PACS Link 9410, pcANYWHERE is configured as a host, which means
that the PACS Link 9410 is ready to take a call from a Service PC at any time. When the Service PC connects, its
monitor, keyboard and mouse can be used to control the PACS Link 9410 system as if they are directly connected.
With pcANYWHERE, a technician can use a Service PC to access the SMT on a PACS Link 9410 system, examine
logs and upgrade the application software.
8628588 - 2001 March 2–21

Related Components
The following items are not part of the PACS Link 9410 system but are used in systems that use the PACS Link 9410
unit.
UKEIB
The UKEIB (Universal Keyboard External Interface Box) is a multi-purpose interface box that connects an IMS
Keypad, or a host control input, to a PACS Link 9410 system. The UKEIB converts the keypad or host control
commands to signal levels suitable for input to the PACS Link 9410 system. The UKEIB can also be used, along with
a Host Protocol Translator (HPT) Keypad, to convert non-831/952 host control commands to 952 protocol, required
for input to the PACS Link 9410.
The UKEIB supplies +5V and +12V power to the IMS or HPT keypad. Figure 2–13 shows the UKEIB inputs and
outputs.
UKEIB
From IMS or Imager Port To 9410

Keypad (RS422)
HPT Keypad Port RS422
(RS422) Serial Port
+5v, +12v
to Keypad
Ch A
Fiber Optic Not Used For PACS Link
Serial Port Ch B 9410 Connections
Host Port
From Host (RS422
or RS232) Foot Switch Foot Switch
Control Console Port
r9410-19L
Figure 2–13 UKEIB Inputs and Outputs
The UKEIB can be setup, using configuration switches, for any one of five types of inputs:
Input UKEIB Function

IMS Keypad (RS422, SuperSet command set) Passes keypad commands through to the RS422 Imager port.
RS422 host control (952 command set) Passes host control commands through to the RS422 Imager port.
RS232 host control (952 command set) Converts RS232 signal levels to RS422 levels. Routes to the RS422
Imager port.
RS422 host control (non-831/952 command set) Routes non-831/952 host control commands through the HPT
HPT Keypad required. keypad for conversion to 952 protocol and then to the RS422
Imager port.
RS232 host control (non-831/952 command set) Converts RS232 signal levels to RS422 levels. Routes non-831/952
HPT Keypad required host control commands through the HPT keypad for conversion to
952 protocol and then to the RS422 Imager port.
The UKEIB also provides a reverse path for responses the PACS Link 9410 returns to the keypad or host control
console. For host control input, a Host Protocol Translator (HPT) keypad may or may not be required, depending on
the set of control commands transmitted by the modality. If the host control console transmits the 952 or 831
command set, no HPT keypad is required. If the modality transmits some other set of commands, an HPT keypad is
required to convert the host commands to 952 protocol.
2–22 2001 March - 8628588

Theory of Operation
IMS Keypad
The IMS keypad is marketed as the PACS Link Keypad, however, this manual uses the name IMS Keypad to match
the name used in the Service Maintenance Tool (SMT). The IMS Keypad is an operator-control device that connects
to a serial port on the PACS Link 9410 system. Each keypad is associated with a specific modality.
The IMS Keypad is physically identical to, and functionally similar to, the keypads used for the Kodak 969 and
DryView 8700 Laser Imagers. The main functions controlled from an IMS Keypad are:
• Image acquisition from the associated modality.
• Image formatting on a film.
• Setting print parameters, such as contrast and density.
• Selecting destinations (selecting one of the printers connected to the PACS Link 9410 system).
• Image printing.
For more information on Keypad functions, refer to the PACS LINK 9410 Acquisition System User Guide.
8628588 - 2001 March 2–23

Figure 2–14 and Figure 2–15 show how IMS Keypads connect to the PACS Link 9410 for video and digital
modalities. Although a keypad is always associated with a single modality, there is no physical connection between
the keypad and modality. When the PACS Link 9410 is installed, a software "connection" is setup with SMT between
a keypad and the image input board/channel to which the modality is connected. SMT is also used to specify which
of the printers connected to the PACS Link 9410 appear on the keypad destination select menu.
Video Image #1
Modality
#1
Keypad for
Modality #1
Control #1
UKEIB
Computer
IMAGRAPH
Video Image #2 Video Board
Modality
#2
2 - Port
Serial Port
Control #2 Board*
UKEIB
Keypad for
Modality #2
r9410-03L
Figure 2–14 IMS Keypad Connections for Video Modalities
Digital Image
Keypad or Modality #1
Control Computer
UKEIB
DPI-4
Control Board
UKEIB
Keypad or
Digital
Modality #2 Image
Serial
Port
(RS422)
Figure 2–15 IMS Keypad Connections for Digital Modalities
2–24 2001 March - 8628588

Theory of Operation
Host Control Inputs

In place of an IMS Keypad, the PACS Link 9410 system permits connection of a non-Kodak control device (that is
part of, or associated with, a modality). The control device may be a control panel, a type of keypad or a personal
computer programmed to provide operator control functions similar to an IMS Keypad. This type of control is termed
host control. Throughout this manual the term host control console refers to a non-Kodak operator control device.
Like an IMS Keypad, a host control console connects to a serial port on the PACS Link 9410 system, usually through
a UKEIB (Figure 2–16). The host control device must provide an RS232 or RS422 serial port interface for this
connection.
The PACS Link 9410 is designed to communicate with host control consoles that use the 831/952 command set,
however, certain non-831/952 command sets can be accommodated by adding a supplemental Host Protocol
Translator (HPT) keypad.
Modality
Computer
Image Image
Image Interface
Source Board
Host Control
Commands To Local
Host Control Printer(s)
UKEIB Serial Port
Console
To Network
RS232 or RS422 Printers
Serial Port
831/952 Command
Set
r9410-03L
Figure 2–16 Basic Host Control Connection
Three host control configurations are used in PACS Link 9410 systems (refer to the following sections for detailed
information):
• Host control with HPT keypad.
• Host control with Destination Switching Keypad.
• Host control console with destination switching capability (no keypad).
8628588 - 2001 March 2–25

Host Control with HPT Keypad

A Host Protocol Translator (HPT) keypad is required with modalities that use a non-831/952 command set to
communicate with the PACS Link 9410 system. The keypad converts the foreign commands to 952 commands and
also provides destination switching capability (allows the operator to choose a printer).
Figure 2–17 shows how an HPT keypad connects into the system. Commands from the host control console are
routed through the HPT keypad for conversion. The HPT keypad must be factory programmed to convert a specific
non-831/952 command set. Currently three versions of the HPT keypad are used in PACS Link 9410 systems:
• SHPT keypad for some Siemens modalities.
• YHPT keypad for some GE modalities.
• THPT keypad for some Toshiba modalities.
In addition to command set translation, the HPT keypad lets the operator switch destinations. In some cases HPT
keypads are configured to allow the operator to switch from host control to full keypad control.
Modality
Computer
Image Image
Image Interface
Source Board
Host Control
To Local
Host Control Input
UKEIB Serial Port Printer(s)
Console
To Network
Printers
RS232 or RS422 HPT Keypad

Serial Port Keypad Port
(Non-831/952
Command Set) r9410-03L
Figure 2–17 HPT Keypad Connection
HPT Keypads let users select from up to four printer/film destination combinations. The imager choices appear in
the Output button display on the HPT keypad. The printer/film destination combinations available on the keypad are
established when the HPT keypad is configured with SMT. For printers that have two film destinations (processor
and magazine), both destinations can be displayed on the keypad. For example, there could be two choices for
Local Printer - Processor and Local Printer - Magazine.
Although the printer/film destinations that are available to the HPT keypad are setup with SMT, the printer names
assigned with SMT do not appear on the keypad. The printer names displayed on HPT keypads cannot be changed
to match names given to the printers in SMT. For example, if four printer choices are needed on an HPT keypad, the
only choices programmed into the keypad are:
• Imager 1 Magazine • Imager 1 Processor

• Imager 2 Magazine • Imager 2 Processor
Regardless of how the printers are named when they are setup in SMT, they will be represented by the above names
on the HPT keypad. Refer to Section 3 in this manual for HPT keypad setup procedures.
2–26 2001 March - 8628588

Theory of Operation
Host Control with Destination Switching Keypad

For host control consoles without destination switching capability, a supplemental IMS Keypad is added to provide
a way for the operator to select one of the printers connected to the PACS Link 9410 system. The Destination
Switching Keypad displays a list of local and network printers that the user can select from. The destination switching
keypad can be configured to give the user control of some print parameters such as contrast and maximum density,
however, it cannot be used to control acquisition or printing of images.
Figure 2–18 shows how a Destination Switching Keypad connects into a PACS Link 9410 system. A Destination
Switching Keypad is always associated with a single-host control modality. Commands from the keypad supplement
commands from the host control console.
Modality
Computer
Image Image
Image Interface
Source Board
Host Control Input To Local

Host Control Serial Port Printer(s)
UKEIB
Console
Control Input
RS232 or RS422 Serial Port To Network
Serial Port Printers
831/952 Command
Set
r9410-03L
IMS
Keypad UKEIB
Destination
Switching
Keypad
Figure 2–18 Destination Switching Keypad
Destination Switching Keypads cannot perform all of the normal IMS Keypad functions; they are limited to printer
selection and the following optional functions.
Contrast: Allows the keypad user to select the contrast setting for images printed on the selected printer.
DMax: Allows the keypad user to control the maximum density setting for images printed on the selected
printer.
Beta: Allows the keypad user to select either Smooth or Sharp image processing for images printed on the
selected printer.
Frame: Allows the keypad user to choose either ON or OFF. When ON, the printer adds a narrow frame
around each image it prints.
Image Allows the keypad user to choose either ON or OFF. When ON, the printer rotates each image 90
Rotation: degrees. (Not displayed on the keypad if the selected printer does not support this feature.)
Border Allows the keypad user to select either dark or clear borders. (Not displayed on the keypad if the
Density: selected printer does not support this feature.)
A Destination Switching Keypad must be set up with the Service Maintenance Tool (for Destination Switching
Keypad setup instructions, refer to Section 3). Using SMT, an installer performs the following setup tasks:
• Designates an IMS keypad to be a Destination Switching Keypad.
• Specifies which of the printers connected to the PACS Link 9410 system will be displayed on the Destination
Switching Keypad printer menu.
• Selects which of the six optional functions will be active on the Destination Switching Keypad.
• Associates the Destination Switching Keypad with a specific image input board and channel.
8628588 - 2001 March 2–27

Host Control Console with Destination Switching Capability (No Keypad)

Some host control consoles have destination switching capability (not common). This type of console allows
operators to choose a specific printer for image output. This configuration (Figure 2–19) requires no supplemental
keypad.
Like the other host control configurations, this type of host control input must be setup with SMT. Using SMT, an
installer associates this host control input with a specific image input board and channel, and specifies which of the
PACS Link 9410 printers will be available to the host control console.
Modality
Computer
Image Image
Image Interface
Source Board
To Local
Host Control Host Control Printer
Console With Commands
Destination UKEIB Serial Port
Switching
To Network
Printers
RS232 or RS422
Serial Port
831/952 Command
Set
r9410-03L
Figure 2–19 Host Control with Destination Switching Capability
Uninterruptable Power Supply

To protect against power interruptions and brown-outs, an Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) is included with the
PACS Link 9410 system. If the AC power fails or drops below a preset threshold, the UPS automatically switches in
and provides a run time of several minutes for the computer.
The UPS also provides surge protection and provides a short-term back-up power source. It is not capable of
automatically shutting down the computer if power is not restored before the battery in the UPS is discharged. Two
UPS models are available, one for the U.S. (120V, 60-cycle power) and one for 220V, 50-cycle power.
2–28 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Section 3: Installation
Introduction
Installing a Kodak PACS Link 9410 system (PACS Link 9410 system) includes the following major steps, which
are described in this section:
• Obtain network parameters for the PACS Link 9410 system and Service PC.
• Check site preparation.
• Unpack system components.
• Inventory system components.
• Hardware configuration.
• Connect cables and power.
• Initial system startup.
• Laser imager preparation.
• Configuration using the Service Maintenance Tool (SMT).
• Test printers.
• Customer briefing.
Equipment and Tools Required

To install the PACS Link 9410 you need:
• Monitor kit (PC monitor, keyboard and mouse) or Service PC with pcANYWHERETM remote control software.
• PACS Link 9410 software media (Ghost diskette and Image CD).
Note
If the PACS Link 9410 system you are installing has video inputs, it is highly recommended that you use a Monitor
Kit, rather than a Service PC, for the installation.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–1

Obtaining Network ID Information

When you configure the system using the Service Maintenance Tool (SMT), you will be prompted to enter the
information indicated by *** in Table 3–1 and Table 3–2. Network parameters should be available from the
customer's network administrator. Record this information on the configuration worksheets, located in Appendix A.
Table 3–2 contains information required to configure a Kodak PACS Link 9410 system to send images to a local
printer or network destination devices. Additional information may be required to set up local printer or network
destination devices.
Table 3–1 Network Parameters

Parameter PACS Link 9410 Service PC
IP Address *** ***
IP Mask (Subnet Mask) *** ***
Default Gateway Address *** ***
(Gateway IP Address) (Not required for some networks) (Not required for some networks)
AE Title IMN_9410 or other AE Title name Not Applicable
Computer Name (see note below) *** Not Required
Workgroup Name *** ***
(Not required for some networks) (Not required for some networks)
Note: Typical computer names used for the PACS Link 9410 system are:
9410MS_CT (for PACS Link 9410 Modality Server located in CT scanner area)
9410PS_CT (for PACS Link 9410 Print Server located in CT scanner area)
Table 3–2 Printer Configuration Information

Each Network
Item Local Printer Printer
Printer Model *** ***
Printer Manufacturer *** ***
Printer Name (will appear on keypad menus) *** ***
Port Not Applicable ***
IP Address Not Applicable ***
AE Title Not Applicable ***
Film Size Choices: 14 x 17 Not Applicable ***
11 x 14
8 x 10
Film Type Choices:Blue Not Applicable ***
Clear
Film Destination Choices:Processor Not Applicable ***
Magazine
Processor 2
Magazine 2
Current
Contrast Default (0-15) Not Applicable ***
Interpolation Type Choices: Imation 831 Not Applicable ***
Generic DICOM
Imation 831 DICOM
Imation 8300 DICOM‘
Interpolation No. (1-19) Not Applicable ***
3–2 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Other Installation Information

The following additional information is required to install a PACS Link 9410 system:
• Digital Modality:
– If image size is not included in the header, you will need the image size (number of columns and rows).
• Video Modality:
– Aspect ratio of the video image (width divided by height).
• PACS Link 9410 System Configuration:
– Input and output options included in the system you are installing.
– External devices to be connected (modalities, keypads, local printer).
– Optional components (see Optional Components table).
– Factory-installed options (refer to the Device History Record, included with each system when shipped).
– Interconnection details: refer to the Sales and Service Planner (SSP) System Layout Diagram for the PACS
Link 9410 system you are installing. The System Layout Diagram is produced as a part of the site planning
process and is available to system installers.
Table 3–3 Optional Components

Imager Input Two types:
Boards - IMAGRAPHTM Video Input Board
- DPI-4 Digital Input Board
Output Boards One of the following is required to drive a local printer:
- FOPCIL Fiber Optic Output Board
- COPCIL Copper Output Board
Serial Ports You must know the number of serial ports and the planned use of each serial port for the
system you are installing. Serial ports are used for connecting keypad and host control
inputs. The following serial ports can be included in PACS Link 9410 systems:
- COM 1 and COM 2 - standard computer RS232 ports. These cannot be used for keypad
or host control connections.
- Two Port Expansion Board - adds two serial ports. Used for IMS Keypad or host
control inputs associated with video modalities.
- RocketPort Four-Port Expansion Board - adds four serial ports. Used for IMS Keypad
or host control inputs associated with video modalities.
Modem If there is more than one PACS Link 9410 system on the same network, usually only one
will contain a modem board.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–3

Pre-Installation Steps
1. Check site preparation - verify that the following items are available:
• Power outlets for the PACS Link 9410 computer and UKEIB interface boxes.
• Network connection(s): One network connection is required for the PACS Link 9410 system. A second
connection is required for a Service PC.
• Telephone connection: An analog telephone line is required if the PACS Link 9410 system contains a modem
board. This line will be used for remote 9410 system service.
• Table or other platform for the PACS Link 9410 system.
2. Unpack the PACS Link 9410 shipment. There are no special unpacking procedures for the PACS Link 9410
system.
3. Inventory system components. Using the Pack-Out lists attached to the shipping cartons, inventory the PACS
Link 9410 components and related items to make sure you have all the parts you need to install the system.
3–4 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Hardware Installation and Setup Procedures

The following installation and setup procedures are required for installing a PACS Link 9410 system.
Set UKEIB Configuration Switches

UKEIBs are interface boxes used to connect keypads or host control inputs to PACS Link 9410 serial ports. One
UKEIB is required for each image management system (IMS) keypad or host control input. Before connecting the
UKEIBs, you must know the type of keypad or host control input that will be connected to each UKEIB. Set the
configuration switches SW1 and SW2 (Figure 3–1) on each UKEIB according to the keypad/host control connection
possibilities shown in Table 3–4.
SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6
SW2
ON
FIBER OPTIC HOST

XMT
FTSW
IMAGER KEYPAD
A-CH B-CH
RCV
Figure 3–1 UKEIB Configuration Switches
Caution
Set the switches in the UKEIB before connecting any cables to it. If the switches are not set correctly, components
within the UKEIB may be damaged when the cables are connected.
Caution
Use only approved cables and ensure they are connected to the proper connectors on the UKEIB. If unapproved
cables are used or cables are connected incorrectly, components within the UKEIB may be damaged.
Table 3–4 UKEIB SW1 and SW2 Settings

SW1 Switch Positions
Keypad and Host Control Connection 1 2 3 4 5 6
IMS Keypad On Off On On On On
RS232 Host Control Input / HPT Keypad On Off On Off Off On
RS422 Host Control Input / HPT Keypad On Off On On On On
RS232 Host Control Input / No HPT Keypad Off On Off Off On Off
RS422 Host Control Input / No HPT Keypad Off On Off On On On
Note: An HPT keypad can be any of: SHPT (Siemens HPT), THPT (Toshiba HPT), YHPT (GE HPT) or
LHPT (Lockheed Martin HPT).
SW2 Switch Positions
In most cases SW2 should be set to the center position.
If you are connecting to a Siemens modality with a fiber optic host control cable and RS232 converters at each
end, set SW2 to the right position. In this position, the UKEIB supplies 12-Volts DC to the converter at the UKEIB
end of the cable.
Note: Do not set SW2 to the left position unless you are instructed to do so by Service Engineering.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–5

Set RocketPort Switches

Perform this procedure if the PACS Link 9410 system contains a RocketPort multi-port serial communications board.
Switches on the 4-port breakout box allow you to set each serial port for either RS422 or RS232 signal levels
(Figure 3–2). The switches are factory set for RS422 levels.
Set each port switch to match the type of input (RS422 or RS232) to be connected. In almost all installations, these
ports should remain at the RS422 setting. To change the RS422/RS232 setting for a port, use the slide switch below
the port.
• If UKEIB connects a keypad or host control input to one of these ports, leave setting at RS422.
• If RS422 host control input is connected directly to one of these ports (without a UKEIB), leave setting at RS422.
• If RS232 host control input is connected directly to one of these ports, change the port setting to RS232.
RocketPort Board
IO Switch Selector
Host
COM 5 0 COM 7
232 422 232 422
COM 6 COM 8
232 422 232 422
4-Port Breakout Box

Slide Switch
r9410-18L
Figure 3–2 RocketPort - RS422/RS232 Settings
Set Computer Voltage Select Switch

Set the Voltage Selection switch on the PACS Link 9410 computer to match the AC voltage available at the
installation site. There are two switch positions: 115 volts and 230 volts. The Voltage Selection switch is located next
to the power receptacle on the rear of the computer.
3–6 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Set up Uninterruptable Power Supply

1. Unpack the Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) and locate the instruction sheet.
2. If the internal battery is not connected, perform the Battery Replacement procedure in the instruction sheet to
open the unit and connect the battery.
3. Perform the setup instructions in the UPS instruction sheet.
4. Set the four Option switches, located on the back of the UPS unit, as follows.
a. 120-volt, 60-Hertz power UPS (Figure 3–3):
Set all four of option switches to the down (OFF) position. When switches 2 and 3 are both down, the UPS
transfer voltage is 103 volts AC. The UPS will switch to battery power if the line voltage drops below this
level.
b. 230-volt, 50/60-Hz power UPS (Figure 3–4):
Set option switches 1, 2 and 3 to down (OFF) position. When switches 2 and 3 are both down, the UPS
transfer voltage is 196 volts AC. The UPS will switch to battery power if the line voltage drops below this
level.
Set Option switch 4 down (OFF) for 50-Hz line frequency (or if you don’t know the line frequency), or up
(ON) for 60-Hz.
5. Plug the UPS into a power outlet.
6. Connect a power cord to the PACS Link 9410 computer and plug into one of the Battery Backup outlets on the
UPS.
Some UPS models have a Full-time Surge-Protection outlet that does not have battery back-up. Do not use this
outlet for the PACS Link 9410 computer.
7. Turn on the power switch on the front of the UPS.
Note
The UPS battery may not be charged when the unit is initially installed. The battery charges whenever the UPS is
connected to a power outlet (a full charge takes less than four hours).
3 2 1
ON
Unused Enables Low

Voltage Beeper
When OFF
Set Transfer
Voltage
Figure 3–3 UPS Option Switches (120V, 60-Hz UPS)
4 3 2 1
ON
et To Match Line Enables Low

requency Voltage Beeper
Down = 50 Hz When OFF
Up = 60 Hz
Set Transfer
Voltage
Figure 3–4 UPS Option Switches (230V, 50/60-Hz UPS)
8628588 - 2001 March 3–7

Connect Cables
Connect cables as described in the following paragraphs.
Video Input Cables

Perform the following procedure if the PACS Link 9410 you are installing contains an IMAGRAPHTM video input
board.
There are several possible cabling configurations for video modalities based on the type of control associated with
the modality (IMS Keypad or host control) and the type of COM port expansion boards included in the PACS Link
9410 system. The cabling diagrams show most configurations. Use the cabling diagram that applies and connect the
cables as shown in the drawing.
• Video input with IMS keypad (see Figure 3-4)
• Video input with host control and HPT keypad (see Figure 3-5)
• Video input with host control and destination switching (IMS) keypad (see Figure 3-6)
• Video input with host control, no keypad (see Figure 3-7)
Installation Notes
• A Video Out signal from a modality can be connected to any of the four video input connectors (labeled A1, A2,
A3, or A4).
• Up to three video image inputs can be connected to a single video board. One of the video inputs must remain
unused.
• IMS Keypad or host control inputs can be connected, in any order, to any COM port on the 2-Port COM board
or RocketPort Breakout Box. Do not use either of the standard COM ports (COM 1 and COM 2) for keypad or
host control inputs.
3–8 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
8 Image Inputs
Video 2 A1, A2, A3 or A4 TM
Modality IMAGRAPH
Video Board
Video
Out
1
COM 4
COM 3
IMS Keypad 9 Note: Sync Inputs
T1 - T4 Not Used
3
RS422
2-Port COM
Board
Computer
UKEIB
FIBER OPTIC HOST
5
Short Cable
XMT .....
....
FTSW
IMAGER KEYPAD
A-CH B-CH
.....
.... ..........
.........
........
RCV RocketPort
COM Board
10 7
6
COM 5 COM 7
COM 6 COM 8 Computer
Dashed lines show connections if RocketPort 4-Port

RocketPort COM Board is used in place Breakout Box r9410-09L
of 2-Port Board.
Figure 3–5 Video Input with IMS Keypad
8628588 - 2001 March 3–9

Table 3–5 Video Input with IMS Keypad Cables

Locator
Number Cable Name Part Number
1 Cable, 8-Port 96-0000-3679-6
2 Cable, Video Image, BNC, 3 m 78-8053-4695-0
Cable, Video Image, BNC, 10 m 78-8053-4095-9
3 Cable, Keypad 78-8053-4097-8
4 Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 3 m 78-8075-2602-1
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 10 m 78-8063-3964-0
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 30 m 78-8063-3965-7
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 60 m 78-8063-3966-5
5 Cable, Adapter, UKEIB to RS422 (short cable) 96-0000-3517-8
6 Cable, Adapter, UKEIB to Multi-port 96-0000-3684-6
7 Rocket Breakout Box Cable 22-0001-1161-1
8 Barrel Connector 83-1610-0154-6
9 IMS Keypad (US) 74-0500-5139-5
10 UKEIB 78-8077-4135-6
3–10 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
8 Image Inputs
Video 2 A1, A2, A3 or A4
Modality IMAGRAPH
TM
Video Board
Video
Out
1
9 COM 4
Host
Control
Out
COM 3
HPT Keypad
10
3
RS422
Note: Sync Inputs 2-Port COM
T1 - T4 Not Used Board
Computer
UKEIB
5
Short Cable
FIBER OPTIC
XMT .....
.... HOST
FTSW
IMAGER KEYPAD
A-CH B-CH
.....
.... ..........
.........
........ RocketPort
RCV COM Board
11 7
6
COM 5 COM 7
COM 6 COM 8 Computer
Dashed lines show connections if RocketPort 4-Port

RocketPort COM Board is used in place Breakout Box
of 2-Port Board. 9410-14L
Figure 3–6 Video Input with Host Control Input and HPT Keypad
8628588 - 2001 March 3–11

Table 3–6 Video Input with Host Control Input and HPT Keypad Cables
Locator
1 Cable, 8-Port 96-0000-3679-6
3 Cable, Keypad 78-8077-4097-8
4 Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 3 m 78-8075-2602-1
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 10 m 78-8063-3964-0
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 30 m 78-8063-3965-7
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 60 m 78-8063-3966-5
5 Cable, Adapter, UKEIB to RS422 96-0000-3517-8
7 RocketPort Breakout Box Cable 22-0001-1161-1
9 Cable, Host Adapter, 25 9-pin, RS422, SHPT 78-8079-0361-8
Cable, Host Adapter, 25 9-pin, RS422, THPT 78-8079-0094-5
10 SHPT Keypad, or 78-8079-0478-0
THPT Keypad, or 78-8079-0477-2
YHPT Keypad, or 78-8079-0117-4
LHPT Keypad To be supplied
11 UKEIB 78-8077-4135-6
3–12 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
10
UKEIB IMS
Keypad Can connect to RocketPort
FIBER OPTIC HOST
(Destination Breakout Box Instead of
XMT .....
.... 2-Port COM Board
FTSW KEYPAD Switching
A-CH B-CH
IMAGER 3 Keypad)
.....
.... .........
.........
........
RCV .
4
11
5
Image Inputs A1,
A2, A3 or A4 TM
Video 2
Modality IMAGRAPH
Video Board
Video Out
1
8
Host Control COM 4

Out
COM 3
Note: Sync Inputs

T1 - T4 Not Used
UKEIB
RS422
FIBER OPTIC HOST 2-Port COM
Short Cable
XMT 5 Board
FTSW
A-CH B-CH .....
IMAGER
....
RCV .....
.... .........
.........
KEYPAD
........
. Computer
4
11 6
RocketPort
COM Board
RocketPort 4-Port
Breakout Box
7
COM 5 COM 7
Dashed lines show connections if

COM 6 COM 8
RocketPort COM Board is used in place of Computer
2-Port Board.
Figure 3–7 Video Input with Host Control Input and Destination Switching Keypad
8628588 - 2001 March 3–13

Table 3–7 Video Input with Host Control Input and Destination Switching Keypad Cables
Locator
1 Cable, 8-Port 96-0000-3679-6
3 Cable, Keypad 78-8077-4097-8
4 Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 3 m 78-8075-2602-1
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 10 m 78-8063-3964-0
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 30 m 78-8063-3965-7
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 60 m 78-8063-3966-5
5 Cable (short), Adapter, UKEIB to RS422 96-0000-3517-8
9 Cable, Host Adapter, 37 9-pin, RS422, 3 m 78-8077-4159-6
Cable, Host Adapter, 25 9-pin, RS232 78-8071-8331-0
Cable, Host Adapter, 25 9-pin, Genesis, 10 m 78-8075-2600-5
10 IMS Keypad 74-0500-5139-5
11 UKEIB 78-8077-4135-6
3–14 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
78 Image Inputs
Video 2 A1, A2, A3 or A4
Modality IMAGRAPHt
Video Board
Video
Out
1
89 COM 4
Host
Control
Out
COM 3
RS422
Note: Sync Inputs 2-Port COM
T1 - T4 Not Used Board
Computer
UKEIB
Short Cable
FIBER OPTIC
45
XMT .....
.... HOST
FTSW
IMAGER KEYPAD
A-CH B-CH
.....
.... ..........
.........
........
RCV
RocketPort
COM Board
43
9 6
7
10 5
6
COM 5 COM 7
COM 6 COM 8
Computer
Dashed lines show connections if
RocketPort COM Board is used in place RocketPort 4-Port r9410-14L
of 2-Port Board. Breakout Box
Figure 3–8 Video Input Cabling with Host Control Input - No Keypad
8628588 - 2001 March 3–15

Table 3–8 Video Input with Host Control Input - No Keypad Cables
Locator
1 Cable, 8-Port 96-0000-3679-6
3 Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 3 m 78-8075-2602-1
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 10 m 78-8063-3964-0
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 30 m 78-8063-3965-7
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 60 m 78-8063-3966-5
9 UKEIB 78-8077-4135-6
3–16 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Digital Input Cables

Perform the following procedure if the PACS Link 9410 you are installing contains one or more DPI-4 digital input
boards.
There are four possible cabling configurations for digital modalities, based on the type of user control associated with
the modality (IMS Keypad or host control). Use the cabling diagram that applies and connect the cables as shown in
the drawing.
• Digital input with IMS keypad (Figure 3–9)
• Digital input with host control and HPT keypad (Figure 3–10)
• Digital input with host control and Destination Switching keypad (Figure 3–11)
• Digital input with host control and no keypad (Figure 3–12)
Installation Notes
• Two digital image inputs, or one Y-cable, can be connected to a single DPC box (A-Data and B Data connectors).
• Connect serial communication to the ports on the Rocketport board.
• In cases where there is both a host control input and an IMS Keypad input associated with one digital modality,
two COM ports are required (see Figure 3–11).
8628588 - 2001 March 3–17

56
DPC Breakout Box
A-Data A-Host Control A C-I Keypad

1
B-Data B-Host Control B C-I Keypad
Digital
Modality DPI-4
Digital
Interface
Board
Image
Out
Host 2
Control COM 4
Out
IMS
IMSKeypad
Keypad COM 3
67
3
4
10
11
RS422
2-Port COM
Board
Computer
UKEIB
Short Cable
FIBER OPTIC HOST

XMT .....
....
FTSW
IMAGER
.......... RocketPort
A-CH B-CH
.....
.... .........
........ COM Board
RCV KEYPAD
9
10
78
89
45
COM 5 COM 7
COM 6 COM 8
Computer
RocketPort 4-Port Dashed lines show connections
Breakout Box if RocketPort COM Board is
used in place of 2-Port Board.
r9410-08L
Figure 3–9 Digital Input Cabling with IMS Keypad
3–18 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Table 3–9 Digital Input with IMS Keypad Cables

Locator
1 DPC Breakout Box Cable 96-0000-3676-2
2 Cable, Digital Image, 37-pin, RS422, 3 m 78-8075-4697-6
Cable, Digital Image, 37-pin, RS422, 10 m 78-8053-4134-0
3 Cable, Keypad 78-8077-4097-8
4 Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 3 m 78-8075-2602-1
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 10 m 78-8063-3964-0
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 30 m 78-8063-3965-7
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 60 m 78-8063-3966-5
5 DPC Breakout Box 96-0000-3673-9
6 IMS Keypad 74-0500-5139-5
7 UKEIB 78-8077-4135-6
9 Rocket Breakout Box Cable 22-0001-1161-1
8628588 - 2001 March 3–19

76
DPC Breakout Box

1
Digital
Modality DPI-4
Digital
Interface
Board
Image
Out
Host
Control 2
Out COM 4
HPT Keypad
IMS Keypad COM 3
87 6
4
11
RS422
2-Port COM
Board
Computer
UKEIB
Short Cable
FIBER OPTIC HOST

XMT .....
....
FTSW
IMAGER
.......... RocketPort
A-CH B-CH
.....
.... .........
........ COM Board
RCV KEYPAD
10
98
39
5
COM 5 COM 7
COM 6 COM 8
Computer
r9410-08L
Figure 3–10 Digital Input Cabling with Host Control Input and HPT Keypad
3–20 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Table 3–10 Digital Input with Host Control Input and HPT Keypad Cables
Locator
4 Cable, Keypad 78-8077-4097-8
5 Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 3 m 78-8075-2602-1
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 10 m 78-8063-3964-0
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 30 m 78-8063-3965-7
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 60 m 78-8063-3966-5
8 SHPT Keypad, or 78-8079-0478-0
THPT Keypad, or 78-8079-0477-2
YHPT Keypad, or 78-8079-0117-4
LHPT Keypad To be supplied
9 UKEIB 78-8077-4135-6
8628588 - 2001 March 3–21

8
9
78
UKEIB IMS
Keypad
FIBER OPTIC HOST (Destination
XMT .....
.... Switching
FTSW KEYPAD
IMAGER 34 Keypad)
A-CH B-CH
.....
.... ..........
.........
........
RCV
45
67
DPC Breakout Box

1

Digital
Modality
DPI-4
Digital
Interface
Image Out Board
Host
Control 2 .... COM4
.....
Out
.... COM3
.....
56
10
RS422
2-Port COM
UKEIB Board
FIBER OPTIC HOST

XMT .....
....
FTSW Computer
Short Cable
IMAGER
A-CH B-CH
.....
.... ..........
.........
........
RCV KEYPAD
RocketPort
COM Board
45
89
9
10
11
12
11
COM 5 COM 7
Dashed lines show connections
if RocketPort COM Board is COM 6 COM 8
used in place of 2-Port Board. Computer
RocketPort 4-Port
Breakout Box
Figure 3–11 Digital Input Cabling with Host Control Input and Destination Switching Keypad
3–22 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Table 3–11 Digital Input with Host Control Input and Destination Switching Keypad Cables
Locator
3 Cable, Keypad 78-8077-4097-8
4 Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 3 m 78-8075-2602-1
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 10 m 78-8063-3964-0
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 30 m 78-8063-3965-7
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 60 m 78-8063-3966-5
5 Cable, Host Adapter, 37 9-pin RS422, 3 m 78-8077-4159-6
Cable, Host Adapter, 25 9-pin RS232 78-8071-8331-0
Cable, Host Adapter, 25 9-pin Genesis, 10 m 78-8075-2600-5
7 IMS Keypad 74-0500-5139-5
8 UKEIB 78-8077-4135-6
9 Cable, RocketPort Breakout Box 22-00001-1161-1
8628588 - 2001 March 3–23

67
DPC Breakout Box

1

Digital
Modality
DPI-4
Digital
Interface
Image Out Board
Host
Control 2 COM 4
Out
COM 3
56
10
11
UKEIB RS422
HOST 2-Port COM
FIBER OPTIC
..... Board
FTSW
XMT ....
IMAGER
A-CH B-CH
.....
.... ..........
.........
........ Computer
RCV KEYPAD
Short Cable
RocketPort
COM Board
79
r9410-25L
45 9
10
89
COM 5 COM 7
COM 6 COM 8
Computer
Figure 3–12 Digital Input Cabling with Host Control Input - No Keypad
3–24 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Table 3–12 Digital Input Cabling with Host Control Input - No Keypad
Locator
3 Cable, Keypad (Not used) 78-8077-4097-8
4 Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 3 m 78-8075-2602-1
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 10 m 78-8063-3964-0
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 30 m 78-8063-3965-7
Cable, COM, 9-pin, RS422, 60 m 78-8063-3966-5
7 UKEIB 78-8077-4135-6
9 Cable, RocketPort Breakout Box 22-0001-1161-1
8628588 - 2001 March 3–25

Local Printer Cables

A local printer can connect to a PACS Link 9410 unit with either copper or fiber optic cables, depending on the type
of printer interface board installed in the unit (FOPCIL or COPCIL board) and the type of laser imager to be
connected.
FOPCIL-to-Local Printer Cables

The FOPCIL (fiber output) board is designed to connect to laser imagers with fiber optic inputs. This includes:
• 969 Laser Imager
• Kodak DryView 8700/8500 Plus Laser Imagers
The FOPCIL is also used to drive the DryView 8800 Multi-Input Manager. If the PACS Link 9410 system you are
installing contains a FOPCIL board, connect cables as shown in Figure 3-12.
On 969 Laser Imager or DryView 8800 input modules, connect the control cables to either the COM 0 or COM 1
port.
On the DryView 8700/8500 Plus Laser Imager Fiber Interface Board, connect the image cables to User Port 0 or 1.
Connect the control cables to COM port 0 or 1.
B-Lead B-Lead
Image Image
Port A Image A Port
A-Lead A-Lead
A-Lead A-Lead
A Fiber Optic Cables A COM
COM
Port B Control Port 0 or 1
B
B-Lead B-Lead

PACS Link 9410 Fiber Interface Laser Imager or
Computer Board DryView 8800
Board
(Rear) Multi-input Manager
Note:
The above drawing does not show
the exact position of the Image and
COM connectors.
Refer to the laser imager service
manual for location of COM and
Image connectors.
9410-10L
Figure 3–13 PACS Link 9410-to-Local Printer Cables (Fiber Optic)
3–26 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
COPCIL-to-Local Printer Cables

The COPCIL (copper output) board connects to the following laser imagers with a copper digital image port and a
copper RS422 COM port:
• DryView 8300/8600 Laser Imagers
• DryView 8500/8700 Standard Laser Imagers
If the installed PACS Link 9410 system contains a COPCIL board, connect cables as shown in Figure 3–14. If
extension cables are supplied, refer to Figure 3–15 for details.
The standard DryView 8500/8700 Laser Imager can have two digital image ports and two RS422 COM ports. You
can connect the "Y" cable to either image port and to either COM port.
37-Pin Connector

Port
Image
Control
RS422 COM
Port
Y Cable (3 Meters)
PACS Link 9410 74-0500-5864-8 Laser Imager with 9-Pin
Computer Copper Image and Connector
(Rear) COPCIL COM Ports
Output Board
Note:
COM connectors.
Image connectors.
9410-62L
Figure 3–14 PACS Link 9410-to-Local Printer Cables (Copper)
8628588 - 2001 March 3–27

60 Meters Max
Y Cable Image Cable
To COPCIL To Laser
Board Imager
Control (RS422) Cable
9-Pin Connector Gender Changer

(26-1011-8279-3)
Cable Lengths
Length Part Number Length Part Number
Image 3m 78-8075-4697-6 RS422 3m 78-8075-2602-1
10m 78-8053-4134-0 10m 78-8063-3964-0
30m 78-8053-4135-7 30m 78-8063-3965-7
60m 78-8053-4139-9 60m 78-8063-3966-5
9410-63L
Figure 3–15 COPCIL Extension Cables
3–28 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Telephone Drop Cable

To install a PACS Link 9410 system that includes a modem board, connect to a telephone line as shown in
Figure 3–16.
PACS Link 9410

Computer
(rear)
Telephone
Drop Cable
Line Jack
Do not connect TELCO (Analog Line)
to PHONE Jack Jack
Modem
Board
r9410-13L
Figure 3–16 Connect Modem Board to Telephone Line
8628588 - 2001 March 3–29

Setting Up Local Laser Imager Parameters

To prepare a local laser imager for use with the PACS Link 9410 system, follow the installation instructions in the
applicable laser imager service manual, along with the supplemental information in the following paragraphs.
Before performing the MPC setup procedures for the 969 or DryView 8500/8700/8800 laser imagers, or the local
panel setup procedures for the DryView 8300 or 8600 laser imagers, make sure the laser imager is cabled to the
PACS Link 9410 unit and that the PACS Link 9410 unit is powered ON.
969 Laser Imagers

Supplemental installation information:
1. Verify that the Transfer Clock Speed jumper is set to 10 MHz on the input module in the laser imager that
connects to the PACS Link 9410 system (refer to procedure located in the 969 Service Manual).
2. Enter the parameter values listed in Table 3–12 when performing MPC laser imager setup.
DryView 8700/8500 Laser Imagers

Configuration parameters:
Enter the parameter values listed in Table 3–12 when performing DryView 8700/8500 Standard and DryView 8700/
8500 Plus Laser Imager MPC setup.
3–30 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
DryView 8800 Multi-Input Manager (MIM)

Supplemental installation information:
• Verify that the Transfer Clock Speed is set to 10 MHz on the input module of the DryView 8800 that connects
to the PACS Link 9410 unit (refer to procedure located in the DryView 8800 Service Manual).
• Enter the parameter values listed in Table 3–13 when performing MPC DryView 8800 MIM setup.
Table 3–13 969, 8700/8500 and 8800 Laser Imager Parameter Values
Comm Image Host System EIB
Parity = Even Contrast = 10 Image Size Mode = New Parameter Set = 0 Test Pattern = Disable
Data Bits = 8* Dmax = 3.0 Alarm Mode = Old User Priority = Normal Header Mode* =
Header/Frame or
Header Line*
Command Set = 969* Density = 13 P1 = 0 FIB Port = 0 Prescale = On
Parity = Disable* Border = 0 P2 = 0 Interface = Digital EIB Parity = Even
Stop Bits = 1* 969 Cmd Set Beta P3 = 0 Media Size = 14 x 17 Parity Enable = Enable*
Horizontal = 3
Vertical = 3
Baud = 19200* Match Border = YES P4 = 0 Media Type = BWGEN Port (see note 2)
End of Message = None Dmin Mode = Normal P5 = 0 ID Fgnd Intensity = Time out = 25
255 (8 bit)
4095 (12 bit)
Protocol = Packet TFT = 693CØ* P6 = 0 ID Bgnd Intensity = 0 Pixels Per Line = 0
Rotate All Images = No
Character Pacing = 0 Memory Full Resp = MOV Requeue = 5 Image Lines = 0
Note: Click on “969 Command Set” in the Override 952 Beta = No Modality = Digital Pixel Width (see note 1)
Defaults box to enter all of the above values.
Aspect Ratio = 1.00 User ID = Customer Digital IF Timing
Preference T6 = 200
Horizontal Sharp = 0 Memory Management T7 = 255
T10 = 255
= Best Fit
Horizontal Smooth = 8 Destination =
Processor 0***
Vertical Sharp = 0
Vertical Smooth = 8
Density Test Contrast
Source = NVRAM
Framing = No
Pixel Correction = Yes
Slides = 35 mm
Dual Switch = Off
Scale Format = No
Scale Magnification = Yes
* Parameter settings must match corresponding PACS Link 9410 Communication and Image Transfer
parameter settings.
Note 1: Set Pixel Width to 8 or 12, depending on laser imager capability.
Note 2: EIB Port setting:
Fiber connection: always set to 0.
Copper connection (standard DryView 8700/8500 only): Port setting must be the same as the laser imager COM port used
to connect to the PACS Link 9410 unit (i.e., if PACS Link 9410 connects to laser imager COM Port 0,
set EIB Port to 0. If PACS Link 9410 connects to laser imager COM port 1, set EIB Port to 1).
8628588 - 2001 March 3–31

8300 or 8600 Laser Imager

Enter the parameter values (Table 3–14) from the DryView 8300/8600 Local Panel to configure the Digital Input
Module in the DryView 8300 or 8600 Laser Imager that connects to the PACS Link 9410 system.
Table 3–14 8300/8600 Laser Imager Parameter Values

Parameter Value
1. Aspect Ratio 1.0
3. Serial Control Interface:
1. Baud Rate 1200*
2. Number of Data Bits 8*
3. Number of Stop Bits 1*
4. Parity Even*
5. Protocol (3M or Keypad) 3M* (952)
6. Mark Install Date Date printer is installed
7. Memory Management As needed
8. Calibration Enable (ON or OFF) ON
9. Module ID Rename the input module per customer wishes
10. Exposures (film counter) Do not change
11. Cal Processor Center Temp
1. Measured Center Zone Reading Readjustment at installation usually not required
12. Cal Processor End Temp
1. Measured End Zone Reading Readjustment at installation usually not required
13. Energy Saver Option Customer preference
14. Image Viewing Emulsion
Digital Interface
1. Parity None
* Parameter settings must match corresponding 9410 Communication and Image Transfer parameter settings.
3–32 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
DryView 8100 Laser Imager

To configure a DryView 8100 Laser Imager that connects to the PACS Link 9410 system, enter the parameter values
listed in Table 3–15.
Table 3–15 8100 Laser Imager Parameter Values

Parameter Value Parameter Value
System Configuration Image Quality
Acquire Channel Digital User ID Enter ID per customer
preference
Modem Initialization Accept default Modality Enter descriptive name for
modality
Maximum Imageable Accept default (4361) Aspect Ratio 1.0
Columns
Match Borders Option Usually enabled (customer
Network Configuration preference)
TCP/IP Address Not applicable Force TFT to Film Dmin Usually disabled (customer
preference)
TC/IP Net Mask Not applicable Pixel Correct Disabled
TCP/IP Gateway Not applicable Mag Scaling Enabled
Digital Configuration Optics
Default Pixels per Line Not applicable Translation Speed Follow on-screen
Default Lines per Image Not applicable SOP Delay instructions
Pixel Depth 8 or 12** Pixel Stretch Not adjustable
Header Mode Header Line or Header Facet to Stretch
Frame*
Parity Even SOS Delay
Communications Laser Dead Time
Parity Even* SOS Level
Stop Bits 1* Laser Dynamic Range Follow on-screen
instructions
Baud Rate 1200*
EOM CR P1 (PRI to DCR/PAS) 0
Protocol 952* P2 (DCR to DCR/PAS) 0
Memory Full Message MOV P3 (STP to STC) 0
Alarm Mode Old P4 (EXP to DCR.EOE) 0
Acquire Timeout 25 P5 (EOE to PTC) 0
P6 (DCR to STC) 0
* Parameter settings must match corresponding 9410 Communication and Image Transfer parameter settings.
** Set to 8 or 12, depending on the pixel width from modalities.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–33

Accessing the PACS Link 9410 System for Service

To configure a PACS Link 9410 system, you use the Service Maintenance Tool (SMT) software that runs on the
PACS Link 9410 system. Since the PACS Link 9410 system normally operates without a monitor, keyboard or
mouse, you must use one of the following methods for access:
• Connect a Monitor Kit (standard monitor, keyboard and mouse) to the PACS Link 9410 system. This is the
preferred method for installing new systems.
• Use a Service PC with pcANYWHERETM remote control software to access the PACS Link 9410 system over
an Ethernet network.
Note
If the PACS Link 9410 system you are installing has video inputs, it is recommended that you use a Monitor Kit
rather than a Service PC to install the PACS Link 9410 system.
3–34 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Connecting with a Monitor Kit

A Monitor Kit includes a PC monitor, keyboard and mouse and is available to field engineers for servicing the PACS
Link 9410 systems. Refer to Section 6 of this manual for a complete list of tools.
1. With the PACS Link 9410 computer power off, connect a monitor, keyboard and mouse (Figure 3–17).
This is only a temporary connection for configuring the PACS Link 9410 system. You will remove the monitor,
keyboard and mouse after completing the configuration procedures.
2. Power up the PACS Link 9410 system.
3. When prompted, press Ctrl/Alt/Del.
4. In the Logon box, type the password imagenet (lower case) and press Enter. The Username Administrator will
appear in the logon box and the Windows NTTM desktop will display.
5. Continue with Entering Customer Network Parameters.
IOIOI
1
Keyboard Mouse
Connector Connector
IOIOI
2
Video (Monitor)
Connector
PL9410-32L
Figure 3–17 PACS Link 9410 Computer Connector Panel (rear)
8628588 - 2001 March 3–35

Enter Customer Network Parameters using Monitor Kit

Perform this procedure only if you are using a Monitor Kit to access the PACS Link 9410 system. If you are using a
service PC, use the procedure ”Accessing the PACS Link 9410 using a Service PC”.
Before starting, make sure the following customer-assigned network parameters for the PACS Link 9410 system are
available:
• Computer Name
• Workgroup Name (customer may not require)
• IP Address
• IP Mask (Subnet Mask)
• Default Gateway Address (customer may not require)
1. From the taskbar at the bottom of the screen, select Start > Settings > Control Panel.
2. From the Control Panel, double click on the Network icon.
3. Choose the Identification tab and click Change.
4. Change the Computer name to a descriptive name (e.g., CTPS, MR Mod Server, etc.) and, if required, enter a
Workgroup name, then click OK.
5. Choose the Protocols tab. A list of network components appears.
a. Select TCP/IP.
b. Click Properties.
6. Enter network parameters for the customer's network:
a. Under the IP Address tab, change:
- PACS Link 9410 IP Address
- PACS Link 9410 Subnet mask
- Default Gateway Address (if required).
b. If the PACS network does not use a Gateway (Router), highlight and then delete each number for the Default
Gateway then click Apply.
c. From the DNS tab, highlight and then delete kodak.com (or other domain name) located in the Domain box.
d. From the DNS Service Search Order box, highlight the first IP address and click Remove.
e. Repeat the previous step for the remaining IP addresses in the DNS Service Search Order box.
f. From the Domain Suffix Search Order box, highlight and delete kodak.com (or other domain name).
g. Click Apply and then click OK twice.
7. From the taskbar at the bottom of the screen, select Start > Shutdown.
8. Select Restart The Computer and Yes. Restarting activates the network settings.
9. When the system prompts, press Ctrl/Alt/Del.
10. In the Logon box, type in the password imagenet (lower case). and press Enter. The Windows NTTM desktop
will display again.
11. Connect the PACS Link 9410 system to the customer's Ethernet network as shown in Figure 3–20.
12. Continue to ”SMT Configuration Procedures”.
Network Drop
Cable
Network
RJ45 Wall Jack
PACS Link 9410 Network
Computer Connector
(Rear)
r9410-12L
Figure 3–18 Ethernet Network Connection
3–36 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Accessing the PACS Link 9410 using a Service PC

To access the PACS Link 9410 system from your Service PC, pcANYWHERETM remote control software must be
installed on the PC. To access the PACS Link 9410 system, do the following:
• Install pcANYWHERE - if not done previously.
• Connect the Service PC to the PACS Link 9410 computer using a network crossover cable or hub tool.
• Use the Service PC and pcANYWHERE software to gain control of the PACS Link 9410 system.
• Enter customer network parameters into the Service PC and PACS Link 9410 system.
• Connect the Service PC and PACS Link 9410 to the customer's Ethernet network.
• Take control of the PACS Link 9410 system over the customer's network and perform configuration procedures
from your Service PC.
Tools and Information Required:
• Service PC with pcANYWHERE installed.
• Network crossover cable or Ethernet hub tool.
• Customer-assigned network parameters as listed below (you should have recorded these parameters on a
configuration worksheet, in Appendix A).
Network Parameters
PACS Link 9410 Service PC
Computer Name N/A
Workgroup Name (customer may not require) Workgroup Name (customer may not require)
IP Address IP Address
IP Mask (Subnet Mask) IP Mask (subnet Mask)
Default Gateway Address (customer may not require) Default Gateway Address (customer may not require)
8628588 - 2001 March 3–37

Connect Service PC to PACS Link 9410 Computer

1. Using the network crossover cable or hub tool, connect your Service PC to the PACS Link 9410 computer as
shown in Figure 3–19.
2. Continue with the next procedure.
Crossover
PACS Link Cable
9410 Network
Computer Connectors
Service PC
RJ45 Adapter Cable

(if required)
r9410-11L
OR
Network Drop
Cable Ethernet Hub Tool

Computer Connector
Network
Drop Cable
Service PC
RJ45 Adapter Cable

(if required)
9410-11L
Figure 3–19 Connect Service PC to PACS Link 9410
3–38 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
SMT Configuration Procedures

In the following procedures you will use the Software Maintenance Tool (SMT) to enter site-specific configuration
parameters into the PACS Link 9410 system. Perform these procedures in the order presented. However, because
there are several optional input and output configurations for PACS Link 9410 systems, not all of the configuration
procedures will apply to every system. If a procedure does not apply to the system you are installing, go to the next
procedure in the sequence.
Clear Configuration Database

PACS Link 9410 system configuration parameters (except network parameters) are stored in a configuration
database. If you are installing a new PACS Link 9410 system or completely reconfiguring a system, you should clear
this database. Do not clear the database if you are only making a configuration change to a previously-configured
system. The following procedure clears out the configuration database:
1. Double-click the SMT icon on the desktop. The SMT Main Screen displays.
2. From the SMT System Management tab, click Stop System to stop the PACS Link 9410 application software.
3. Click the close button (X) in the upper right corner of the SMT window to close SMT.
4. Select Start>Programs>Windows NTTM Explorer.
5. Select drive D and navigate to the directory NGNI\BIN.
6. In the NGNI\BIN directory, double-click DBEmpty.exe. This clears the configuration database.
7. Continue to the next procedure.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–39

Setup Initial Service PC IP Address and Connect to 9410 System

1. Apply power to the PACS Link 9410 computer and Service PC.
2. Set the Service PC network parameters:
a. From the WindowsTM 95 taskbar, select Start>Settings>Control Panel.
b. From the Control Panel, double-click Network.
c. Choose the Configuration tab.
d. From the list of network components, select TCP/IP -> Network Board Name and click Properties.
(Network Board Name is the model of the Ethernet interface in your Service PC.)
e. Under the IP Address, select Specify an IP Address.
f. Enter the 9410 PACS Link IP Address: 149.98.202.50
g. Enter the Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Do not enter any information under the Gateway tab, the WINS tab, the DNS tab or the Identification tab.
h. Click OK twice.
i. When prompted, click Yes to restart the Service PC.
3. Start pcANYWHERETM on the Service PC.
4. From the pcANYWHERE taskbar, select the Remote Control button.
5. Double click the connection item labeled Network.
6. From the list of host computers, double click the PACS Link 9410 computer name. (This will be the only
computer in the list.)
7. When prompted to press Ctrl-Alt-Del, click on the C-A-D icon in the pcANYWHERE upper toolbar. Do not
press the Ctrl-Alt-Del keys.
3–40 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
8. If prompted for the host password, enter imagenet (lower case).
The PACS Link 9410 Windows NTTM desktop should now display on top of the Service PC desktop (see figure).
9. Continue with Enter Customer Network Parameters into the 9410 System.
PACS Link 9410 Taskbar
Service PC Taskbar
Note
When using pcANYWHERE, it may be difficult to determine whether you are viewing the PACS Link 9410 desktop
or the Service PC desktop. Use the Scaling icon in the pcANYWHERE upper toolbar to help distinguish between the
two desktops.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–41

Enter Customer Network Parameters into the 9410 System

Before starting, make sure the following customer-assigned network parameters for the PACS Link 9410 system are
available:
• Computer Name
• Workgroup Name (customer may not require)
• IP Address
• IP Mask (Subnet Mask)
• Default Gateway Address (customer may not require)
1. From the taskbar at the bottom of the screen, select Start > Settings > Control Panel.
3. Choose the Identification tab and click Change.
4. Change the Computer name (e.g., CTPS, MR Mod Server, etc.) and, if required, enter a Workgroup name, then
click OK.
5. Choose the Protocols tab. A list of network components appears.
a. Select TCP/IP.
b. Click Properties.
6. Enter network parameters for the customer's network:
a. Under the IP Address tab, change:
- PACS Link 9410 Subnet mask
- Default Gateway Address (if required).
b. If the PACS network does not use a Gateway (Router), highlight and then delete each number for the Default
c. From the DNS tab, highlight and then delete kodak.com (or other domain name) located in the Domain box.
d. From the DNS Service Search Order box, highlight the first IP address and click Remove.
e. Repeat the previous step for the remaining IP addresses in the DNS Service Search Order box.
f. From the Domain Suffix Search Order box, highlight and delete kodak.com (or other domain name).
g. Click Apply and then click OK twice.
7. From the taskbar at the bottom of the screen, select Start > Shutdown.
8. Select Restart The Computer and Yes. Restarting activates the network settings.
9. Connect the PACS Link 9410 system to the customer's Ethernet network as shown in Figure 3–20.
10. Continue with Enter Customer Network Parameters into Service PC.
Network Drop
Cable
Network
RJ45 Wall Jack
Computer Connector
(Rear)
r9410-12L
Figure 3–20 Ethernet Network Connection
3–42 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Enter Customer Network Parameters into Service PC

1. On your Service PC, exit pcANYWHERETM.
2. Select Start>Settings>Control Panel.
4. From the Configuration tab, select TCP/IP -> Network Board Name and click Properties.
5. Enter the network parameters for your Service PC provided by the site network administrator:
a. Under the IP Address tab change: IP Address.
b. Under the IP Address tab, change: Subnet Mask.
c. Under the Gateway tab, enter Gateway IP Address (if required by the customer).
Do not enter any information under the WINS tab, the DNS tab or the Identification tab.
6. Click OK twice.
7. When prompted, click Yes to restart the Service PC.
8. Using either customer network jacks or and Ethernet hug, connect the Service PC to the network.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–43

9. Continue to Establish Remote Control Connection to PACS Link 9410 System.
Cable - Ethernet
(RJ-45)
78-8118-2031-1
RJ45 Adapter
Cable
Service PC Network
Wall Jack
Network
Connector
Site
Ethernet
Hub
r9410-12L
Customer Ethernet
Network
Network
Wall Jack
Network Drop Cable

Disconnect PACS (Do Not Use
Link 9410 From Wall Cross-Over Cable)
Jack And Then
Connect Hub Tool
Ethernet
Hub Tool
UPLINK 1 2 3 4 5
Reconnect PACS Connect

Link 9410 Here Service PC
Here r9410-12L
3–44 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Establish Remote Control Connection to PACS Link 9410 System

1. From the Service PC, start pcANYWHERE.
2. From the pcANYWHERE taskbar, select the Remote Control button.
3. Double click the Network icon. A list of host computers on the network appears.
4. Double click the name of the PACS Link 9410 system you are installing.
5. When prompted to press Ctrl-Alt-Del, click on the C-A-D icon in the pcANYWHERE upper toolbar. Do not
press the Ctrl-Alt-Del keys.
6. If prompted for the host password, enter imagenet (lower case).
The PACS Link 9410 Windows NTTM desktop should now display on top of the Service PC desktop (see figure).
7. Continue to SMT Configuration Procedures.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–45

Configure Serial Ports

Perform this procedure only if the PACS Link 9410 system contains a video or digital input board. In this procedure,
enter parameters for the serial ports that will be used for keypad or host-control connections. Before performing this
procedure, make sure you know:
• Which ports on the serial communication boards have keypads or host control inputs connected.
• What type of control device is connected to each port (IMS keypad or host control).
For more detailed information about serial port configuration parameters when performing this procedure, refer to
Section 6.
1. Double-click the SMT icon to start SMT.
2. From the System Management tab, click Stop System. This stops the PACS Link 9410 application software
(takes about 30 seconds - wait for the hour glass to disappear).
3. From the I/O Card Setup tab, click Serial Ports. A list of serial ports and related parameter fields will display.
4. To configure each of the serial ports used for an IMS Keypad or host-control input, perform the following for
each serial port:
a. Activate the port: Click the check box next to a port number. (COM1 and COM2 ports cannot be used for
keypad or host control inputs.)
b. Protocol: Select Superset for IMS Keypad; 952 for host control.
c. Baud Rate: Select 19200 for IMS keypad, 1200 for host control.
d. Parity: Select None for IMS Keypad, Even for host control.
e. Data Bits: 8 bits per byte.
f. Stop Bits: 1 bit per byte.
5. After entering parameters for each serial port, click Save.
6. Continue to the next procedure.
3–46 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Setting Up PACS Link 9410 Image Inputs

Use SMT to configure each of the image interface boards in a PACS Link 9410 system. Refer to the Digital Input
and/or Video Input board diagrams for more information.
Note
Set up procedures to receive images from network sources (print server set up) is described in a later procedure.
Digital Image Inputs

Perform this procedure only if the system you are installing contains a DPI-4 digital input board. This procedure
configures the PACS Link 9410 system to capture images from digital modalities. For more detailed information
about digital board configuration parameters when performing this procedure, refer to Section 6.
1. With SMT running and the application software stopped, select the I/O Card Setup tab.
2. Click DPI-4. The DPI-4 Setup Window displays.
3. Click the check box for Digital Board 1. (Check boxes for boards 2, 3 and 4 will be greyed-out. Only one
DPI-4 board is supported.)
4. Image Data Ports:
• A Data: check if a modality is connected to the A Data port on the DPI-4 card.
• B Data: check if a modality is connected to the B Data port on the DPI-4 card.
5. Image Ports:
• Header: Check box to obtain image size from the image data header (default is checked).
• Columns/Rows: Enter actual image size (not needed if Header box is checked.)
• Bit Depth: 8
• Parity: Set to match the parity provided by the digital modality (if you don't know the type, set to None).
• Time Out: 60 (seconds)
• Aspect Ratio: Enter the aspect ratio of the image sent by the digital modality (aspect ratio = width divided by
height.). Normally 1 (1 to 1).
• Memory allocated if only one image channel is used: set to 31 MB for this channel.
• Memory allocated if image size is equal on both channels: set to 15 MB for each channel.
• Memory allocated if image size is unequal on the two channels: allocate memory in proportion to image size.
(Maximum memory for both channels is 31 MB.)
6. Click Save.
7. Click Cancel to exit DPI-4 set up. This completes set up of the digital input board.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–47

Video Image Inputs

This procedure configures the video input board on the PACS Link 9410 system to capture images from video
modalities.
Note
For video configuration, use a Monitor Kit rather than a Service PC to access the PACS Link 9410 system.
Video configuration consists of two major steps: AutoSYNC and Fine Tuning. The AutoSYNC operation analyzes
the video signals on all input channels (up to 3) and automatically sets up each channel to capture the incoming video
image. After AutoSYNC, perform Fine Tuning separately for each channel to optimize image quality.
Before starting this procedure, make sure the video modalities are connected to the PACS Link 9410 system and are
transmitting images. If possible, transmit a SMPTE test image from the modalities, otherwise, ask for an image
containing text.
AutoSYNC Procedure
1. Verify that SMT is running and the application software stopped.
2. From the I/O Card Setup tab, click IMAGRAPHTM Video. The IMAGRAPH Video Setup window displays.
3–48 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
3. In the Video Setup window, verify that the video modalities are transmitting images. (If a video signal is available
on a channel, the corresponding red/green indicator light for the input channel will be green.)
4. Select the check box to the left of the video board that you are configuring (in most cases it will be the only video
board).
5. Click the Auto-SYNC button. The Auto-SYNC Control window displays.
Select a Video
Board
8628588 - 2001 March 3–49

6. From the drop-down box, select the video board you want configured (not necessary if there is only one video
board).
7. Click OK. Do not click the Express button.
• The Auto-SYNC operation will analyze the video signals on all input channels and automatically set up the
video board to acquire these signals. Video parameter values, determined by the Auto-SYNC operation, are
stored in a file (called a CHP file) for each channel.
• Log data is displayed during the Auto-SYNC process. Error messages for any channels with no video signal
will occur. This is normal.
8. Click OK when the following operator instruction displays:
Check channel sync assignments,

then press Express (automatic) or OK (interactive)
Note
The log that displays during Auto-SYNC is automatically stored as a file and can be used to analyze video capture
problems. The filename is displayed in the Auto-SYNC Control Window. Refer to Section 4, Troubleshooting, for
more information on using this log.
9. Click one of the active channel numbers (CA1 or CA2) displayed in the operator instruction screen. The Sync
Source and Parameters window displays.
Click One
CA1 CA2
3–50 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
10. From the Phase Determination drop-down box, select Thorough and click OK. This returns to the previous
window.
11. Repeat Step 9 and Step 10 for each active channel.
12. When done, click OK in the Operator Instructions window. The Sync Source and Parameters window displays
and the Auto-SYNC process will continue.
Auto-SYNC processing takes several minutes depending on the number of active video channels to be analyzed.
After processing, the operator instruction DONE will display, along with a Comment box for each channel. This
indicates the Auto-SYNC operation is complete.
Select Thorough"
13. Click OK in the Comment boxes (you do not have to enter any comments in the boxes). The initial Fine Tuning
window displays.
14. Go to Step 4 of the ”Fine Tune Video Parameters” procedure.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–51

Fine Tune Video Parameters

If you have previously configured the PACS Link 9410 system for video input, you can adjust the video parameters
to enhance image quality as necessary. Perform this procedure for each video input channel.
1. Verify that SMT is running and the application software is stopped.
2. From the I/O Board tab, click IMAGRAPHTM Video.
3. Click Fine Tune for the video channel you want adjusted. (You can select any of the four video input channels:
A1, A2, A3 and A4.) The initial Fine Tuning window displays.
Full Size Icon Acquired Image
3–52 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
4. From the toolbar at the top of the window, click the Full Size icon to enlarge the acquired image.
Image Enlarged
Adjust Phase
Delay
5. Adjust the Phase Delay:

a. Select the Pixel Adjustments tab.
b. Place the cursor in an area with vertical lines (if you are not working with a SMPTE image, select an area
containing text).
c. Right click up to 4 times to enlarge the image.
d. If the vertical lines are not sharp, increase or decrease the Phase Delay value to sharpen the image.
e. Right click in the image one or more times to return to the original image size.
f. Repeat Step b, Step c and Step d in another area of the image.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–53

6. Adjust the Frame (so there is a 1 pixel black border on all four sides of the image):
a. Select the Frame tab.
b. Adjust vertical parameters:
- Bottom border: adjust Height (lines)
- Top border: adjust Vert. Back Porch (lines)
c. Adjust horizontal parameters:
- Left border: adjust Horiz Back Sync (pixels)
- Right border: adjust Width (pixels)
7. Adjust Brightness and Contrast:

a. Select the Brightness/Contrast tab.
b. Place the cursor in an all black area of the screen. The density value of the area near the cursor displays in
the bottom-right corner of the window. The target value for black is 1 (acceptable range is 1-4)
c. Adjust the Black Level Contrast slide bar to a value of 1. Do not change the Black Reference Level. Contact
Service Engineering before changing this adjustment.
d. Place the cursor in an all white area of the screen. The density value of the area near the cursor displays in
the bottom-right corner of the window. The target value for white is 254 (acceptable range is 250-254).
e. Adjust the Gain slide bar to a value of 254. Do not change the White Reference Level. Contact Service
Engineering before changing this adjustment.
3–54 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
8. From the File menu, select Save. This completes the fine tuning procedure for one channel.
Density Value
Adjust Gain
Adjust Black
Level
9. To fine tune another video input channel, select the Connection tab.
10. In the Analog Channel drop-down box, select another channel.
11. Repeat this procedure starting with Step 4.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–55

12. When all video input channels have been fine tuned, close all screens and return to the SMT Main screen. This
completes the fine tuning process.
Select Another
Channel
3–56 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Configuring PACS Link 9410 Outputs

The PACS Link 9410 system must be configured to print images to a local printer or network (DICOM) printers.
Perform one or both of the procedures as needed.
Configuring Local Printers (COPCIL and FOPCIL)

This procedure configures the PACS Link 9410 system to print to one or two local (non-network) printers connected
to a FOPCIL board (fiber optic output board) or COPCIL board (copper output board).
A single local printer can be connected directly to a FOPCIL or COPCIL board. The FOPCIL board can drive two
printers only when they are connected through a DryView 8800 Multi-Input Manager (MIM). In SMT, the two
printers are designated as Printer 1 and Printer 2. The 8800 MIM calls these two printers dual printers. For more
information about local printer output board configuration parameters, refer to Section 6.
2. From the Device Setup tab, click Local Printers. The Local Laser Printer window displays:
3. Click Add/New.
4. In the parameter window, enter the Printer Identification:
a. Printer Name: A descriptive name (up to 24 characters) for the local printer. This name will appear in the
keypad Destination Select menu.
b. Model: Select the model number of the printer being set up (for 8100, use 8100 4096 pixels/lines).
c. Manufacturer: Kodak (always).
d. Output Board: Select either Fiber or Copper for the local laser output board.
e. 8800 Printer Setup: If there are dual printers connected through a MIM, select Printer 1 or Printer 2 for the
printer you are configuring.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–57

5. Enter Communication parameters (PACS Link 9410 values):
Parameter Value
PACS Link 9410 Connected to:
Communications 969, DryView 8500, 8700 Connected to: Connected to:
Parameter or 8800 DryView 8300 or 8600 DryView 8100
Command Set* SuperSet 952 952
Baud Rate* 19200 1200 1200
Data Bits* 8 8 8
Stop Bits* 1 1 1
Parity* None Even Even
Note: These parameters must match the corresponding COM parameters set up in the local laser imager. See laser
imager parameter tables in this section.
6. Enter Image Transfer parameters (PACS Link 9410 values):
Parameter Value
Connected to:
PACS Link 9410 Image 969, DryView 8500, 8700 Connected to: Connected to:
Transfer Parameter or 8800 DryView 8300 or 8600 DryView 8100
Pixel Depth 8 or 12* 8 8 or 12*
Header Header Header Header
Acquire Mode Frame or Line** Line Header Line
Acquire Timeout 60 60*** 60
Transfer Rate 2 MHz 2 MHz 1 MHz
Notes:
* Must match EIB Pixel Width setting in local laser imager, see laser imager parameters.
If using TFT Emulation, select 12 bits
** Must match laser imager Header Mode setting. See laser imager parameters.
*** This parameter is different from the Acquire Timeout parameter included in the DryView 8100 parameter set.
The values of these parameters are not equal.
3–58 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
7. Verify the Default Parameters:

Default Parameters
Film Mismatch: Print Always
Interpolation Type: Imation 831
Interpolation Number: 3
Maximum Density: 310
Contrast: 6
Border Density: 4095
Installed TFT/ULUT: - Ver 693c0.w87 for 8100, 8500, 8700 or 969 laser imagers.
- Ver upmsv3k.w8u for 8300, 8600 laser imagers.
TFT/ULUT Emulation: Check box if more than one modality will print through a PACS Link 9410 and
needs to use separate TFT/ULUTs.
8. Click Save and then Cancel to exit back to the Local Laser Printer screen. The name of the printer you just
configured appears in this screen.
9. Verify that the local printer is powered up and configured properly.
10. In the Local Laser Printer screen, highlight the local printer you just set up.
11. Click Print 1UP-SMPT to print a SMPTE test image.
12. If a second local printer is connected (through an 8800 MIM), repeat Step 3 through Step 12.
13. Click Cancel to return to the Device Setup Tab screen. This completes the Local Printer configuration procedure.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–59

Configuring DICOM-Print (SCU) Printers

Perform the following procedure to configure the PACS Link 9410 system to print to a network printer (DICOM-
print output). Repeat for each network printer.
Note
For more information about DICOM-print configuration parameters, refer to Section 6.

2. From the Device Setup tab, click SCU Printers. The SCU Printer Selection window displays.
3. Click Add/New to display a parameter window for a new network printer.

4. Printer Identification:
a. Printer Name: Enter a descriptive name for the target network printer (up to 24 characters). This name will
appear on the keypad Destination Select menu.
b. Model: From the pull-down list, select the model number of the printer being set up.
c. Manufacturer: Enter printer manufacturer’s name.
5. Network Parameters:
a. Port (enter for appropriate network printer):
- DryView 8300): enter 0104
- PACS Link 9410 print server with one local printer): enter 1024
- PACS Link 9410 print server configured as two SCPs (two local dual printers connected via 8800):
Enter either 1025 or 1024. (One local dual printer is port number 1025, the other 1024. Enter the port
number for the desired local printer.)
b. IP Address: IP address of the network printer.
c. SCU AETitle: AE Title of the PACS Link 9410 system you are setting up - normally IMN_9410.
d. SCP AETitle: AE Title of the network printer.
- If a PACS Link 9410 print server, enter IMN_9410
- If a 9400 AUB print server, enter IMN_PrintServer
6. Printer Options:
a. LUT String Supported: leave unchecked.
b. Imation Annotation Supported: check box.
c. Print Guaranteed: leave checked.
d. Advanced Vendor Options: displays a window to enter parameters for a network printer other than a
DryView Laser Imager or 969 Laser Imager. Contact Service Engineering for the values to enter in this
window.
3–60 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
7. Default Parameters (select from pull-down lists):

a. Film Size: enter film size used in the network printer.
b. Film Type: select film type for the network printer: Clear or Blue.
c. Film Destination (destination for the network printer): Default is Current. Can also select Processor or
Magazine (usually Processor).
d. Contrast: set per customer preference. Range: 1-15.
e. Min Density: not applicable to 969 or DryView Laser Imagers. Contact Service Engineering if you are
setting up a network printer from another vendor.
f. Max Density: Leave at Default: 310
g. Interpolation Type (select for appropriate network printer):
- PACS Link 9410 print server: Imation 831 DICOM.
- DryView 8300 or 8600 Laser Imager: Imation 8300 DICOM.
- All others, select Generic DICOM.
h. Interpolation Number: Use the default setting 3. Range: -1 to 15.
i. TFT/ULUT: 8100/8500/8700 laser imagers: Ver 693c0.w87
8300 laser imagers: Ver upm5v3k.w8u
(for more information on TFT Emulation, refer to Section 6)
8. Click Save.
9. Click Cancel to return to the SCU Printer Selection screen.
10. Verify that the network printer is powered up and configured properly.
11. From the SCU Printer Selection window, highlight the printer you just set up, then click Ping.
This tests communication with the printer over the network. If the printer is communicating you will see a
message similar to: Reply from (IP address): bytes = 32 time<10ms TTL = 128
12. Verify that the printer name is still highlighted, then click Print 1UP-SMPT. This prints a SMPTE image to the
network printer.
13. Repeat Step 3 through Step 12 for each network printer.
14. Click Cancel to exit SCU Printer Setup. This completes the DICOM-Print Out configuration procedure.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–61

Set Up IMS Keypad Control Inputs

This procedure sets up the PACS Link 9410 system to accept commands from an IMS Keypad. Repeat for each
keypad.
Note
If you are setting up an IMS keypad as a destination switching keypad, follow the procedure Set Up a Host Control
Input with a Destination Switching Keypad later in this section.
Before starting:
• Set up all local and network printers before setting up the IMS keypads.
• Know the serial port to which each keypad is connected. Refer to Video Input Diagram and/or Digital Input
Diagram for more information.
For more detailed information about IMS Keypad parameters, refer to Section 6.
2. From the Device Setup tab, click IMS Keypads. The following window displays.
3. Click Add/New. A keypad parameter entry screen displays.

4. Enter the following information for the IMS Keypad you are configuring:
a. Keypad Name: a descriptive name (up to 24 characters) such as the name of the related modality.
b. Hospital Name: the hospital, clinic, department, etc. name (up to 24 characters). This name will be printed
as a label on films printed from this keypad.
5. Hardware Options (click in boxes for a list of choices):
a. Serial Port: select serial port to which this keypad is connected (through a UKEIB).
b. Image Card: select image board (or A Data or B Data channel for the DPI-4 digital board) you want this
keypad to control. Choices: IMAGRAPH 1, DPI-4 A DATA and DPI-4 B DATA.
c. Channel (applies to IMAGRAPHTM video board only): select image channel you want this keypad to control.
The Image Card and Channel selections associate the keypad you are setting up with a specific image source
(modality).
3–62 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
6. Printer Options:
a. Click Available Printers box for a list of printers.
b. From the Available Printers list, select a printer that you want to appear on the keypad Destination Select
menu.
c. In the Film Destination box, select a destination (Processor or Magazine) for the printer (normally
Processor).
For some printers you can select more than one film destination (e.g., for the 969 Laser Imager, you can select
both Magazine and Processor if a processor is attached. If you select both, they will both be displayed on the
IMS Keypad.
d. Repeat Step a through Step c for each printer that you want displayed in the keypad Destination Select menu.
e. Interpolation Values: Use Defaults (checked).
7. Keypad Options:
a. Foreground: accept default 0 (black). This controls the density of the ID entered in the Hospital Name field.)
b. Background: accept default 4095 (white).
c. TFT/ULUT: If using TFT Emulation, select TFT based on modality being connected. Refer to Section 6 for
more information.
8. Destination Switching options:
a. Do not check the box labeled Use as Destination Switching Keypad.
b. Ignore the following destination switching options:
- Contrast - DMax - Beta - Frame - Rotation - Border Density

9. Click Save and then Cancel.
10. Repeat Step 3 through Step 9 for each additional IMS Keypad.
11. When you finish configuring all IMS keypads (except destination switching keypads), click Cancel to exit IMS
Keypad Setup. This completes the IMS Keypad configuration procedure.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–63

Configuring Host Control Inputs

Use the following procedures to configure each host control input to the PACS Link 9410 system.
• HPT Keypad
• No keypad (used for host control console with destination switching capability.)
• Destination Switching Keypad
Configuring an HPT Keypad

Perform this procedure for each non-831/952 host control input. For this type of input, an HPT keypad is required
for host command conversion. Before starting:
• Set up all local and network printers.
• Know the serial port to which each host control input is connected. Refer to the Video Input and Digital Input
cabling diagrams for more information:
For more detailed information about host control input parameters, refer to Section 6.
2. From the Device Setup tab, click Host Keypads. The Host Keypad Setup window displays:
3. Click Add/New. A host keypad parameter entry screen displays.

4. Host Keypad Identification:
• Keypad Name: related modality or other descriptive name for host control input (up to 24 characters).
• Hospital Name: name of hospital, clinic, department, etc. (up to 24 characters). This name prints as a label
on all films printed from this host control input.
5. Hardware Options:
• Serial Port: COM port to which this host control input is connected (through a UKEIB).
• Image Card: image board (or A Data or B Data channel for the DPI-4 digital board) you want this host
control input to control. Choices: IMAGRAPH 1, DPI-4 A DATA and DPI-4 B DATA
• Channel (applies to video input board only): select the image channel you want this host control input to
control. The Image Card and Channel selections associate the host control input you are setting up with a
specific image source (modality).
3–64 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
6. Printer Options:
Repeat Step a through Step 7 for each printer you want available on HPT keypad. Up to four printers allowed.
a. Click Available Printers box for a list of all printers that were previously set up.
b. Select one of the printers you want available on the HPT keypad.
c. In the Film Destination box, select a film destination (Processor or Magazine) for the printer you selected
(normally Processor). For some printers you can select more than one film destination (e.g., for the 969
imager, you can select both magazine and processor if a processor is attached. If you select both, they both
will be displayed on the HPT Keypad.)
Note
Any Destination Switching Keypads you previously configured will appear in the list of available printers, identified
by asterisks. Do not select Destination Switching Keypads.
7. Check boxes: configure the four check boxes for the printer you selected (these settings are modality dependent).
Refer to Section 6 for an explanation of these parameters.
• Image 300 DPI mode
• Rotate All Images (not currently functional)
• Scale Format/Pixel Correction
• Scale Magnification
8628588 - 2001 March 3–65

8. Printer 1 through Printer 4 Boxes: specify the printers that will appear as output destinations on an HPT
keypad. Each box represents one output destination on the keypad.
Note
Printer names placed in these boxes show up as output destinations on the HPT keypad. The printers you can place
come from the Available Printers/Film Destinations selected previously.
• Click in a Printer box (start with Printer 1). A list of available printers (and related film destinations) appears.
• Click on one of the printers to place it in the printer box.
• Repeat Step 8 to place each available printer in one of the four Printer boxes.
Available Printer and

Film Destination
Available
Printers
When complete, the Printer boxes should look similar to the following:
Note
The printer names you place in the Printer 1 - Printer 4 boxes do not appear on the HPT keypad (e.g., if the operator
chooses Imager 1 Magazine on the HPT keypad, the printer listed in the Printer 1 box is selected as an output
destination). Output destinations on the HPT keypad will always appear as:
Imager 1 Magazine -- corresponds to -- Printer 1 box.
Imager 2 Magazine -- corresponds to -- Printer 2 box.
Imager 1 Processor -- corresponds to -- Printer 3 box.
Imager 2 Processor -- corresponds to -- Printer 4 box.
3–66 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
9. Keypad Options (for host control input you are configuring; these apply even though there is no keypad):
• Foreground: Accept default 0
• Background: Accept default 4095
• Width: Accept default 512
• Leading: Accept default 1
• EDM Char: Select CR
• Multi-Printer Response: Yes (checked) (If not checked, only one printer will be available to the host control
console.)
• Automatic Routing: Not currently implemented.
• Alarm Mode: Yes (checked)
• Memory Full Response: Yes (checked)
• Image Size Mode: Yes (checked)
• Frame: Not currently implemented.
• Defaults: Click to display a Defaults window.
• TFT/ULUT: If using TFT Emulation, select TFT based on modality being connected. Refer to Section 6 for
more information.
10. Defaults Window:
The following parameters are applied to print jobs if the host does not supply print parameters. Set these
parameters according to customer preference (refer to Section 6 for explanation of these parameters).
- Destination - Density
- Media Type - Border
- Media Size - Bit Depth
- Polarity - Beta Y
- Acquire TO (Timeout) - Beta X
- Contrast - Destination Name
11. Click Save and then Cancel to return to the Host Keypad Setup screen.
12. Repeat Step 3 through Step 6 for each additional host control input.
13. When you finish configuring all host control inputs with HPT keypads, click Cancel to exit Host Keypad Setup.
This completes the configuration procedure for host control input with an HPT keypad.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–67

Configuring an HPT Keypad Service Screen

In addition to the HPT keypad setup in SMT, several setup steps must be performed from the Service Screen. These
procedures are located in the following instruction sheets:
• SHPT Keypad: IFC 831/952-80 - document part number 78-6970-5424-1.
• THPT Keypad: IFC 831/952-81 - document part number 78-6970-5440-7.
• YHPT Keypad: Contact Service Engineering for setup instructions.
Note
The appropriate instruction sheet is packed with each keypad when shipped.
1. Perform the Service Screen setup procedure for each HPT keypad in the PACS Link 9410 system.
2. Perform only the steps in the IFC that are done from the keypad Service Screen. Ignore the cabling instructions
and UKEIB switch settings, and laser printer MPC setup steps; these steps should have already been completed.
3. When configuring the Printer Mode in the keypad Service Screen, select HQ. This will provide four output
destination choices on the HPT keypad.
3–68 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Configuring for No Keypad

Perform this procedure for each input from a host control console that has destination switching capability. No
supplemental HPT or IMS keypad is used for this type of input. Before starting:
• Set up all local and network printers.
• Know the serial port to which the host control input is connected. Refer to one of the Video Input and/or Digital
Input cabling diagrams:
For more detailed information about host control input parameters, refer to Section 6.
2. From the Device Setup tab, click Host Keypads. The following window displays:

4. Host Keypad Identification (for host control input you are configuring):
a. Keypad Name: name of the related modality or other descriptive name for the host control input (up to 24
characters).
b. Hospital Name: name of the hospital, clinic, department, etc. (up to 24 characters). This name will print as a
label on all films printed from this host control input.
5. Hardware Options (for host control input you are configuring):
a. Serial Port: COM port to which this host control input is connected (through a UKEIB).
b. Image Card: image board (or A Data or B Data channel for the DPI-4 digital board) you want this host
control input to control. Choices: IMAGRAPH 1, DPI-4 A DATA and DPI-4 B DATA.
c. Channel (applies to video input board only): image channel you want this host control input to control.
The Image Card and Channel selections associate the host control input you are setting up with a specific
image source (modality).
8628588 - 2001 March 3–69

6. Printer Options (for host control input you are configuring):

a. Click in Available Printers box for a list of all printers that were previously set up.
b. From the list, select one of the printers that you want to be available on the host control console.
c. In the Film Destination box, select a film destination (Processor or Magazine) for the printer you selected
(normally Processor). For some printers you can select more than one film destination (e.g., for the 969 Laser
Imager with an attached processor, you can select both Magazine and Processor and both will be available
on the host control console).
d. Check boxes: Set the following four check boxes for the printer you selected (settings are modality
dependent).
- Image 300 DPI mode

- Rotate All Images (not currently functional)
- Scale Format/Pixel Correction
- Scale Magnification
e. Repeat Step a through Step d for each printer (up to 4 allowed) that you want available on the host control
console.
f. Printer 1 through Printer 4 Boxes: Use these boxes to specify the printers that will appear as output
destinations on the host control console. Each box represents one output destination on the console.
When you place a printer name in one of these boxes, the printer shows up as an output destination on the
host control console. The printers you place in these boxes come from the “Available Printers/Film
Destinations” previously selected.
3–70 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
g. Place printer names in the Printer 1- Printer 4 boxes as follows (refer to the screen below):
- Click in Printer 1 box. A list of the available printers (and related film destinations) appears.
- Click on one of the printers to place it in the printer box.
- Repeat for each available printer. If there are not four available printers, leave one or more of the Printer
boxes blank. Do not place the same printer in more than one box.
Available Printers Film Destination
List of Available
Printers
When you are done, the Printer boxes should look similar to the following example:
Available Printers
Note
The printer names you place in the Printer 1 - Printer 4 boxes do not necessarily appear on the host control console.
Other terminology may be used at the host to select the printers you have set up for the host.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–71

7. Keypad Options (for host control input you are configuring; these apply even though there is no keypad):
• Multi-Printer Response: Check Yes
• Automatic Routing: Not currently implemented.
• Alarm Mode: Check Yes
• Memory Full Response: Check Yes
• Image Size Mode: Check Yes
• Frame: Not currently implemented.
• Defaults - Click to display a Defaults window.
more information.
8. Default Parameters (for print jobs if the host does not supply print parameters. Set these parameters according
to customer preference):
- Polarity - Beta Y
9. Click Save and then Cancel. This returns to the Host Keypad Setup screen.
10. Repeat Step 3 through Step 6 for each additional input from a host control console with destination switching.
11. When you are done, click Cancel to exit Host Keypad Setup. This completes setup of a host control input with
a destination switching console.
3–72 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Configuring a Destination Switching Keypad

Perform this procedure for each host control input that has an associated destination switching (IMS) keypad. This
procedure configures an IMS keypad as a destination switching keypad and configures the host control input for use
with the destination switching keypad. For more information about IMS Keypad or host control input parameters,
refer to Section 6.
Before starting:
• Verify that all local and network printers are configured.
• Know the serial port that:
– connects to the destination switching keypad.
– connects to the host control input.
• Refer to the Video Input or Digital Input cabling diagrams for more information.
• Know which of the destination switching options should be enabled or disabled, based on customer preference.
– Contrast - DMax - Beta - Frame - Rotation - Border Density
2. From the Device Setup tab, click IMS Keypads. The following window displays.
3. Click Add/New. A keypad parameter entry screen displays.

4. IMS Keypad Identification:
a. Keypad Name: descriptive name (e.g., name of the related modality).
b. Hospital Name: name of the hospital, clinic, department, etc. This name will print as a label on films printed
from this keypad.
5. IMS Keypad Hardware Options:
a. Serial Port: - select the COM port that connects to the IMS Keypad (through a UKEIB).
b. Leave the Image Card and Channel fields blank.
6. Printer Options:
a. From the Available Printers list, select the printer you want to appear on the keypad Destination Select menu.
b. In the Film Destination box, select a destination (Processor or Magazine) for the printer you selected
(normally Processor).
For some printers you can select more than one film destination (e.g., for the 969, you can select both
magazine and processor if a processor is attached. If you select both, they both will be displayed on the IMS
Keypad).
c. Repeat Step a and Step b for each printer you want displayed on the keypad Destination Select menu.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–73
7. Keypad Options:
a. Foreground: - accept default 0 (black). This controls the density of the ID you entered in the Hospital Name
field.
b. Background: accept default 4095 (white)
c. Defaults: - click to display a Defaults window. Do not change any of the values in this window.
• TFT/ULUT: Not applicable.
8. Destination Switching Options:
a. Check the box Use as Destination Switching Keypad.
b. Enable or disable each of the following options (check the boxes to enable).
- Contrast - DMax - Beta - Frame - Rotation - Border Density

9. Click Save and then Cancel.
10. Click Cancel (again) to exit IMS Keypad Setup.
11. From the Device Setup tab, click Host Keypads. The Host Keypad Setup window displays:

13. Host Keypad Identification:
a. Keypad Name: enter name of the related modality or other descriptive name for the host control input.
b. Hospital Name: enter hospital, clinic, department, etc. name (enter the same Hospital Name entered in
Step 4)
3–74 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
14. Host Control Input Hardware Options:

a. Serial Port: select the COM port to which this host control input is connected (through a UKEIB).
b. Image Card: image card (or A Data or B Data channel for the DPI-4 digital board) you want this input to
control. Choices: IMAGRAPH 1, DPI-4 A DATA and DPI-4 B DATA.
c. Channel (applies to video input board only): select the image channel this host control input will control.
The Image Card and Channel selections associate the host control input you are configuring with a specific
image source (modality).
15. Printer Options:
a. In the Available Printers list, select the destination switching keypad you just configured. (Destination
switching keypads are identified by an asterisk.) Do not select any individual printers from the list.
b. In the Film Destination box, select Processor.
c. Check boxes: set the following four check boxes for the printer you selected (settings are modality
dependent):
- Image 300 DPI mode
- Rotate All Images (not currently functional)
- Scale Format/Pixel Correction
- Scale Magnification
d. Printer 1 through Printer 4:
- Click in Printer 1 box. The name of the destination switching keypad (only) will display.
- Click on the name to place it in the Printer 1 box.
- Leave the Printer 2 through Printer 4 boxes blank.
16. Keypad Options:
• Multi-Printer Response: No (unchecked)
• Automatic Routing: not currently implemented.
• Alarm Mode: Check Yes
• Memory Full Response: Check Yes
• Image Size Mode: Check Yes
• Frame: Yes or No per customer preference. Normally No (unchecked). If Yes, a frame is printed around
images from this host.
• Defaults - Click to display a Defaults window.
more information.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–75

17. Enter the default parameters for print jobs. If the host does not supply print parameters, set parameters according
to customer preference:
- Polarity - Beta Y
18. Click Save and then Cancel. This completes the destination switching keypad and the related host control input
configuration.
19. Repeat Step 2 through Step 18 for each additional host control input with a destination switching keypad.
20. When finished, click Cancel to exit Host Keypad Setup.
3–76 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Configuring for Network (DICOM Print Input)

Perform this procedure only if the PACS Link 9410 system will perform as a print server to receive incoming images
from the network. A print server is classified as a DICOM Service Class Provider (SCP).
This procedure configures the PACS Link 9410 system to receive images from remote users on the network and print
these images on the local laser printer. If the PACS Link 9410 system has two local dual printers, connected through
an DryView 8800 MIM, it can be configured as two SCPs, one for each printer.
Note
The local laser printer(s) must be setup before you perform this procedure.

2. From the Device Setup tab, click SCP Printers. The following window displays:
3. From the Current Providers tab, click Add/New. A parameter window displays.
4. Enter the following information:
a. Printer: Click in window to see a list of configured printers (both local and network). Select a local or
network printer (usually there is only one local printer, but there can be two if connected through a DryView
8800 MIM).
b. Port: Single SCP: enter 1024.
Two SCPs: enter 1024 for the first SCP, 1025 for the second SCP.
c. SCP_AETitle: IMN_9410 ( or other PACS Link 9410 system AETitle).
d. Max # of Associations: Enter the number of allowable users for this SCP (maximum recommended # is 5).
5. Click Save and then Cancel to return to the SCP Printer Selection window.
6. To configure a second SCP, repeat Step 3 through Step 5. In Step 4, select the second local or network printer.
7. From the Registered User tab, select Add/New. This displays a parameter screen used to register remote SCP
users. You must register each remote (Service Class) user.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–77

8. Enter the following parameter values for the remote user.

SCU Identification
SCU AETitle: Enter the users AETitle.
SCU IP Address: The users network address.
SCP: The remote users SCP name:
- For a single SCP, the name will appear in the SCP field.
- For two SCPs, click in the SCP field and select the SCP the remote user will use.
Default Parameters The following parameters control a print job if the requesting remote user doesn’t
supply print parameters. Set according to customer preference.
# of Copies: Enter the number of copies to print.
Contrast Table: Accept the default value (4) to start (change later, if necessary).
Maximum Density: Range:
Laser Imager Clear Base Blue Base
969 170-310 170-320
DryView 8100 200-350 200-350
DryView 8300 170-300 170-300
DryView 8600 200-350 200-350
DryView 8700/8500 170-300 170-300
Border Density: Range: DryView laser printers: 0 (black) is the only valid value.
969 Laser Imager: 0 (black) to 4095 (white).
Magnification Type: Valid values: 1 - No magnification, 2 - Replicate, 4 - Bilinear, 8 - Cubic (default)
Smoothing Type: Range: 1-15. Default (starting) value (5).
Polarity: Valid values: 1 - Normal (default), 2 - Reverse
Orientation: Valid values: 1 - Portrait (default), 2 - Landscape
Request Image Size: Default: (0) - normally used
Priority: Choices: Low (default), High
TFT/ULUT: Select based on modality being connected. For more information about TFT Emulation,
refer to Section 6.
Default Parameters for 8600 Laser Imager Only:
Gamma Table: Either Linear in Density or Linear in Transmittance.
Contrast Group: Select from 1-11, according to specific ULUT.
Kernel Group: Select from 0-11.
SCP Printer Options
Pixel Data Interceptor: Check if remote user sends large images (16 MB or larger)
N-Event Print Jobs: Check if remote user supports this feature.
N-Event Printer: Check if remote user supports this feature.
Trim: Adds 1 pixel of white around image. Customer preference.
Attribute Warning: Check (uncheck if this causes problems)
Contrast Test Mode: Check if the user wants a contrast test film each time the SCU prints to the SCP.
A 15-up contrast film will be printed using the first image in the film format.
Contrast Test Mode Density: Density setting for contrast test (set per customer preference). Range: Same as Max.
Density.
9. Click Save and then Cancel to return to the Registered Users tab.
10. Repeat Step 7 through Step 9 for each remote user.
11. Click Cancel to exit SCP Printers Setup. This completes the network input (SCP Printers) configuration
procedure.
3–78 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Backup SMT Configuration

The following procedure copies the configuration settings you entered onto a diskette to restore corrupted
configuration files or if the hard drive in the PACS Link 9410 system is replaced.
1. In SMT, select the System Management tab.
2. Select Stop System and close SMT.
3. Run the DBClean utility:
a. From the Start menu, select Programs -> Windows NTTM Explorer.
b. Select drive D.
c. From the NGNI\BIN directory, double-click DBClean.exe (this clears all jobs waiting in the print queue).
d. Close Windows NT Explorer.
4. Start SMT and click Backup DB.
5. When prompted, insert a blank diskette into the A: drive.
6. Press any key to start the backup process. Files will be copied to the diskette.
7. Remove the diskette and label as Configuration Backup Disk. Include date and current version of PACS Link
9410 application software on the label (check SMT System Info tab for current software version).
8. Store the backup disk in a secure place.
Note
Network settings are not included in the backup files.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–79

Test Local Laser Printer

This procedure tests a local printer with an image from a modality. Perform this test for each modality configured to
print to a local printer.
1. Make sure the local printer you want to test is powered up and properly configured.
2. From the System Management tab, click Start System to start the PACS Link 9410 application software, if
stopped. Wait for the hour glass symbol to disappear.
3. On the keypad or host control console for the modality, select the local printer you want tested.
4. On the keypad or host control console, set Contrast and Density.
5. On the keypad or host control console, Acquire and Print an image.
6. Verify that the modality is transmitting an image.
7. Verify that the quality of the printed test image is acceptable.
Print Test Images on Network Printers

This procedure tests a network printer with an image from a modality. Perform this test for each network printer and
each modality configured to print to a network printer.
1. Make sure that the network printers you want to test are powered up and properly configured.
2. From the System Management tab, click Start System to start the PACS Link 9410 application software, if
stopped. Wait for the hour glass symbol to disappear.
3. On the keypad or host control console for the modality, select the network printer you want tested.
4. On the keypad or host control console, set Contrast and Density.
5. On the keypad or host control console, Acquire and Print an image.
6. Verify that the modality is transmitting an image.
7. Verify that the quality of the printed test image is acceptable.
8. Repeat for each network printer linked to the PACS Link 9410 system.
3–80 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Test Modem
To quickly test if the PACS Link 9410 modem is functional, call the PACS Link 9410 system using a standard
telephone. If the PACS Link 9410 system answers the call, you will hear the ringing stop after several rings and then
a steady tone.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–81

Final Installation Steps

1. Record Site Information (record the following information on the configuration worksheets in Appendix A):
a. Telephone number of the line connected to the PACS Link 9410 (needed for remote service).
b. Network parameters entered into the PACS Link 9410 (needed if software has to be reloaded).
c. Service PC network parameters for this site.
2. If a Monitor Kit is used to access the PACS Link 9410:
a. Turn off the PACS Link 9410 computer power switch; it is not necessary to stop the application software or
SMT.
b. Disconnect the monitor, keyboard and mouse.
c. Turn on the PACS Link 9410 computer.
d. Go on to Step 4.
3. If a Service PC is used to access the PACS Link 9410:
a. From the SMT System Management tab, click Start Systems.
b. Close SMT.
c. Click the C-A-D icon in the upper toolbar to display the Task Manager.
End Remote Control Session
d. Click Lock Workstation. A message confirms that the PACS Link 9410 workstation is locked.
e. Click End Remote Control Session in upper toolbar and then Yes. The PACS Link 9410 desktop
disappears.
f. Quit pcANYWHERETM.
g. Turn off your Service PC and disconnect it from the customer’s network.
4. Acquire and print several test images to verify that the PACS Link 9410 system is operating normally.
5. Brief the users and turn the system over to the customer.
3–82 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Upgrade or Reload Software

All software components needed to operate the PACS Link 9410 system are factory-installed. This includes:
• WindowsNTTM
• pcANYWHERETM
• PACS Link 9410 application software
Reload the PACS Link 9410 software only if:
1. The hard disk is replaced or the software is corrupted. In this case, reload all of the software components
including WindowsNT.
2. A new version of the application software is sent to the field. In this case, install only the new application
software and SMT.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–83

Upgrade or Reload Software on the 9410 System

Use the following procedures to reload all PACS Link 9410 software components. This process is also called
Ghosting. Perform the procedures in the order in which they appear.
You will need the following items and information:
Note
You can reload software using a Service PC but the process is slow and not usually recommended. Call Service
Engineering for assistance if you need to install software without a Monitor Kit.
• PACS Link 9410 software (Image CD and companion Ghost diskette).

• Configuration backup diskette (made when system was installed or reconfigured).
• Monitor Kit
• If a modem is installed in the PACS Link 9410 system.
• Settings for the following PACS Link 9410 network parameters (recorded when the system was installed):
– Computer name
– Workgroup name (if required by customer)
– IP Address
– IP Mask (Subnet Mask)
– Gateway IP Address (if required by customer)
Connect Monitor Kit

1. Turn off the power switch on the PACS Link 9410 system; its not necessary to shut down the software.
2. Connect the monitor, keyboard and mouse.
Reghosting the System

1. Insert the Ghost diskette and Image CD into the PACS Link 9410 computer and turn on power.
The computer will boot from the Ghost diskette, partition the hard disk (create C and D partitions), load
WindowsNT and load pcANYWHERE. This will take 3 to 5 minutes. A progress screen will appear on the
monitor and when the reload process is complete, a tone will sound and the following message will display:
Please remove the boot floppy disk and CD-ROM now.

Then press Ctrl/Alt/Del to reboot the computer.
2. Remove the diskette and CD, then press Ctrl/Alt/Del. This reboots the computer from the hard disk.
3. When prompted, press Ctrl/Alt/Del again.
4. In the Logon box enter the password imagenet (lower case). The WindowsNT desktop displays.
3–84 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
5. If the PACS Link 9410 system does not contain a modem, disable modem service in pcANYWHERE.
a. From the Start window, select Programs -> pcANYWHERE.
b. In the pcANYWHERE task bar, select Be a Host PC. The Netlink icon representing both modem and
network service will be highlighted.
c. Double-click the Network icon.
d. When the message Stop the service? displays, click Yes. This disables Netlink, activates the Network service
and closes the pcANYWHERE window.
e. Click pcANY in the task bar at the bottom of the screen to verify that Network service is activated.
f. In the pcANYWHERE Waiting window, verify that the statement TCP/IP Host Service appears (this
indicates that the network service is enabled), then reduce the window.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–85

Load PACS Link 9410 Application Software

1. Insert the Image CD. An installation screen displays.
2. Click Install.
3. Click New Installation and then click Next.
4. From the Choose Destination Location box, click Next to accept the default file location.
5. When prompted to create the D:\NGNI folder, click Yes. A progress screen will display while software is loaded
from the CD.
6. When the completion message displays, remove the CD.
7. Click No, I will restart my computer later, then click Finish.
8. Change display resolution:
a. From the Start menu, select Settings -> Control Panel.
b. From the Control Panel, double-click the Display icon.
c. Select Settings and change the resolution to 800 x 600
d. Change the Color Palette setting to 65536 colors.
e. Click Apply, then OK.
9. Re-enter network settings:
a. From the Control Panel, double click Network.
b. Choose the Identification tab and click Change.
c. Change the Computer name and, if required, Workgroup name, then click OK.
d. From the Protocols tab, select TCP/IP, then click Properties.
e. Under the IP Address tab, enter or change the following network parameters.
- PACS Link 9410 Subnet mask.
- Gateway IP Address (if required).
f. If the PACS network does not use a Gateway (Router), highlight and then delete each number for the Default
g. From the DNS tab, highlight and then delete kodak.com (or other domain name) located in the Domain box.
h. From the DNS Service Search Order box, highlight the first IP address and click Remove.
i. Repeat Step 5 and Step 6 for the remaining IP addresses in the DNS Service Search Order box.
j. From the Domain Suffix Search Order box, highlight and delete kodak.com (or other domain name).
k. Click Apply and then click OK twice.
l. Close the Control Panel.
10. From the Start menu, select Programs -> WindowsNT Explorer.
11. From the directory D:\NGNI\BIN, locate the file SMT.exe.
12. Drag the file SMT.exe onto the WindowsNT desktop. This creates a shortcut icon for SMT.
13. On the desktop, rename the icon SMT.
14. From the directory D:\NGNI\BIN, locate and double-click the file DBEmpty.exe. This clears the configuration
database
15. Close WindowsNT Explorer.
16. Power cycle the PACS Link 9410 computer to reboot and press Ctrl/Alt/Del when prompted.
17. In the Logon box, enter the password imagenet (lower case). The WindowsNT desktop displays.
3–86 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Restore PACS Link 9410 Configuration

If the application software you just installed is the same version as previously installed, you can use this procedure
to restore configuration settings from a configuration backup disk.
If the backup disk was made from a previous version of the application software, you may not be able to restore from
the backup disk because of database incompatibility between the old and new versions.
If you can’t use the backup disk, you will have to re-enter all of the configuration settings (except video parameters)
using SMT. Refer to the configuration procedures for more information.
1. Locate the configuration backup diskette.
2. Insert the backup diskette into drive A: and start SMT.
3. From the System Management tab, click Stop System.
4. Click Restore DB. The system reads the configuration data from the diskette and when complete, responds with
the message:
The backup system has been successfully restored.
5. Click OK and remove the configuration backup diskette.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–87

Upgrade Application Software

Use the following procedures to install a new version of the PACS Link 9410 application software (including SMT).
You will need:
• A PACS Link 9410 Image CD that contains the new application software (do not use the companion Ghost
diskette).
• Monitor kit (monitor/keyboard/mouse) or Service PC.
• A configuration backup diskette. If you don't have a backup diskette, make one now.
Load Application Software

1. Access the PACS Link 9410 with a Monitor Kit or Service PC (refer to Section 6 for connection procedures):
2. Double-click the SMT icon to start SMT.
3. From the SMT System Management Tab, click Stop System and wait for the hour glass to disappear.
4. Close SMT and insert the Image CD in the CD ROM drive. After a few seconds an installation screen displays.
5. Click Install.
6. Click Upgrade Installation and then Next. A progress screen will display while software is loaded from the CD.
7. Remove the image CD when you see a completion message.
8. Click Yes, I will restart my computer now, then click Finish to reboot the computer.
9. When the system prompts, press Ctrl/Alt/Del.
10. In the Logon box enter the password imagenet (lower case). The WindowsNT desktop will display.
Restore PACS Link 9410 Configuration

If the application software you just installed is the same version as previously installed, you can use this procedure
to restore configuration settings from a configuration backup disk.
If the backup disk was made from a previous version of the application software, you may not be able to restore from
the backup disk because of database incompatibility between the old and new versions. If you can't use the backup
disk, you will have to re-enter all of the configuration settings (except video parameters) using SMT. Refer to the
configuration procedures for more information.
1. Locate the configuration backup diskette and insert it into drive A:
2. Start SMT.
4. Click Restore DB. The system will read in the configuration data from the diskette and when complete, displays
the message:
The backup system has been successfully restored
5. Click OK and remove the configuration backup diskette.
3–88 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Hardware Field Upgrade Procedures

The following options can be added to the PACS Link 9410 systems in the field:
• Video input board and related serial communications board
• Additional video input connection
• Digital input board
• Additional digital input connection
• FOPCIL fiber optic output board
• COPCIL copper output board
• Modem board
Warning
When the computer power cord is plugged in, hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the computer. These
voltages can cause severe injury or death.
Before removing the computer side cover, turn off the computer power and disconnect from the AC power source.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–89

Optional Input or Output Boards

The procedure for installing any PACS Link 9410 optional board includes the following steps:
1. Turn off the computer power switch located on the front of the computer, and disconnect the computer from the
AC power source.
2. Remove the computer side cover.
3. Pull out the expansion card cage.
Expansion
Card Cage
Cover Release
Button Release Lever 9410-27A
Figure 3–21 Side Cover and Expansion Card Cage
Note
Some Dell boxes have a slide bar on the back of the unit that must be moved before the cover release button works.
4. Locate an unused connector in the card cage for the board you are installing:
• If you are installing a PCI board, select any vacant PCI connector.
• If you are installing an ISA board, select any vacant ISA connector.
Slot 1 PCI 1
Slot 2 PCI 2
Slot 3 PCI 3
PCI 4
Slot 4
ISA1
PCI 5
Expansion Slot 5
Card Cage ISA2
Slot 6 ISA3
Slot 7 ISA4
r9410-30A
Figure 3–22 Expansion Board Connectors
3–90 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
5. Remove the slot cover adjacent to the selected card cage connector (Figure 3–23). Save the screw for later use.
Discard the slot cover.
Caution
Static electricity can damage sensitive components in the computer or on expansion boards. Always use a wrist strap
connected to an unpainted surface on the expansion chassis when installing or removing expansion boards. Avoid
touching components or connector pins on the expansion boards.
6. Remove the optional board from its anti-static package.

7. Insert the board-edge connector into the selected card cage connector. Gently rock the card into the connector
until it is seated.
Optional Board
Slot Cover
r9410-28A
Figure 3–23 Insert Optional Board
8. Secure the board to the card cage with the screw you removed previously.
9. Replace the card cage in the computer.
10. Replace the computer side cover.
11. Reconnect the computer to the AC power source (do not apply power yet).
8628588 - 2001 March 3–91

IMAGRAPHTM ISA Video Input Board

This procedure installs video input and serial communication boards, connects to a single video modality and uses
SMT to configure the video input.
Four types of user control can be used with a video modality:
• IMS Keypad Control • Host Control with a Destination Switching Keypad
• Host Control with an HPT Keypad • Host Control with No Keypad
The cabling is different for each type of user control. Before starting this procedure, you must know what type of user
control will be connected.
Tools/Parts:
• Monitor Kit: A Monitor Kit, rather than a Service PC is recommended for video setup.
• Before starting, refer to the video cabling diagrams for the components and cabling used for each of the user
control configurations.
Procedure
1. Set jumpers on the video board to the positions shown in Figure 3–24.
2. Set I/O Switch Selector switches on the RocketPort board as shown in figure.
SW1
RocketPort
Board
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
I/O Selector 1, 2 and 3 OFF
Switch 4 - 8 ON
ON
Figure 3–24 I/O Selector Switch Settings
3. Insert the video board into any vacant ISA connector in the card cage.
4. Insert the RocketPort serial port board into another vacant ISA connector.
5. Connect all of the cables. Connect the keypad or host control input(s) to ports on the RocketPort breakout box.
3–92 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
6. Install power cord on the UKEIB and connect to a 120-volt or 230-volt AC power source. If a destination
switching keypad is used, there will be two UKEIBs.
LED’s
D1 D2 D3 D4
J3
Green J7 J4
Red J8 J5
J9
J10
D1 D4 Pin 1
Pin 8
Coax
Connector
J2
J11
J12
J13
J14
J15
J16
ISA Bus
Connector
J17
J18
J19
J20
J21
J22
Note: J2 through J22 are jumper blocks.
1 2 3 1 2 3
Key:
Jumper Jumper Jumper Jumper

Present Not Across Across
Present Pins 1 and 2 Pins 2 and 3
9410-06L
Figure 3–25 Video Board Jumpers
7. Verify the four side RS232/RS422 switches on the RocketPort breakout box are in the 422 position as shown in
figure. Change if necessary.
Host
COM 5 0 COM 7
232 422 232 422
COM 6 COM 8
232 422 232 422
4-Port Breakout Box

r9410-53L
Slide Switch
Figure 3–26 RocketPort Breakout Box
8628588 - 2001 March 3–93

8. With power to the PACS Link 9410 computer off, connect a Monitor Kit.
9. Apply power to the computer and when the system prompts, press Ctrl/Alt/Del.
10. In the logon box, enter the password imagenet (lower case).
11. Double-click the SMT icon.
12. From the System Management tab, click Stop System to stop the application software. Wait for the hour glass
to disappear after about 30 seconds.
13. Perform the Configure Serial Ports procedure in this section. Configure the COM port connected to the keypad
and/or host control input. (Configure two ports if there is both a host control input and a destination switching
keypad.)
14. Perform the Video Input Configuration procedure in this section.
15. Perform the Video Fine Tuning procedure in this section for the channel you are configuring.
16. Configure the keypad or host control input you connected. (If a destination switching keypad is used, there will
be both a host control input and an IMS keypad.) Use the following procedures, located in this section:
a. Configuring IMS Keypad Control Inputs.
b. Configuring an HPT Keypad.
c. Configuring for No Keypad.
d. Configuring a Destination Switching Keypad.
17. From the System Management tab, click Start System.
18. Acquire and Print a test image using one of the following procedures in this section:
a. Test Local Printer.
b. Print Test Images on Network Printers.
19. Examine image quality and adjust video fine tuning values if necessary, then print another test image. You will
have to stop the application software to make fine tuning adjustments.
20. Quit SMT, power down the PACS Link 9410 system and disconnect the Monitor Kit.
21. Power up the PACS Link 9410 system.
3–94 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Additional Video Input Connection

This procedure connects an additional video modality to a PACS Link 9410 system with an existing IMAGRAPHTM
video input board. Use this procedure to install a RocketPort 4-port serial communication board, connect a video
modality and use SMT to configure the video input.
Four different types of user control can be used with a video modality:
Tools/Parts:
• Monitor Kit: A Monitor Kit, rather than a Service PC is recommended for video setup.
• Before starting, refer to the video cabling diagrams for the components and cabling used for each of the user
control configurations.
Procedure
1. Verify that the I/O Switch Selector switches on the RocketPort board are set as shown in Figure 3–24. Change if
necessary.
2. Plug the RocketPort serial port board into a vacant ISA connector.
3. To prevent AutoSYNCing a configured input channel, temporarily disconnect existing video image inputs to the
IMAGRAPH video input board.
4. Install power cord on the UKEIB and connect to a 120-volt or 230-volt AC power source. There will be two
UKEIBs if there is host control with an IMS keypad.
5. Connect all of the cables for the video input you are adding. Connect the keypad or host control input(s) to ports
on the RocketPort breakout box.
6. Verify that the positions of the four RS232/RS422 switches on the RocketPort breakout box are in the 422
position (Figure 3–26). Change if necessary.
7. Connect a monitor, keyboard and mouse to the PACS Link 9410 computer.
8. Power up the computer and when prompted, press Ctrl/Alt/Del.
9. In the logon box, enter the password imagenet (lower case).
12. Perform the Configure Serial Ports procedure in this section. Configure the COM port you connected to the
keypad and/or host control input. Configure two ports if there is both host control input and a destination
switching keypad.
13. Perform the Video Input Configuration procedure in this section.
14. Perform the Video Fine Tuning procedure in this section for the video channel you are configuring.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–95

15. Configure the keypad or host control input you have connected. If a destination switching keypad is used, there
will be both a host control input and an IMS Keypad. Use the following procedures located in this section:
• Configuring IMS Keypad Control Inputs.
• Configuring an HPT Keypad.
• Configuring for No Keypad.
• Configuring a Destination Switching Keypad.
Note
If an IMS keypad is used as a destination switching keypad, it must be set up before the host control input

17. Acquire and print a test image using one of the following procedures in this section:
• Test Local Printer
• Print Test Images on Network Printers.
18. Examine image quality and adjust video fine tuning values if necessary. Then print another test image. (You will
have to stop the application software to adjust fine tuning.)
19. Quit SMT and remove power from the PACS Link 9410 system.
20. Disconnect the Monitor Kit.
21. Reconnect the video image inputs you disconnected in Step 3.
22. Apply power to the PACS Link 9410 system.
23. Acquire and Print an image on each video input channel to make sure all channels are functional.
3–96 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Digital Input Board

This procedure installs a DPI-4 digital input board and companion DPC breakout box, connects to one digital
modality and uses SMT to configure the PACS Link 9410 system to capture images from the digital modality.
Four different types of user control can be used with a digital modality:
Tools/Parts
• Monitor Kit or a service PC with pcANYWHERETM installed.
• Refer to the digital cabling diagrams for the components and cabling used for each of the user control
configurations
Procedure
1. Set the rotary switch on the DPI-4 board to position 3 (the notch midway between positions 2 and 4).
2. Install the 32 MByte SIMM memory module (packaged separately) in location U30 (Figure 3–27).
Set Switch
to position 3.
R10 R9
R7 R8 Rotary Switch
SW 1
R4 R3
R6 R5
U30 Memory
U32 Memory
r9410-48L
Install 32MB SIMM here.
Figure 3–27 DPI-4 Board
3. Insert the DPI-4 board into any vacant PCI connector in the card cage.
4. Connect all of the cables as shown in Connect Cables section of this manual.
UKEIBs if there is a non-HPT host control connection.
6. Use a Monitor Kit or Service PC to access the PACS Link 9410 system. Refer to the connection procedures in
Section 6 of this manual.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–97

9. Perform the Digital Input Configuration procedure for the modality you just connected.
10. Configure the keypad or host control input you have connected using the following procedures (if a destination
switching keypad is used, there will be both a host control input and a destination switching keypad):
• Configuring IMS Keypads.
• Configuring Host Control Input with HPT Keypad.
• Configuring Host Control Input with No Keypad.
• Configuring Host Control Input with a Destination Switching Keypad.
12. Acquire and Print a test image from the digital modality using one of the following procedures:
• Test Local Laser Printer.
13. Examine image quality and make configuration adjustments if necessary. Then print another test image. (You
will have to stop the application software to adjust configuration settings.)
14. Quit SMT.
15. Disconnect the Monitor Kit or Service PC using the disconnect procedures in Section 6 of this manual.
3–98 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
Additional Digital Input Connection

This procedure connects an additional digital modality to a PACS Link 9410 system that contains a DPI-4 digital
input board and uses SMT to configure the PACS Link 9410 system to capture images from the digital modality. Four
types of user control can be used with a digital modality:
Tools/Parts
• Refer to the digital cabling diagrams for the components and cabling used for each of the user control
configurations
Procedure
1. Connect all of the cables as shown in Connect Cables section of this manual.
UKEIBs if there is host control with an IMS keypad.
3. Using a Monitor Kit or Service PC, access the PACS Link 9410 system. For connection procedures, refer to
Section 6 in this manual.
6. Perform the Digital Input Configuration procedure for the modality you just connected.
7. Configure the keypad or host control input you have connected using the following procedures (if a destination
switching keypad is used, there will be both a host control input and a destination switching keypad):
• Configuring IMS Keypads.
• Configuring Host Control Input with HPT Keypad.
• Configuring Host Control Input with No Keypad.
• Configuring Host Control Input with a Destination Switching Keypad.
9. Acquire and Print a test image from the digital modality using one of the following procedures:
• Test Local Laser Printer.
11. Disconnect the Monitor Kit or Service PC using the disconnect procedures in Section 6 of this manual.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–99

FOPCIL Fiber Optic Output Board

This procedure installs a FOPCIL fiber optic output board, connect the FOPCIL board to a local laser imager and
uses SMT to configure the PACS Link 9410 system to send images to the local laser imager.
Tools/Parts
• FOPCIL fiber optic output board
• Fiber optic cables (two)
Procedure
1. Insert the FOPCIL board into connector PCI 3 in the card cage. (The FOPCIL board will not function properly
in connectors PCI 1 or PCI 2.) Refer to Installing Optional Input or Output Boards in this section.
2. Connect fiber optic cables as shown in Figure 3–28.
• On 969 Laser Imager input modules, the control cables can be connected to either the COM 1 or COM 2 port.
• On the 8500/8700 Plus Laser Imager Fiber Interface Board, the image cables can be connected to
User port 0 or 1. The control cables can be connected to COM port 0 or 1.
B-Lead B-Lead
Image Image
Port A Image A Port
A-Lead A-Lead
A-Lead A-Lead
A Fiber Optic Cables A COM
COM
Port B Control Port 0 or 1
B
B-Lead B-Lead

PACS Link 9410 Fiber Interface Laser Imager or
Computer Board DryView 8800
Board
(Rear) Multi-input Manager
Note:
COM connectors.
Image connectors.
Figure 3–28 Fiber Optic Cables
3–100 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
3. Using a Monitor Kit or Service PC, access the PACS Link 9410 system. Refer to the connection procedures in
Section 6 of this manual.
5. From the System Management tab, click Stop System. This stops the PACS Link 9410 application software.
Wait for the hour glass to disappear after about 30 seconds.
6. Perform the Configure the PACS Link 9410 System for Local Printing procedure in this section.
8. Acquire and Print a test image from a modality using the procedure Test Local Printer.
10. Quit SMT.
11. Disconnect the Monitor Kit or Service PC. For disconnect procedures, refer to Section 6 in this manual.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–101

COPCIL Copper Output Board

This procedure installs a COPCIL copper output board, connects the COPCIL board to a local laser imager and uses
SMT to configure the PACS Link 9410 system to send images to the local laser imager.
Tools/Parts
• COPCIL copper output board
• Y cable.
• Extension cables, if the local laser imager will be located more than three meters away from the
PACS Link 9410 system.
• Gender changer for the control cable, if extension cables will be used.
Procedure
1. Insert the COPCIL board into connector PCI 3 in the card cage. (The FOPCIL board will not function properly
in connectors PCI 1 or PCI 2.) Refer to Installing Optional Input or Output Boards in this section.
2. Connect cables as shown in Figure 3–29. If extension cables have been supplied, refer to Figure 3–30 for details.
If the local printer is an DryView 8700/8500 Standard Laser Imager, you can connect the "Y" cable to either
image port and to either COM port.
37-Pin Connector

Port
Image
Control
RS422 COM
Port
Y Cable (3 Meters)
PACS Link 9410 74-0500-5864-8 Laser Imager with 9-Pin
Computer Copper Image and Connector
(Rear) COPCIL COM Ports
Output Board
Note:
COM connectors.
Image connectors.
9410-62L
Figure 3–29 Fiber Optic Cables
3–102 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
60 Meters Max
Y Cable Image Cable
To COPCIL To Laser
Board Imager
Control (RS422) Cable
9-Pin Connector Gender Changer

(26-1011-8279-3)
Cable Lengths
Length Part Number Length Part Number
Image 3m 78-8075-4697-6 RS422 3m 78-8075-2602-1
10m 78-8053-4134-0 10m 78-8063-3964-0
30m 78-8053-4135-7 30m 78-8063-3965-7
60m 78-8053-4139-9 60m 78-8063-3966-5
9410-63L
Figure 3–30 COPCIL Extension Cables
3. Using a Monitor Kit or Service PC, access the PACS Link 9410 system. For connection procedures, refer to
Section 6.
5. From the System Management tab, click Stop System. This stops the application software. Wait for the hour
glass to disappear after about 30 seconds.
6. Perform the procedure Configure the PACS Link 9410 System for Local Printing.
8. Acquire and Print a test image from a modality using the procedure Test Local Printer in this section.
10. Quit SMT.
11. Disconnect the Monitor Kit or Service PC. For disconnect procedures refer to Section 6 in this manual.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–103

Modem Board
This procedure installs a modem board in the PACS Link 9410 system.
Parts
• US RoboticsTM SportsterTM modem
• Telephone drop cable (a 6-foot drop cable is supplied with the modem)
• Analog telephone line for the modem. The modem is not compatible with a digital line.
Procedure
1. Check jumper settings on the modem board.
There are two sets of jumper pins, labeled COM and IRQ, on the modem board (Figure 3–31). Verify that none
of these jumper pins are shorted with jumper shunts. All jumper shunts present should be hanging from single
jumper pins, not shorted across pairs of pins.
2. Insert the modem board into any vacant ISA connector in the card cage.
Jumper Pins
Figure 3–31 Modem Jumper Pins
3–104 2001 March - 8628588

Installation
3. Connect the modem to a telephone line as shown in Figure 3–32.
Caution
The telephone line for the modem must be an analog line. Connection to a digital line may damage the modem board.
PACS Link 9410

Computer
(rear)
Telephone
Drop Cable
Telephone
Line Jack
Do not connect TELCO (analog line)
to PHONE Jack Jack
Modem
Board
r9410-13L
Figure 3–32 Modem/Phone Line Connection
4. Apply power to the computer, then press Ctrl/Alt/Del.

5. In the Logon box enter the password imagenet (lower case).
6. Enable the pcANYWHERETM modem service.
a. Select Start -> Programs -> pcANYWHERE.
b. In the pcANYWHERE task bar, select Be a Host PC. The Network icon should be highlighted.
c. Double-click the Netlink icon.
d. Click Yes when the message Stop the service? displays. This disables Network service and activates the
Netlink service (Netlink includes both modem and network services). The pcANYWHERE window will
close automatically.
e. Click the pcANY button in the task bar to verify that the Netlink service has been activated.
f. Verify that TCP/IP Host Service and Modem Service appear in the window, then reduce the window.
Click Here to Reduce

This Window.
Modem Service
Do Not Click Here.

This Will Disable The
Nelink Service.
8628588 - 2001 March 3–105

Y-Cable
1. Remove power from the PACS Link 9410 system.
2. Disconnect the digital input cables connected to the DPC.
3. Disconnect the DPI-4-to-DPC cable.
4. Connect the Y-cable to DPI-4 and digital inputs.
5. Restart the PACS Link 9410 system.
6. Acquire and print from the digital modality to ensure print functionality.
3–106 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
Section 4: Troubleshooting
Introduction
This section provides information to help you isolate and correct malfunctions in Kodak PACS Link 9410 systems
(PACS Link 9410 system).
Service Programs
Two database utility programs are useful for troubleshooting and database maintenance.
• DBClean: clear all jobs waiting in the print queue of the PACS Link 9410 system.
• DBEmpty: clears the configuration database.
DBClean
This procedure clears print jobs temporarily stored in the PACS Link 9410 system. Use this procedure to remove
corrupted print jobs or print jobs destined for an unavailable printer. These jobs should be deleted because they
decrease the disk space available for queueing print jobs in the PACS Link 9410 system.
1. Start SMT.
2. From the SMT System Management tab, click Stop System to stop the application software.
3. Close SMT (click the close button in the upper right corner of the SMT window).
4. Select Start -> Programs -> WindowsNTTM Explorer.
5. Select drive D and locate the directory NGNI/BIN.
6. Double-click DBClean.exe. This clears all jobs waiting in the print queue.
7. Restart the PACS Link 9410 application software.
DBEmpty
The following procedure clears the configuration database. Clear the configuration database if:
• There are major changes in the PACS Link 9410 configuration.
• You suspect the configuration database is corrupted and a valid backup disk is not available.
1. Start SMT.
2. From the SMT System Management tab, click Stop System to stop the PACS Link 9410 application software.
3. Click the close button in the upper right corner of the SMT window to close SMT.
4. Select Start -> Programs -> Windows NT Explorer.
5. Select drive D and locate the directory NGNI\BIN.
6. Double-click DBEmpty.exe. This erases the configuration database but does not affect network parameters.
7. Close WindowsNTTM Explorer. You must re-enter all configuration parameters to make the PACS Link 9410
system operational. (Refer to Section 3 for configuration procedures.)
8628588 - 2001 March 4–1

Troubleshooting Matrix
To identify and correct a problem, begin with the tables for Troubleshooting Matrix and Keypad Error Messages.
You may also have to refer to one or more of the logs, maintained by the system, to identify a problem. The
Troubleshooting Matrix may point you to the appropriate log. Refer to the Logs section of this chapter for information
on the various logs.
4–2 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
Table 4–1 Troubleshooting Matrix

Problem Possible Cause Action
Won’t Print Wrong or no destination selected Verify that appropriate destination is selected on keypad,
on keypad. and that its status indicates "ready".
PACS Link 9410 system may not Check that PACS Link 9410 power LED is on.
be powered on.
PACS Link 9410 application Verify that application software is running:
software may not be running. • Indicated by amber LED’s on SMT system screen.
• Task bar indicates software status for applicable
modules.
Is there communication with the • From the SMT “Diagnostic” tab, monitor laser imager
laser imager? communication for the appropriate “jobspooler.”
• Verify cable connection.
• Via “Diagnostic" tab, review the “Event Viewer" log
for possible FOPCIL or COPCIL problems.
Is there communication with the • From the SMT “Diagnostic" tab, monitor modality
modality? communication for the appropriate input:
- DPI-4 serial (host or keypad) - Check SERIALCOMM log
- COM (3,4,5,6,7 or 8) - Check SERIALCOMM log.
- DISOL - Check DISOL log,
• Check UKEIB TX/RX LED's. Blinking indicates
communication activity.
Is the PACS Link 9410 From the SMT “Diagnostic" tab, monitor communication
processing input communication processing for the appropriate input:
appropriately? • Check 952PARSER log
• Check SUPERSET log
Is the “image” data being From the SMT “Diagnostic" tab, monitor communication
received properly? processing for the appropriate input:
• Check DPI-4 log
• Check IMAGRAPH log
Is problem intermittent? From the SMT “Diagnostic” tab, search for previous
problems via the appropriate trace log.
Is the PACS Link 9410 “locked Stop and then start application software via the “System
up?” Management" tab.
Image data parameters of the Match the data bit depth between the PACS Link 9410 and
PACS Link 9410 (local laser) do the laser imager.
not match that of the laser Match the “header" format (line or frame) between the
imager. PACS Link 9410 system and the laser Imager.
Acquire time-out (K68) errors: • Check image cable connection up to and including
• Image cable connection is connection to DPC.
not correct. • Verify that the “REQ" and “DATA" LED's on the
• Image data is not being DPC are lighting when image is being acquired.
provided by modality. • Using an analyzer or a Break Out Box, verify that data
• DPI-4 parameters in SMT is being presented to the DPC during an Acquire
are configured incorrectly. operation.
• DPC or DPI-4 is defective. • Via SMT, increase image time-out value in DPI-4
• Modality is not presenting configuration.
image data correctly. • Replace DPC Break Out Box.
Acquire (65) errors for a digital Verify that DPI-4 memory SIMM is plugged into the U30
connection slot and not the U32 slot.
The FOPCIL card may be Verify that the FOPCIL card is not inserted into either of
inserted in an incorrect PCI slot. the two (2) PCI slots closest to the motherboard.
8628588 - 2001 March 4–3


Performance is slow KS Link 9410 busy? Monitor a job to verify print time. Print time is image size-
dependent. If unacceptable, re-evaluate the site
configuration.
Is network busy? Perform a “ping" test and note the time of the echo. If
longer than 2 seconds, contact site network administrator
regarding network overload.
“Status,60,alarm" is The PACS Link 9410 system Stop the PACS Link 9410 application software.
reported from the may have been started and Start the PACS Link 9410 application software.
PACS Link 9410 requests to acquire and print • Select the appropriate laser imager via the destination
system to a host images made by the host keypad, and verify that the status window indicates
modality via the host modality before a destination “Ready" (this last step must be done before any
serial connection. path was established. requests to acquire and print images are made).
“Blue Screen” (with Does the following apply? • Via SMT, change the “local laser" communication
Monitor Kit only.) The PACS Link 9410 system is a baud rate from19200bps to 4800bps.
G1 platform and is running • Via MPC, change the laser imager communication
version 1.0 software parameter to 4800bps.
and
The PACS Link 9410 “local

laser imager" connection is to a
DryView 8800/8700 Laser
Imager.
Dialog boxes appear Corrupted database. Stop and restart the PACS Link 9410 application software.
when monitoring or
PACS Link 9410 Stop PACS Link 9410 application software via SMT,
system, referencing close SMT utility, and perform a "DBEmpty" routine. This
“database" problems. will clear all system configuration parameters plus any
stored images. Locate this utility via WindowsNT
Explorer in the D:\NGNI\bin folder. Double-click on the
icon to run.
or
Re-ghost the PACS Link 9410 system and reload

application software.
After performing "DBEmpty" or re-ghosting, restore

configuration from a backup floppy or manually re-enter
the configuration parameters if a backup floppy is not
available
Digital modality Bad DPC box. If error light on DPC is lit, replace DPC.
input not working.
Connecting to GE via GE set to bilinear. Have GE change to cubic.
DICOM
System backup takes Too many stored images in Perform a DBClean, then do a backup.
a long time. system.
Images print about 2 Modality is set to Magnification Set modality to Magnification = Yes.
inches square on = None.
8300 laser imager.
Image has black lines FOPCIL board may have failed. Replace FOPCIL board.
in it.
The 9410 system will May have a bad power supply. Replace power supply
not turn off.
4–4 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting

PACS Link 9410 May have a bad power supply. Replace power supply.
system will not boot
12-bit images May have a bad COPCIL board. Replace COPCIL board.
dropping data/pixels.
8628588 - 2001 March 4–5

Keypad Error Messages

Message
Number Keypad Message Corrective Action
-- Automatic image quality control active. Informational message; no action needed.
-- Automatic image quality control OFF. Refer to the Operator’s Guide for the imager, message
P632.
-- Laser Imager X Status: Ready. Informational message; no action needed.
-- Laser Imager X Status: Busy.
K1 The laser imager is not communicating. Turn the imager off and back on.
K3 The laser imager is not receiving commands Turn the imager off and back on.
correctly.
K4 The laser imager is not transmitting Turn the imager off and back on.
responses correctly.
K9 Communication error. Turn the imager off and back on.
K17 The processor is not available. Change the Self-explanatory.
“Output" setting on the Imager Menu.
K36 Print queue full. Please wait. Self-explanatory.
K58 The images are too large for the format. Select a format with fewer images.
K59 Image signal error. Try acquiring again. Self-explanatory.
K60 Perform DBClean.
K64
Self-explanatory.
K65 Image acquire failed. Try acquiring again. Self-explanatory.
K66
K68
K72 Memory error. Try acquiring again. Self-explanatory.
K73 Memory error during printing. Refer to the panel on the imager.
K85 Image memory is full. Wait for some images to be printed. This frees some
image memory and allows more images to be acquired.
The percentage of free memory is listed on the Main
Menu.
K177 Images must be printed or erased before the Self-explanatory.
format can be changed.
K178 Print jobs stopped. A calibration print must Self-explanatory.
be performed for these jobs to complete.
K179 The Frame feature is not available on the Informational message; no action needed.
selected imager.
K180 The Rotation feature is not available on the Informational message; no action needed.
selected imager.
K183 The keypad has a stuck key or the foot Check for objects laying on the keypad or foot switch.
switch is stuck.
K184 The touch screen is disconnected or Call for service.
damaged.
K185 Print jobs stopped. Load the correct media Self-explanatory
type.
4–6 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
Message
K186 Image contrast has been preset by custom Informational message. If an image processing
format. parameter has been preset as part of a custom format by
K187 Image polarity has been preset by custom your administrator, that parameter setting cannot be
format. changed at the keypad.
K188 Image processing has been preset by custom
format.
K189 Image framing has been preset by custom
format.
-- No destination selected. Select destination via the Imager Menu.
K190 Changing the contrast and/or density will Informational message displayed to discourage
affect image quality. unnecessary changes to the contrast and density
settings.
K191 Move image to an unacquired image Informational message displayed when the Move
location. To Cancel: Press any acquired function is enabled.
image.
K192 Internal keypad error. Reset contrast and Self-explanatory.
density settings.
K193 An image must be acquired before selecting Self-explanatory.
contrast test.
K194 Image aspect ratio changed. Informational message. Indicates that the aspect ratio of
an image was changed when the image was reduced to
fit the selected format.
K195 Format select failed. Try again. Self-explanatory.
K198 Queuing print. Please wait. Self-explanatory.
K199 Setting up format. Please wait. Informational message; no action needed.
K200 Laser imager 1 self test in progress. Informational message; no action needed.
K202 Laser imager x is not operational. Refer to the panel on the imager.
K203 The local panel is bad on laser imager x. Call for service.
K204 The media is low on laser imager x. Self-explanatory.
K206 Load the correct media type. The loaded media does not match the media size
selected from the Media Size menu. Load the correct
size media.
K209 Problem with supply cartridge on laser Refer to the panel on the imager.
imager x.
K210 Printer error. Check local panel on laser Refer to the panel on the imager.
imager x.
K211 Media is jammed in laser imager x. Check Refer to the panel on the imager.
local panel.
K215 A cover is open on laser imager x. Refer to the panel on the imager.
K216 The receive magazine is missing on laser Install an empty receive magazine in the laser imager.
imager x.
K217 Empty the receive magazine on laser imager Self-explanatory.
x.
K218 Supply cartridge is empty on laser imager x. Load a non-empty supply cartridge.
K221 Processor x is not functional. Refer to the panel on the imager.
K222 Processor x is not ready. Minutes to ready: Informational message; no action needed.
TTT.
8628588 - 2001 March 4–7

Message
K227 Media is jammed in processor x. Please Remove the jammed piece of media from the imager
remove the media. following the instructions in the Operator’s Manual for
the imager.
K228 A chemistry tank on processor x is low. Informational message; no action needed.
K229 A chemistry tank on processor x is empty. Fill the tank following the instructions in the Operator’s
Manual for the imager.
K230 System operating near calibration limits. Check the system processor chemistry. If the chemistry
Check chemistry. is OK, try using a new supply cartridge.
K231 Processor warning. Check local panel on Refer to panel on imager.
laser imager x.
4–8 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
Application Programs
Use the following matrix when troubleshooting a PACS Link 9410 system to determine which subprograms should
be running based on system configuration. Actively running programs are displayed in the task bar at the bottom of
the monitor screen.
Video Host Video Digital Host Digital

DICOM In Control In Keypad In Control In Keypad In
SUPERVISOR X X X X X
DBSERVICE X X X X X
DISOL X
IMAGRAPH X X
DPI4IMAGE X X
DPI4SERIAL X X
PARSER952 X X
SUPERSET X X
SERIALCOMM X X
JOBSPOOLER X X X X X
Each of these subprograms generates a log that are useful for troubleshooting. Some of these logs are described in
the Logs section.
8628588 - 2001 March 4–9

Logs
The PACS Link 9410 system maintains logs that record the communications between the PACS Link 9410 system
and the various external devices. These logs are the main troubleshooting tools for identifying problems in PACS
Link 9410 systems.
• JOBSPOOLER (Output Log)
• PARSER952 (Input Log)
• SUPERSET (Input Log)
• SERIALCOMM (Input Log)
• IMAGRAPH (Image Acquisition Log)
• DPI4IMAGE (Image Acquisition Log)
• DPI4SERIAL (input log)
• DISOL (Input Log)
Each of the these logs applies to a different communication path. Figure 4-1, Figure 4-2 and Figure 4-3 show how
the logs relate to the various paths in the system.
The appropriate logs are created when the PACS Link 9410 system is configured. The maximum size of each log is
4 megabytes. When a log reaches the 4 megabyte limit, the log is automatically given an extension of old and a new
log is started.
4–10 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
DPC Breakout Box
Local Laser Imager

Digital
Modality
Serial
Port
Image
Out
Host
Control DPI4IMAGE
Out (Image
Acquisition
Log)
IMS Keypad JOBSPOOLER

(Output Log)
- 952 (copper)
- Superset
(fiber)
2-Port
Serial
Connection
UKEIB Computer
Network
HOST
FIBER OPTIC
..... Connection
FTSW
XMT ....
IMAGER
A-CH B-CH
.....
.... ..........
.........
........
RCV KEYPAD
Parser 952
Serial Connection
DPI4 Serial (Input Log)
Network To
DICOM Network
Modality Printers
DISOL (Input Log) JOBSPOOLER (Output Log) 9410-69L
(DICOM)
Figure 4–1
8628588 - 2001 March 4–11

Laser Imager
IMAGRAPH
(Image Acquisition Log)
Video
Modality
JOBSPOOLER
(Output Log)
- 952 (copper)
- SUPERSET
IMS Keypad (fiber)
Computer
UKEIB
FIBER OPTIC HOST
..... SUPERSET
FTSW
XMT .... Network
(Input Log)
IMAGER KEYPAD Connection
A-CH B-CH
.....
.... ..........
.........
........ SERIALCOM
RCV (Input Log)
DICOM Network To
Modality 9410-70L
Network
Printers
DISOL (Input Log) JOBSPOOLER (Output Log)

(DICOM)
Figure 4–2
4–12 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
IMAGRAPH (Image
Acquisition Log)
Video
Modality
IMS Keypad
Video
Board
Laser Imager
UKEIB
FIBER OPTIC HOST
XMT .....
....
FTSW
IMAGER KEYPAD
A-CH B-CH
.....
.... ..........
.........
........
RCV
JOBSPOOLER
(Output Log)
- S 952 (copper)
- S SuperSet
(fiber)
SERIALCOMM
(Input log) SUPERSET
(Input Log)
RocketPort
COM Board
COM 5 COM 7
Computer
COM 6 COM 8
RocketPort 4-Port
Breakout Box
Network
Connection
Network To
DICOM Network
Modality Printers
DISOL (Input Log) JOBSPOOLER(Output Log)
9410-90L
(DICOM)
Figure 4–3
8628588 - 2001 March 4–13

Viewing Logs
You can use SMT to view the logs. From the Diagnostic tab, select Trace Logs. A list of logs will be displayed.
Double-click on the name of the log you want to view.
There will be more than one copy of some types of logs. For example, if there is more than one output device there
will be a JOBSPOOLER log for each output device.
A segment from one of the logs is shown below. Note that each entry is preceded by a time stamp. The date is inserted
periodically throughout the log.
15:44:43.395 To ccpacket: "RQS"
15:44:43.726 Ack received
***** Tue Jul 06 *****
15:44:43.736 LIT::Get Response:STA,1,RDY
15:44:43.736 LIT::Send Command:ALI
15:44:43.736 To ccpacket: "ALI"
15:44:44.046 LIT::Get Response:PAS
15:44:44.046 LIT::Send Command:MSZ
15:44:44.046 To ccpacket: "MSZ"
Logs are displayed in the MicrosoftTM WordPad word processor accessory. WordPad contains a “Find” feature that
can be used to search logs for command codes or error codes.
When using the logs for troubleshooting, you should have the Kodak Service Collection CD-ROM available. Some
of the logs contain SUPERSET commands or 831/952 commands. To interpret error responses in these logs, you may
need to refer to the SUPERSET or 831/952 Command Set Specifications on the CD-ROM.
In WordPad the key combination Ctrl/Home moves the cursor to the beginning of the log. Ctrl/End moves to the
last line.
4–14 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
Cutting and Pasting a Log

1. Determine time that error occurred.
2. From SMT, select Diagnostics and then Trace Logs.
3. Select and highlight the log you want and click OK.
4. Scroll through the log to the approximate time the error occurred.
5. Click and drag to highlight a section of log that corresponds to the timeframe when the error occurred.
6. Select File -> Save As from the Menu bar.
7. Enter a descriptive name and navigate to the folder (or floppy disk) where you want the log saved.
8. Click Save.
9. Attach this file to an email and send to your Service Representative.
8628588 - 2001 March 4–15

Using Logs to Troubleshoot

Use the following general approach to isolating problems using the logs:
1. Determine the approximate time the problem occurred.
2. From a description of the problem, display the log that will most likely contain information about the problem.
The troubleshooting matrix may help identify the most likely log. You may have to examine more than one log
to find information about the problem.
3. In the selected log, find the approximate time the problem occurred.
4. Search the log for error codes or other error indications:
• Error indications should help you determine the cause of the problem.
• Error indications are different for each type of log. (Refer to the following log descriptions for an explanation
of the error indications.)
• If the log contains SUPERSET or 831/952 commands, refer to the SUPERSET or 831/952 Command Set
Specifications on the Kodak Service Collection CD-ROM for help in interpreting error responses.
• Documents on the CD-ROM are displayed in AdobeTM AcrobatTM Reader. Use the Find feature to search
for error codes.
Log Examples
The following are log examples from the PACS Link 9410 system.
JOBSPOOLER (Output Log)

The PACS Link 9410 system keeps a JOBSPOOLER log for each connected output device (printer or print server).
Possible output devices are:
• Fiber-connected local printer
• Copper-connected local printer
• Network-connected (DICOM) printer or print server
Each Jobspooler log lists the PACS Link 9410 system commands sent to the output device and the responses returned
from the output. The command types in a JOBSPOOLER log depend on the type of output device:
• Fiber-connected local printer: JOBSPOOLER log contains SUPERSET commands.
• Copper-connected local printer: JOBSPOOLER log contains 952 commands.
• Network printer: JOBSPOOLER log contains DICOM commands.
4–16 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
JOBSPOOLER (SUPERSET Commands)

The PACS Link 9410 system controls a fiber-connected local printer by sending SUPERSET commands to the
printer. A typical SUPERSET command consists of a command field followed by one or more parameters. For
example, the following command directs a printer to store an image sent from the PACS Link 9410 system:
Sto Img= {ID} [{Mode}] [Size={x}, {y}][Depth={Z}][AcqTO={T}]
• Command Field: Sto Img (Store Image)
• Parameters: {ID} - A specific image ID
[{Mode}] - Optional, for color printers only. Not applicable to PACS Link 9410 systems.
[Size={x}, {y}] - Optional, the image size in columns and rows.
[Depth={Z}] - Optional, number of bits per pixel (range 8 to 12).
[AcqTO={T}] - Optional, the time out interval for storing this image.
Note
Parameters enclosed in square brackets are optional. The only required parameter in the command string is the image
ID.
Each command requires a response from the target printer. The PACS Link 9410 system will not send another
command before it receives a response to the previous command. The following examples are possible responses to
a Sto Img command.
Sto Y Size=1024,512 Store operation successful, size stored 1024 x 512.
Sto N MemFull Store operation failed, Image too large for the available memory.
A response always begins with the first part of the command field from the command (Sto, for example), followed
by the parameter Y or N. One or more additional parameters (such as Size=1024,512 in the example) may follow.
"Y" indicates that the command was successfully completed. "N" indicates the output device could not perform the
command. Additional parameters usually follow the "N" to indicate why the command could not be executed.
The most common method of using this log for troubleshooting is to search for "N" responses. The parameters that
accompany an "N" code often indicate the cause of a malfunction.
For a detailed explanation of each command and the possible responses, refer to the IMS SUPERSET Command Set
specification on the Kodak Service Collection CD-ROM.
8628588 - 2001 March 4–17

SUPERSET Command Sequence

Table 4–2 shows a typical sequence of SUPERSET commands and responses extracted from a jobspooler log. This
command sequence sends an image to a local printer. Note that each command issued by the PACS Link 9410 system
must be answered by a response from the local printer. The actual log that generated this command sequence follows
the table.
Table 4–2 JOBSPOOLER/SUPERSET Command Sequence

Command
Response Description
Sta PR=1 Get Status of printer.
Sta Y LT 7 Media=BWDryB, E14x17 Printer responds with status yes. It also states that it has 7 pieces
Media Low of Dry Blue 14x17 film and a warning that the media is low.
Sta FP=1 Get Status of film processor.
Sta Y Ready LT Status of film processor is Yes (ready).

Sta IMS Get Status of IMS
Sta Y Status of IMS is Yes (ready).

Sta PR=1 Get Status of printer (again).
Sta Y LT 7 Media=BWDryB, E14x17 Printer responds with status yes. It also states that it has 7 pieces of
Media Low Dry Blue 14x17 film and a warning that the media is low.
Del Fmt 99 Box=All Deletes all previous formats and boxes.
Del N BadVal=Fmt,99 Laser imager is responding that it does not have any jobs to delete.
Del Fmt=99 Deletes all previous formats.
Delete N BadVal=Fmt,9 Laser imager responds that it does not have any current formats to
delete.
Del Def Img=All Deferred delete command means that when images are no longer
being used they can be automatically deleted from the printer
memory.
Del Y The delete command functioned correctly.

Set Density=5 Size=0.0 Set Variables.
Set Y The density and size settings passed.

Fmt ID=99 Dmax=210 Media=DWGen, E14x17 Define a format.
Fmt Y Format command was accepted.

The following entries establish an image box.
LIImage Box::Print() Image ID=7
LIImage Box:: sendImageInfo
ImageInfo: size=480x640 polarity=1 smooth=2 contrast=14
Aspect=1:1 reqImageSize=-1 bitsAlloc=8 bitsUsed=8 lutTBL=1
Trim=0 rotate=0 mirror=0
Box ID=1 Fmt=99 Loc=132, 1185 Define a format.
Size=4096,3072 Beta=2,2 Rot=No Con=14
Fram=No
Box Y The Box settings were accepted.
Res Imgs=1,640,480 Reserves appropriate memory for image 1.
Res Y Memory reserve accepted.
4–18 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
Command
Sto Img=1 Depth=12 Directs printer to store an image with pixel depth of 12 bits per
pixel.
LlImageBox: : Send Image Data
Sto Y Size 640,480 Image data is transmitted.
Sto Test=2 Dpatch Store single density patch image.
Sto Y 10,4 Density patch was stored.

Pri Fmt=99 Img=1 Cps=1 Dens=2 Dest=Fp1 Print command - directs printer to place aprint in the print queue.
Pri Y Job=2 Print command functioned correctly.

Del Def Img=2,1 Image delete is requested.
Del Y The image for Job 2 was deleted.

Del Def=99 Box=All Image box delete is requested.
Del Y Image Box was deleted.

Del Fmt=99 Format delete is requested.
Del Y Format was deleted.

Sta Job=2 Job 2 status is requested.
Sta Y Pri Print=0,0,1 Proc=0,0,1 Printer is ready for next job.

Wait
8628588 - 2001 March 4–19

JOBSPOOLER/SUPERSET Log
The JOBSPOOLER log for the SUPERSET command sequence in Table 4–2 is shown below. Note that the log
contains many entries in addition to the SUPERSET commands. In most cases it is only the SUPERSET commands
and responses that are useful for troubleshooting.
You can identify the commands sent from the PACS Link 9410 system by the prefix "Send Command." In the sample
log below, "Send Command" is underlined and the actual SUPERSET commands are shown in bold type.
You can also find the responses to commands by looking for the prefix "Get Response." Throughout the sample log
below, "Get Response" is underlined.
When you view the log on the PACS Link 9410 system, it is displayed in WordPad. Use the Find feature to locate
each occurrence of "Send Command" or "Get Response".
***** Tue Jul 06 *****
08:37:12.953 LaserImagerIntf::GetStatus()
08:37:12.953 lit_open()
08:37:12.973 LIT::Send Command:Sta Pr=1
08:37:12.973 To ccpacket: "Sta Pr=1"
08:37:12.973 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "_Sta Pr=10e0d"
08:37:12.983 Clearing Ack/Nack flags
08:37:13.013 SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet "Sta Y LT 7 Media=BWDryB,E14x17 MediaLow2D5D"
08:37:13.013 LIT::Get Response:Sta Y LT 7 Media=BWDryB,E14x17 MediaLow
08:37:13.013 LIT::Send Command:Sta FP=1
08:37:13.013 To ccpacket: "Sta FP=1"
08:37:13.013 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "_Sta FP=10ee1"
08:37:13.043 SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet "Sta Y Ready LT14DB"
08:37:13.043 LIT::Get Response:Sta Y Ready LT
08:37:13.043 LIT::Send Command:Sta IMS
08:37:13.043 To ccpacket: "Sta IMS"
08:37:13.043 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "_Sta IMS0dc5"
08:37:13.063 SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet "Sta Y0B13"
08:37:13.073 LIT::Get Response:Sta Y
08:37:13.073 lit_close()
08:37:13.073 Dim:Stop().
08:37:13.073 SMessage::close().
***** Tue Jul 06 *****
08:37:13.073 SMessage::~SMessage().
08:37:13.073 Dim:DeleteDataConnection().
08:37:27.954 Timer times out!
08:37:27.954 Thread 0xA1 sets event
08:37:30.488 DBIntf::GetJob(Job*)
08:37:30.588 DBIntf::GetImage(Image*)
08:37:30.628 DBIntf::GetEquipment(401)
08:37:30.648 DBIntf::GetEquipment(Equipment*)
08:37:30.828 LaserImagerIntf::Validate() job=4)
08:37:30.828 LIPrintJob::Validate() job=4
08:37:30.828 Job=4:Incorrect film type, default = 1 is used
08:37:30.828 Job=4:Incorrect priority, default = 1 is used
08:37:30.828 LIFilmBox::Validate() FilmBox=4
08:37:30.828 LIImageBox::Validate() ImageBoxID = 4, ImageID = 7
08:37:30.828 IMapper. Input and Output interpolation are same type.
08:37:30.838 IMapper. Input and Output interpolation are same type.
08:37:30.838 ImageBox=4:Incorrect Byte Order, default=1 is used
08:37:30.838 DBIntf::UpdateJobStatus()
08:37:30.879 Job:4 is added into priority queue
08:37:30.879 Thread 0x72 sets event
08:37:30.879 Thread 0xBB got event
08:37:30.879 PriorityQueue::GetJob()
08:37:30.879 Job:4 is removed from PriorityQueue
08:37:30.879 Dispatcher: 0xBB dispatches job: 4
***** Tue Jul 06 *****
08:37:30.879 Job: 4 status changed to 0x2(status), 0x0(info).
08:37:30.929 DBIntf::UpdateSheetsInfo()
4–20 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting

08:37:30.959 LaserImagerIntf::Dispatch() job=4)
08:37:30.969 lit_open()
08:37:30.989 LIT::Send Command:Sta Pr=1
08:37:30.989 To ccpacket: "Sta Pr=1"
08:37:30.989 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "_Sta Pr=10e0d"
08:37:31.029 SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet "Sta Y LT 7 Media=BWDryB,E14x17 MediaLow2D5D"
08:37:31.029 LIT::Get Response:Sta Y LT 7 Media=BWDryB,E14x17 MediaLow
08:37:31.029 LIPrintJob::Print(), Job ID =4.
08:37:31.029 LIFilmBox::Print(1).
08:37:31.029 pageInfo: format=-1, numImages=1, border=0, dmax=210, copies=1
08:37:31.029 orientation=1 annotation=2
08:37:31.029 dest=4
08:37:31.029 LIT::Send Command:Del Fmt=99 Box=All
08:37:31.029 To ccpacket: "Del Fmt=99 Box=All"
08:37:31.029 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "_Del Fmt=99 Box=All1813"
08:37:31.069 SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet "Del N BadVal=Fmt,991939"
08:37:31.069 LIT::Get Response:Del N BadVal=Fmt,99
08:37:31.069 LIT::Send Command:Del Fmt=99
***** Tue Jul 06 *****
08:37:31.069 To ccpacket: "Del Fmt=99"
08:37:31.069 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "_Del Fmt=99106c"
08:37:31.109 SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet "Del N BadVal=Fmt,991939"
08:37:31.109 LIT::Get Response:Del N BadVal=Fmt,99
08:37:31.109 LIT::Send Command:Del Def Img=All
08:37:31.109 To ccpacket: "Del Def Img=All"
08:37:31.109 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "_Del Def Img=All153d"
08:37:31.129 SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet "Del Y0B00"
08:37:31.139 LIT::Get Response:Del Y
08:37:31.139 LIT::Send Command:Set Density=5 Size=0,0
08:37:31.139 To ccpacket: "Set Density=5 Size=0,0"
08:37:31.139 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "_Set Density=5 Size=0,01cb6"
08:37:31.670 SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet "Set Y0B17"
08:37:31.670 LIT::Get Response:Set Y
08:37:31.670 LIT::Send Command:Fmt Id=99 DMax=210 Media=BWGen,E14X17
08:37:31.670 To ccpacket: "Fmt Id=99 DMax=210 Media=BWGen,E14X17"
08:37:31.670 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "_Fmt Id=99 DMax=210 Media=BWGen,E14X172b17"
08:37:31.740 SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet "Fmt Y0B12"
***** Tue Jul 06 *****
08:37:31.750 LIT::Get Response:Fmt Y
08:37:31.750 LIImageBox::Print(), Image ID = 7
08:37:31.750 LIImageBox::sendImageInfo()
08:37:31.750 imageInfo: size=[480x640] polarity=1, smooth=2 contrast=14
08:37:31.750 aspect=[1:1] reqImageSize=-1 bitsAlloc=8 bitsUsed=8 lutTbl=1
08:37:31.750 trim=0 rotate=0 mirror=0
08:37:31.750 LIT::Send Command:Box Id=1 Fmt=99 Loc=132,1185 Size=4096,3072 Beta=2,2 Rot=No
Con=14 Fram=No
08:37:31.750 To ccpacket: "Box Id=1 Fmt=99 Loc=132,1185 Size=4096,3072 Beta=2,2 Rot=No Con=14
Fram=No"
08:37:31.750 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "_Box Id=1 Fmt=99 Loc=132,1185 Size=4096,3072
Beta=2,2 Rot=No Con=14 Fram=No50c8"
08:37:31.910 SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet "Box Y0B14"
08:37:31.910 LIT::Get Response:Box Y
08:37:31.910 LIT::Send Command:Res Imgs=1,640,480
08:37:31.910 To ccpacket: "Res Imgs=1,640,480"
08:37:31.910 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "_Res Imgs=1,640,480183f"
08:37:31.940 SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet "Res Y0B15"
08:37:31.940 LIT::Get Response:Res Y
08:37:31.940 LIT::Send Command:Sto Img=1 Depth=12
08:37:31.940 To ccpacket: "Sto Img=1 Depth=12"
08:37:31.940 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "_Sto Img=1 Depth=1218ff"
8628588 - 2001 March 4–21


08:37:31.960 LIImageBox::sendImageInfo() retruns: 0
***** Tue Jul 06 *****
08:37:31.960 LIImageBox::sendImageData()
08:37:31.980 PERFCOUNTER: CFile.Read time 0.007071 seconds
08:37:32.461 SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet "Sto Y Size=640,4801872"
08:37:32.541 LIT::Get Response:Sto Y Size=640,480
08:37:32.541 PERFCOUNTER: Image data send time 0.557027 seconds
08:37:32.541 LIImageBox::sendImageData() returns: 0
08:37:32.541 PERFCOUNTER: Overall acquire time 0.585058 seconds (512.769436 Kbytes/sec)
08:37:32.541 LIImageBox::Print() returns: 0
08:37:32.541 Image box print successfully
08:37:32.541 LIT::Send Command:Sto Test=2 DPatch
08:37:32.541 To ccpacket: "Sto Test=2 DPatch"
08:37:32.551 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "_Sto Test=2 DPatch1721"
08:37:32.701 SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet "Sto Y Size=10,415CE"
08:37:32.701 LIT::Get Response:Sto Y Size=10,4
08:37:32.701 LIT::Send Command:Pri Fmt=99 Img=1 Cps=1 Dens=2 Dest=Fp1
08:37:32.701 To ccpacket: "Pri Fmt=99 Img=1 Cps=1 Dens=2 Dest=Fp1"
08:37:32.701 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "_Pri Fmt=99 Img=1 Cps=1 Dens=2 Dest=Fp12c02"
08:37:32.972 SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet "Pri Y Job=211B0"
08:37:32.972 LIT::Get Response:Pri Y Job=2
08:37:32.972 Job ID = 2
08:37:32.972 LIT::Send Command:Del Def Img=2,1
08:37:32.972 To ccpacket: "Del Def Img=2,1"
***** Tue Jul 06 *****
08:37:32.972 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "_Del Def Img=2,115b3"
08:37:33.002 LIT::Send Command:Del Fmt=99 Box=All
08:37:33.002 To ccpacket: "Del Fmt=99 Box=All"
08:37:33.002 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "_Del Fmt=99 Box=All1813"
08:37:33.032 LIT::Send Command:Del Fmt=99
08:37:33.032 To ccpacket: "Del Fmt=99"
08:37:33.032 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "_Del Fmt=99106c"
08:37:33.062 job=4: is successfully printed
08:37:33.062 lit_close()
08:37:33.062 Dim:Stop().
08:37:33.072 FIFOQueue::AddJob(4)
08:37:34.073 Thread 0xBB waits event
08:37:42.956 Thread 0xA1 sets event
08:37:42.956 FIFOQueue::GetJob()
08:37:42.956 Job:4 is removed from FIFOQueue
08:37:42.956 LaserImagerIntf::GetStatus(Job*) job=4
08:37:42.956 lit_open()
08:37:42.976 LIT::Send Command:Sta Job=2
08:37:42.976 To ccpacket: "Sta Job=2"
08:37:42.976 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "_Sta Job=20f68"
08:37:43.026 SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet "Sta Y Pri Print=0,0,1 Proc=0,0,1 Wait2B42"
08:37:43.026 LIT::Get Response:Sta Y Pri Print=0,0,1 Proc=0,0,1 Wait
08:37:43.026 lit_close()
08:37:43.026 Dim:Stop().
4–22 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting

***** Tue Jul 06 *****
End of JOBSPOOLER/superSet log.
JOBSPOOLER/SUPERSET Error Example

The following log entries show an example of a command that failed and the corresponding error response. In the
response (Pri N MagErr=749), "N" indicates that the previous Pri Fmt (Print) command could not be executed. The
parameter MagErr=749 indicates that a magnification error occurred within box 749.
To determine the meaning of an error parameter, refer to the SUPERSET Command Set specification on the Kodak
Service Collection CD-ROM. The specification will be displayed in Acrobat Reader. Use the Find feature to search
for the error code description (in this example search for MagErr).
16:11:01.949 LIT::Send Command:Pri Fmt=1 Img=984,985,987 Cps=1 Dens=986 Dest=Fp1
***** Mon Jun 28 *****
16:11:01.949 To ccpacket: "Pri Fmt=1 Img=984,985,987 Cps=1 Dens=986 Dest=Fp1"
16:11:01.949 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "Pri Fmt=1 Img=984,985,987 Cps=1 Dens=986
Dest=Fp13725"
16:11:02.409 SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet "Pri N MagErr=749163F"
16:11:02.409 LIT::Get Response:Pri N MagErr=749
16:11:02.409 job=279: Fail to print
8628588 - 2001 March 4–23

JOBSPOOLER with 952 Commands
952 Commands
The PACS Link 9410 system controls a copper-connected local printer by sending 952 commands to the printer. A
typical 952 command is shown below:
This command directs a printer to capture and store an image from a modality. The
AQU,iid parameter iid specifies the ID number to be assigned to the image (range 1 to 239).
Each command requires a response from the target printer. The PACS Link 9410 system will not send another
command before it receives a response to the previous command. The following examples are common responses
to 952 commands:
PAS This response indicates that the previous command executed properly.
This response indicates that the previous command failed because the printer was busy.
The command that failed and associated parameters are included in the response. For
FAI,BSY,command example: FAI,BSY,AQU 3. In this response AQU is the command that failed; 3 is the
/parameters image ID.
For a detailed explanation of each 952 command and the possible responses, refer to the 831/952 Command
Specification on the Kodak Service Collection CD-ROM.
952 Command Sequence

Table 4–3 shows a typical sequence of 952 commands and responses extracted from a JOBSPOOLER log. Note that
each command issued by the PACS Link 9410 system must be answered by a response from the local printer. This
command sequence acquires an image and sends it to a local printer. The actual JOBSPOOLER log that create this
sequence of commands follows the table.
Table 4–3 JOBSPOOLER/952 Command Sequence

952 Command
RQS Sent by PACS Link 9410 system to determine status of laser imager.
STA,1,RDY Sent by Laser imager and indicates it has completed initialization.



ALI Sent by PACS Link 9410 system to put laser imager in 952 protocol.
PAS Command completed successfully.

MSZ Sent by PACS Link 9410 to establish media size.
PAS,1417,1417,1417 Laser imager responds with media size and alternate media sizes
supported.
ALI Sent by PACS Link 9410 system to gain access to laser imager and to put
laser imager in 952 protocol.

SRR,0 Sent by PACS Link 9410 system to set rotate to portrait mode.
4–24 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
952 Command
CLR ALL Sent by PACS Link 9410 system to clear all images in the laser imager.
PAS Command completed successfully

CMI,50 Sent by PACS Link 9410 system to clear multiple images (50) in the laser
imager.
PAS Command completed successfully

AAI,50,2,15, Annotation Test The AAI command is used to put text labels on film. The image id for this
text message is 50. The number of pixels between lines of text is 2.The
number of characters in the text, including spacing is 15.

INQ PACS Link 9410 system is checking for available memory.
ANQ,2048,2048,1,0 Imager reports: total memory (first set of numbers, 2048), the largest
contiguous block of memory (second set of number, 2048). The last two
numbers indicate the number of holes (1) and bad blocks (0) in the memory
partition.
AQU,1 This is the acquire command. The number that follows the command is the
number of images to acquire.

ALI Sent by PACS Link 9410 system to gain access to laser imager and to put
laser imager in 952 protocol.

DZO,30,6,1,0,0,0,50,D DZO = the define a zone command on a sheet of film.
30 = (lin) = the total number of lines in the zone.
6 = (top) = the number of lines of border at the top of the zone
1=(typ) = the number of images to place in a zone
0=(Hmg) = horizontal magnification
0=(Vmg) = vertical magnification
0=(emo) = the horizontal and vertical enlargement mode to be used for
printing images in this zone.
50=(Iid) = image ID
D=(Contrast) = contrast values defaulted to the NVRAM of laser+

DZO,5163,6,1,0.00,0.00,255,1,24 DZO = the define a zone command on a sheet of film.
6= (top) = the number of lines of border at the top of the zone
0=(Vmg) = vertical magnification
printing images in this zone.
1=(Iid) = image ID
24=(Contrast) = contrast values
8628588 - 2001 March 4–25

952 Command
DZO,30,6,1,0,0,0,51,D DZO = the define a zone command on a sheet of film.
6= (top) = the number of lines of border at the top of the zone
0=(Vmg) = vertical magnification0=(emo) Specifies the horizontal and
vertical enlargement mode to be used for printing images in this zone.
51=(Iid) = image ID
D=(Contrast) = contrast values defaulted to the NVRAM of laser

STP,1, STP= start a print cycle
1=(cpi) = number of copies
8=(dns) = the density to print the film at and overrides the local panel
setting
STC
Stage Complete. This is the pass response to the STP command.
EXP Expose Film. This command is used to tell the Laser Imager to begin
imaging a sheet of film.
PTC This response indicates that the print was successfully completed.
CLR ALL Sent by PACS Link 9410 system to clear all images on the laser imager.

952 Error Responses

If the local printer is unable to execute a command, it returns one of the following error responses:
FAI Fail
PTF Print Fail
BIM Bad Image
INV Invalid Command
In addition to these error responses, the local printer can send an ALM (Alarm) notice at any time (not in response
to a command).These responses are accompanied by additional information that helps identify the reason for the
failure to execute the command. For a full explanation to the error responses, refer to the 831/952 Command
Specification on the Kodak Service Collection CD-ROM. The error responses are useful for troubleshooting. Use
the Find feature in WordPad to search for error codes.
4–26 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
JOBSPOOLER/952 Log
The JOBSPOOLER log that created the previous 952 command sequence is shown below. Note that the log contains
many entries in addition to the 952 commands. In most cases it is only the 952 commands and responses that are
useful for troubleshooting.
You can identify the commands sent from the PACS Link 9410 system by looking for the prefix "Send Command"
that precedes each command. In the sample log below, "Send Command" is underlined and the actual 952 commands
are shown in bold type.
Likewise you can find the responses to commands by looking for the prefix "Get Response" that precedes each
response. Throughout the sample log below, "Get Response" is underlined.
When you view the log on the PACS Link 9410 system, it is displayed in WordPad. Use the Find feature in WordPad
to find each occurrence of "Send Command" or "Get Response".
***** Tue Jul 06 *****
15:44:12.821 LIT::Send Command:RQS
15:44:13.192 m952_GetIMSStatus called
15:44:13.563 lit_close()
15:44:13.563 Dim:Stop().
15:44:13.563 M952::startPacketTask. Quitting!
15:44:16.847 MessageAccept::startServer(). Server name "JOBSPOOLER" type "JobServer" Thread 149
stopping.
15:44:40.231 MessageServer 0x6C starts
starting.
***** Tue Jul 06 *****
15:44:43.295 LaserImagerIntf::Validate() job=2)
15:44:43.295 LIPrintJob::Validate() job=2
15:44:43.305 LIFilmBox::Validate() FilmBox=2
15:44:43.305 LIImageBox::Validate() ImageBoxID = 3, ImageID = 3
15:44:43.305 IMapper. Explicit mapping.Input 10001/15. Output 1/15
15:44:43.315 ImageBox=3:Incorrect Byte Order, default=1 is used
15:44:43.345 Thread 0x6C sets event
15:44:43.345 Thread 0x97 got event
15:44:43.345 Dispatcher: 0x97 dispatches job: 2
15:44:43.385 LaserImagerIntf::Dispatch() job=2)
15:44:43.385 lit_open()
15:44:43.395 m952_GetPrinterStatus called Printer:1
***** Tue Jul 06 *****
8628588 - 2001 March 4–27


15:44:44.046 LIT::Send Command:MSZ
15:44:44.046 To ccpacket: "MSZ"
15:44:44.557 LIT::Get Response:PAS,1417,1417,1417
15:44:44.557 LIPrintJob::Print(), Job ID =2.
15:44:44.557 LIFilmBox::Print(1).
15:44:44.567 pageInfo: format=1, numImages=1, border=4095, dmax=240, copies=1
15:44:44.567 orientation=1 annotation=8
15:44:44.567 dest=4
15:44:44.567 m952_sendPageInfo called
15:44:44.567 pageInfo: formatID=1, numImages=1, borderDensity=4095 maxDensity=240
15:44:44.567 numCopies=1 filmType=2 filmSize=2 filmDest=4 orientation=1
15:44:44.567 annoFomrat=8 annoText=Annotation Test
15:44:44.898 LIT::Send Command:SRT,0
15:44:44.898 To ccpacket: "SRT,0"
15:44:45.318 Expected: PAS, Received: SRT,0!
***** Tue Jul 06 *****
15:44:45.318 D:\9410_Projects\NGNI 1.1
Release\Source\JobSpooler\LaserImager\LaserImagerToolkit\m952_sendCommand.cpp:1046
m952_receiveResponse() failed!
15:44:45.318 failed to set rotation settings : 2
15:44:45.318 failed to set border settings : 2
15:44:45.318 LIT::Send Command:CLR ALL
15:44:45.318 To ccpacket: "CLR ALL"
stopping.
15:44:45.829 LIT::Send Command:CMI,50
15:44:45.829 To ccpacket: "CMI,50"
15:44:46.280 LIT::Send Command:AAI,50,2,15,~Annotation Test~
15:44:46.280 To ccpacket: "AAI,50,2,15,~Annotation Test~"
15:44:47.031 LIImageBox::Print(), Image ID = 315:44:47.031 LIImageBox::sendImageInfo()
15:44:47.041 imageInfo: size=[480x640] polarity=2, smooth=15 contrast=9
15:44:47.041 aspect=[1:1] reqImageSize=-1 bitsAlloc=8 bitsUsed=8 lutTbl=1
15:44:47.041 trim=0 rotate=0 mirror=0
15:44:47.041 m952_sendImageInfo called
15:44:47.041 LIT::Send Command:INQ
15:44:47.041 To ccpacket: "INQ"
15:44:47.481 LIT::Get Response:ANQ,2048,2048,1,0
***** Tue Jul 06 *****
15:44:47.481 LIT::adjBox index=1,X=640,Y=480,W=0,H=0,con=0
15:44:47.481 LIT::adjBox index=1,X=640,Y=480,W=0,H=0,con=24
15:44:47.481 LIT::Send Command:AQU,1
15:44:47.481 To ccpacket: "AQU,1"
15:44:47.852 LIImageBox::sendImageInfo() retruns: 0
15:44:47.852 LIImageBox::sendImageData()
15:44:47.862 m952_sendImageData called
15:44:47.862 PERFCOUNTER: CFile.Read time 0.003647 seconds
15:44:48.603 LIT::Send Command:AAI,51,2,4,~Id=1~
15:44:48.603 To ccpacket: "AAI,51,2,4,~Id=1~"
15:44:49.064 PERFCOUNTER: Image data send time 1.197979 seconds
15:44:49.064 LIImageBox::sendImageData() returns: 0
15:44:49.064 PERFCOUNTER: Overall acquire time 1.215147 seconds (246.883634 Kbytes/sec)
15:44:49.064 LIImageBox::Print() returns: 0
15:44:49.064 Image box print successfully
15:44:49.074 m952_PrintPage called
15:44:49.074 m952_printPage:Setup format: 1
4–28 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting

15:44:49.384 m952_printPage:used page width=4096 & height=5223.
***** Tue Jul 06 *****
15:44:49.384 LIT::Send Command:DZO,30,6,1,0,0,0,50,D
15:44:49.384 To ccpacket: "DZO,30,6,1,0,0,0,50,D"
15:44:50.786 LIT::Send Command:DZO,5163,6,1,0.00,0.00,255,1,24
15:44:50.786 To ccpacket: "DZO,5163,6,1,0.00,0.00,255,1,24"
15:44:51.367 LIT::Send Command:DZO,30,6,1,0,0,0,51,D
15:44:51.367 To ccpacket: "DZO,30,6,1,0,0,0,51,D"
15:44:52.388 LIT::Send Command:STP,1,8
15:44:52.388 To ccpacket: "STP,1,8"
15:44:52.889 LIT::Get Response:STC
15:44:52.889 LIT::Send Command:EXP
15:44:52.889 To ccpacket: "EXP"
15:44:53.210 D:\9410_Projects\NGNI 1.1
Release\Source\JobSpooler\LaserImager\LaserImagerToolkit\m952_sendCommand.cpp:1053
m952_receiveResponse() >EOE< received try again!
15:44:53.330 LIT::Get Response:PTC
15:44:53.330 Job ID = -1
15:44:53.330 LIT::Send Command:CLR ALL
15:44:53.330 To ccpacket: "CLR ALL"
***** Tue Jul 06 *****
15:44:53.830 job=2: is successfully printed
15:44:53.830 lit_close()
15:44:53.830 Dim:Stop().
15:44:54.832 Thread 0x97 waits event
15:44:55.363 MessageServer 0xC0 starts
starting.
15:44:56.644 LaserImagerIntf::GetStatus(Job*) job=2
15:44:56.644 lit_open()
15:44:56.654 m952_GetJobStatus called -1
15:44:56.995 lit_close()
15:44:56.995 Dim:Stop().
***** Tue Jul 06 *****
15:44:57.105 Job: 2 done.
End of JOBSPOOLER/952 log.
8628588 - 2001 March 4–29

JOBSPOOLER with DICOM Commands

A JOBSPOOLER log is created for each network printer that is configured to communicate with the PACS Link 9410
system. This log contains the DICOM commands that the PACS Link 9410 system uses to control network printers.
A typical JOBSPOOLER/DICOM log is shown below.
***** Tue Jul 20 *****
06:56:05.136 globalCreate. Program startup
06:56:05.256 Server "DBSERVICE", "DBSERVER", -1 = port 4002
06:56:05.316 MessageIntf::connectToServer(). Server DBService,DBServer Instance -1.
06:56:05.326 MessageIntf::connectToServer(). Host tc9410ms Port 4002/fa2
06:56:06.688 MessageIntf::connectToServer(). Server Supervisor,SupervisorServer Instance 0.
06:56:06.718 Instance number = 2
06:56:06.748 EquipmentID = 402
DICOMPRINTSCU.DLL Initializing!
06:56:07.209 DicomSCUIntf::GetStatus()
06:56:07.209 Start request association......
06:56:07.299 Server "JOBSPOOLER", "JOBSERVER", 2 = port 4003
06:56:07.769 CreateAssoc: Association Established
06:56:07.779 Create association=00425F20 successfully
06:56:07.779 Association respond:PRINT SOP=1, JOB STATUS SOP=1, ANNOTATION SOP=1
06:56:07.779 End request association!
06:56:07.779 Start delete association=00425F20......
06:56:07.920 TerminateAssociation: Delete Complete
06:56:07.920 End delete association! return code=0.
06:56:12.036 MessageServer 0x50 starts
starting.
06:56:22.350 Thread 0xB4 sets event
***** Tue Jul 20 *****
06:57:07.986 Create association=004273E0 successfully
06:57:07.986 Start delete association=004273E0......
06:57:15.567 DicomSCUIntf::Validate() job=34)
06:57:15.577 Job=34:Unknown filmbox interpolation map type!
06:57:15.577 Job=34:Validation warning!
***** Tue Jul 20 *****
06:57:15.617 Dispatcher: 0x99 dispatches job: 34
06:57:15.697 DicomSCUIntf::Dispatch() job=34
4–30 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
06:57:16.258 Create association=00429EA0 successfully

06:57:16.258 Start create film session......
06:57:16.658 job=34: Create film session successfully
06:57:16.658 End create film session!
06:57:16.668 Start create film box......
06:57:17.069 Create film box successfully
06:57:17.069 End create film box!
06:57:17.460 Create film box annotation successfully
06:57:17.460 End film box!
06:57:17.470 Start reading image file......
06:57:17.480 End reading image file!
***** Tue Jul 20 *****
06:57:17.510 Start sending image=1......
06:57:18.271 Define image box successfully
06:57:18.271 End sending image!
06:57:18.271 Image box dispatch successfully
06:57:18.271 Start printing......
06:57:19.452 PrintFB: Successful Print
06:57:19.452 End printing!
06:57:19.462 FilmBox=34,Job id(classUID=1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.14,
instanceUID=1.2.840.113720.1.9410.2.19990720070532.4.0.4)
06:57:19.733 job=34: Film box dispatch successfully
06:57:19.733 Start delete film session......
06:57:20.033 job=34: Delete film session successfully
06:57:20.033 End delete film session!
06:57:20.033 Start delete association=00429EA0......
06:57:22.357 DicomSCUIntf::GetStatus(Job*) job=34
06:57:22.867 Create association=00422D20 successfully
***** Tue Jul 20 *****
instanceUID=1.2.840.113720.1.9410.2.19990720070532.4.0.4)
06:57:23.268 Start delete association=00422D20......
instanceUID=1.2.840.113720.1.9410.2.19990720070532.4.0.4)
***** Tue Jul 20 *****
8628588 - 2001 March 4–31


06:57:52.911 Create association=00427580 successfully
instanceUID=1.2.840.113720.1.9410.2.19990720070532.4.0.4)
06:57:53.311 Start delete association=00427580......
06:58:07.932 Create association=00422DD0 successfully
instanceUID=1.2.840.113720.1.9410.2.19990720070532.4.0.4)
***** Tue Jul 20 *****
06:58:08.343 Start delete association=00422DD0......
06:58:09.174 Destination: 402 status changed to 1(status), 0(info).
06:58:09.174 DBIntf::UpdateDestinationStatus()
06:58:09.194 DBIntf::UpdateConfigInfo()
06:58:09.234 DBIntf::UpdateFPandIMSStatus()
***** Tue Jul 20 *****
instnceUID=1.2.840.113720.1.9410.2.19990720070532.4.0.4)
06:58:37.875 Create association=004236F0 successfully
instanceUID=1.2.840.113720.1.9410.2.19990720070532.4.0.4)
06:58:38.276 Start delete association=004236F0......
4–32 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting

***** Tue Jul 20 *****
instanceUID=1.2.840.113720.1.9410.2.19990720070532.4.0.4)
instanceUID=1.2.840.113720.1.9410.2.19990720070532.4.0.4)
***** Tue Jul 20 *****
06:59:08.569 Job: 34 done.
06:59:08.569 Job:34 is removed from job collection
06:59:09.120 Create association=00425FD0 successfully
06:59:09.120 Start delete association=00425FD0......
06:59:34.026 OnNgniCloseAll called. Shutting down.06:59:34.026 OnClose called. Shutting
down.File: F:\9410_Projects\NGNI Out\source\NGNIDB\Message\MessageRcv.cpp Line 133. Message
"Message::Receive failed! Name "Supervisor" Type "SupervisorServer". LastError "10054""
06:59:34.036 File F:\9410_Projects\NGNI Out\source\NGNIDB\Message\MessageRcv.cpp Line 133.
Exception.
06:59:34.036 Message::Receive failed! Name "Supervisor" Type "SupervisorServer". LastError
"10054"
06:59:34.086 Dispatcher shuts down...
stopping.
06:59:34.587 Status monitor shuts down...
***** Tue Jul 20 *****
06:59:35.087 ~MessageIntf.Shutting down remote client("SupervisorIntf")
06:59:35.528 File F:\9410_Projects\NGNI Out\source\NGNIDB\Message\MessageIntf.cpp Line 162.
Exception.
06:59:35.528 connectToServer() failed 10038! "Supervisor","SupervisorServer"
File: F:\9410_Projects\NGNI Out\source\NGNIDB\Message\MessageIntf.cpp Line 320. Message
"ConnectToServer. Aborting!"
06:59:35.528 File F:\9410_Projects\NGNI Out\source\NGNIDB\Message\MessageIntf.cpp Line 320.
Exception.
06:59:35.528 ConnectToServer. Aborting!
06:59:35.528 MessageIntf::startClient. Shutting down ("SupervisorIntf", 0x78).
DICOMPRINTSCU.DLL Terminating!
06:59:35.548 globalDestroy. Program shutdown
06:59:35.548 ~MessageIntf.Shutting down remote client("DBClient")
File: F:\9410_Projects\NGNI Out\source\NGNIDB\Message\MessageRcv.cpp Line 133. Message
"Message::Receive shutting down. Name "DBService" Type "DBServer". Socket closed"
8628588 - 2001 March 4–33


Exception.
06:59:35.558 Message::Receive shutting down. Name "DBService" Type "DBServer". Socket closed
06:59:35.558 MessageIntf::startClient. Shutting down ("DBClient", 0xA8).
End of JOBSPOOLER/DICOM log.
4–34 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
PARSER952 (Input Log)

The PARSER952 log file is created when the PACS Link 9410 system is configured for a Host Keypad connection
in SMT. The log provides a record of the communication that occurred on the serial connection between an HPT
keypad (or a host modality) and the PACS Link 9410 system. The keypad connects through a UKEIB serial port on
a 2-Port COM Card or on a RocketPort Board.
The log information is useful for troubleshooting 952 commands from the HPT Keypad (or direct host control input)
and responses back from the PACS Link 9410 system.This log is a processed version of the associated
SERIALCOMM input log and typically provides in-depth reporting of the serial input logging activity. This is the
main log for monitoring communication on serial ports when the control device is a host modality that communicates
using the 952 command set.
PARSER952 Command Sequence
Table 4–4 shows a typical sequence of 952 commands and responses. The commands and responses were extracted
from an actual Parser952 log and deciphered using the 831/952 Command Set document. The 831/952 Command Set
Specification, which describes the 952 commands, is included on the Kodak Service Collection CD ROM. The
unedited log follows this table.
Table 4–4 Parser952 Command Sequence

952 Command
ALI Puts the PACS Link 9410 system into the 952 protocol command set.
PAS This response indicates that the PACS Link 9410 system was successfully
switched into the 952 protocol.
SHO Lets the keypad determine the default film destination and the possible
alternate destinations.
PRT,2 This response indicates that there is only one destination for the Keypad to
target.
CLR ALL Sent by Keypad to clear all images.
PAS Laser imager responds that all images have been deleted.
MSZ, 1417 Sent by Keypad to set media size.
PAS Command passed.

MSZ Sent by Keypad to verify media size.
PAS, 1417,1417,1417 Laser imager responds with media size 14x17.

MSZ N/A
PAS, 1417,1417,1417 Laser imager responds with media size 14x17.

INQ Sent by keypad to determine amount of available memory.
ANQ,2048,2048,0,0 Laser imager responds with total memory (2048), largest contiguous block
(2048), holes (0), and bad blocks (0).
AQU1 Sent by keypad to Acquire first image.
PAS Command passes.

ISZ,1 Sent by keypad to obtain the horizontal and vertical size of an acquired
image.
SZI 1,1 In the new mode the IMS returns a 1,1. If the PACS Link 9410 system were
set up in the old mode, the actual image size would be displayed here.
8628588 - 2001 March 4–35
952 Command
ALI Reestablishes the 952 protocol with the laser imager.
PAS Command passes.

DSZ 4800,30,1,0,0,204,1,4 DZO = the define a zone command on a sheet of film.
30= (top) = the number of lines of border at the top of the zone.
1=(typ) = the number of images to place in a zone.
0=(Hmg) = horizontal magnification.
0=(Vmg) = vertical magnification.
the printing of images in this zone.
1=(Iid) = image ID.
4=(Contrast) = contrast values to the laser imager.
PAS Command passes.

SBD 0 Used to set the border level, either clear or black. The DryView 8700 Laser
Imager ignores this Request but always sends a pass.
PAS
STP 1,14 Starts a print cycle for 1 copy at a density of 14.
STC Indicates the successful start of a print cycle.

EXP The keypad tells the PACS Link 9410 system to start exposing the film.
EOE Laser imager responds with End Of Exposure, a new image acquisition can
continue.
PTC Laser imager also indicates the last print was successfully completed.
4–36 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
PARSER952 Log
The Parser952 log used in the previous 952 command sequence is shown below. Note that the log contains entries in
addition to the 952 commands. In most cases it is only the 952 commands and responses that are useful for
troubleshooting.
You can identify the commands sent from the keypad by looking for the prefix Cmd that precedes each command.
Likewise you can find the responses to commands by looking for the prefix Rsp that precedes each response.
to find each occurrence of Cmd or Rsp.
13:05:50.632 MessageIntf::connectToServer(). Host 9410-4b210a Port 4002/fa2
13:05:52.064 Local:: localCreate called
13:05:52.185 Server "DPI4SERIAL", "SERIALSERVER", 2 = port 4003
13:05:52.215 Server "DPI4IMAGE", "IMAGEACQUIRESERVER", 2 = port 4004
13:05:52.215 MessageIntf::connectToServer(). Server DPI4Serial,SerialServer Instance 2.
13:05:52.265 MessageIntf::connectToServer(). Server DPI4Image,ImageAcquireServer Instance 2.
13:05:52.375 Local:: no LocalPrinter defined!
13:05:52.375 MessageIntf::connectToServer(). Server JobSpooler,JobServer Instance 1.
13:05:53.116 952Parser::Parser() - Constructor, CurrentState:Startup
13:05:53.126 DBIntf::GetSDestinationtatus()
13:05:54.107 LocalJobIntf::DoDestinationStatusChange. Printer 401 status changed
***** Wed Jul 14 *****
13:05:54.157 LocalJobClient::DestinationStatusChange. current status: 0 current Info 0x0
13:05:58.904 -->Cmd "ALI"
13:05:58.904 -> 952Parser::*changeTheState, Curstate: Startup, NewState: Startup, Cmd: 6
13:05:58.904 <--Rsp "PAS"
13:05:59.075 -->Cmd "SHO"
13:05:59.075 952Parser::doSHO update configuration values
13:05:59.095 <--Rsp "PRT,2"
13:05:59.355 -->Cmd "CLR ALL"
13:05:59.355 <--Rsp "PAS"
13:15:43.615 -->Cmd "MSZ,1417"
13:15:43.675 <--Rsp "PAS"
13:15:43.996 -->Cmd "MSZ"
13:15:43.996 952Parser::doMSZ update configuration values
***** Wed Jul 14 *****
13:15:44.246 <--Rsp "PAS,1417,1417,1417"
13:15:44.566 -->Cmd "MSZ"
13:15:44.566 952Parser::doMSZ update configuration values
13:15:44.877 <--Rsp "PAS,1417,1417,1417"
13:15:46.469 -->Cmd "INQ"
13:15:46.469 <--Rsp "ANQ,2048,2048,0,0"
13:15:47.431 -->Cmd "AQU 1"
13:15:59.558 <--Rsp "PAS"
13:16:00.039 -->Cmd "ISZ,1"
8628588 - 2001 March 4–37

13:16:00.039 <--Rsp "SZI,1,1"

13:16:00.559 -->Cmd "ALI"
13:16:00.559 -> 952Parser::*changeTheState, Curstate: Startup, NewState: Startup, Cmd: 6
13:16:00.559 <--Rsp "PAS"
13:16:01.130 -->Cmd "DZO 4800 30 1 0 0 204 1 4 "
13:16:01.130 952Parser::doDzo() entered, lin:4800, top:30, typ:1
13:16:01.130 952Parser::doDZO update configuration values
13:16:01.391 DzoDesc::bldDzoDesc(): about to return:0
13:16:01.391 System configured with PixelCorrection!
13:16:01.391 System configured with ScaleFormat!
13:16:01.391 System addapt max lines!
13:16:01.391 DzoDesc::dzoMain(): scaled lin:5222, top:32
13:16:01.391 DzoDesc::dzoMain(): HMAX:4096
13:16:01.391 DzoDesc::dzoMain(), adjPix:2219, adjLines:2774
13:16:01.391 DzoDesc::(), outPix:4096, outLines:5120
13:16:01.391 DzoDesc::dzoMain(), hgap:0, vgap:35
13:16:01.391 DzoDesc::buildDFIs(): build dfi for iid:1
**** Wed Jul 14 *****
13:16:01.391 DzoDesc::dzoMain(): about to return:0
13:16:01.391 <--Rsp "PAS"
13:16:01.391 -> 952Parser::*changeTheState, Curstate: Startup, NewState: DZOActive, Cmd: 14
13:16:01.391 952Parser: Dump the DZO just added to userData, saveRow:5222
13:16:01.391
***** DzoDesc dump of dzo:0048B170*****
13:16:01.391 rowsused:5222, lin:4800, top:30, typ:1, emo:204
13:16:01.391 hmg:0, vmg:0, numiidctas:0
13:16:01.391 iidCta[0]: iid:1, cta:4
13:16:01.391 **Dump of BoxDesc[0]
13:16:01.391 iid:1, startX:0, startY:67, hBeta:0
13:16:01.391 vBeta:0, hSize:4096, vSize:5120, winX:0, winY:0
13:16:01.391 winHSize:2048, winVSize:2560, conTable:4
13:16:01.391
13:16:01.571 -->Cmd "SBD 0"
13:16:01.571 <--Rsp "PAS"
13:16:01.801 -->Cmd "STP 1,14"
13:16:01.801 952Parser::doSTP update configuration values
13:16:01.901 DBIntfImp::Store(Job*)
13:16:02.652 DBIntf::UseImage(Image*)
13:16:03.043 <--Rsp "STC"
13:16”-3/083 -> 952Parser::*changeTheState, Curstate: DZOActive, NewState: PrintActive, Cmd:34
13:16:03.163 LocalJobIntf::JobStatusChange. Job 2 status changed
13:16:04.816 -->Cmd "EXP"
13:16:04.816
**** Job: 2 Exposed ****
13:16:04.816 -> 952Parser::*changeTheState, Curstate: PrintActive, NewState: Startup, Cmd: 15
13:16:04.816 <--Rsp "EOE"
***** Wed Jul 14 *****
13:16:04.816 <--Rsp "PTC"
End of Parser 952 log.
4–38 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
SUPERSET Filter (Input Log)

The SUPERSET log file is created when the PACS Link 9410 system is configured for an IMS Keypad connection
in SMT. The log provides a record of the communication that occurs on the serial connection between an IMS keypad
and the PACS Link 9410 system. The keypad is connected (through a UKEIB) to a serial port on a 2-Port Serial Port
Board or on a RocketPort Board.
The log information is useful for troubleshooting SUPERSET commands from the Keypad (or host modality) and
responses back from the PACS Link 9410 system.This log is a processed version of the associated SERIALCOMM
input log and typically provides in-depth reporting of the serial input logging activity. This is the main log for
monitoring communication on a serial port when the control device is an IMS keypad.
This log is also created when a host modality communicates directly with the PACS Link 9410 system using
SUPERSET commands in place of an IMS keypad. A typical SUPERSET Filter log is shown below.
Throughout the log, commands sent from the keypad (or host control input) can be identified by the prefix Keypad
Output. Responses from the PACS Link 9410 system are preceded by Keypad Input. You can use the SUPERSET
Command Set Specification on the Kodak Service Collection CD ROM to interpret the commands.
to find each occurrence of Keypad Output and Keypad Input.
22:18:03.356 MessageIntf::connectToServer(). Host ngni13 Port 4002/fa2
22:18:04.237 Server "IMAGRAPH", "IMAGEACQUIRESERVER", 1 = port 4004
22:18:04.257 Server "SERIALCOMM", "SERIALSERVER", 1 = port 4005
22:18:04.257 MessageIntf::connectToServer(). Server Imagraph,ImageAcquireServer Instance 1.
22:18:04.288 MessageIntf::connectToServer(). Server SerialComm,SerialServer Instance 1.
22:18:05.670 File D:\9410_Projects\NGNI 1.1 Release\Source\NGNIDB\Message\MessageIntf.cpp Line
162. Exception.
22:18:05.670 connectToServer() failed 10061! "JobSpooler","JobServer"
22:18:05.770 File D:\9410_Projects\NGNI 1.1 Release\Source\NGNIDB\Message\MessageIntf.cpp Line
162. Exception.
22:18:05.770 connectToServer() failed 10061! "Imagraph","ImageAcquireServer"
22:18:10.777 MessageIntf::connectToServer(). Server Imagraph,ImageAcquireServer Instance 1.
22:18:51.946 Keypad Input: "SET DEST="NGNI13""
*****Fri Jun 25 *****
22:18:51.956 Keypad Output: "Set Y"
22:18:52.176 Keypad Input: "SES CLOSE"
22:18:52.176 Keypad Output: "SES Y"
22:18:52.417 Keypad Input: "DEL DEF img=ALL"
22:18:52.507 Keypad Output: "Del Y"
22:18:52.747 Keypad Input: "DEL fmt=ALL"
22:18:53.268 Keypad Input: "SET DENSITY=8"
22:18:53.528 Keypad Input: "SET CON=25"
22:18:53.769 Keypad Input: "SET BETA=15,15,15,15"
22:18:54.009 Keypad Input: "SET BORD=0"
22:18:54.289 Keypad Input: "SET MEDIA=BWGen,E14X17"
22:18:54.520 Keypad Input: "DEL DEF IMG=all"
8628588 - 2001 March 4–39

22:18:55.161 Keypad Input: "DEL FMT=100"

22:18:55.431 Keypad Input: "FMT ID=100 MEDIA=BWGEN,E14X17 "
22:18:55.441 Keypad Output: "Fmt Y"
22:18:55.711 Keypad Input: "BOX ID=1 FMT=100 LOC=0,515 SIZE=4096,4171 ROT=NO "
***** Fri Jun 25 *****
22:18:55.742 Keypad Output: "Box Y"
22:18:58.335 Keypad Input: "show mem"
22:18:58.335 Keypad Output: "Show Y Mem=102400,102400,1,0,0"
22:18:58.826 Keypad Input: "sto img=100"
22:18:59.277 Keypad Output: "Sto Y Size=640,480"
22:19:30.952 Keypad Input: "SET DEST="NGNI13""
22:19:31.182 Keypad Input: "SES CLOSE"
22:19:31.182 Keypad Output: "SES Y"
22:19:31.413 Keypad Input: "DEL DEF img=ALL"
22:19:31.703 Keypad Input: "DEL fmt=ALL"
22:19:31.984 Keypad Input: "SET DMAX=290"
22:19:32.234 Keypad Input: "SET DENSITY=8"
22:19:32.484 Keypad Input: "SET CON=25"
22:19:32.735 Keypad Input: "SET BETA=15,15,15,15"
22:19:32.985 Keypad Input: "SET BORD=0"
22:19:33.275 Keypad Input: "SET MEDIA=BWGen,E14X17"
22:19:33.516 Keypad Input: "DEL DEF IMG=all"
22:19:39.274 Keypad Input: "sto Asc=101 msg="Id=1""
22:19:39.284 DBIntf::Store()
22:19:40.125 Keypad Input: "PRI FMT=100 IMG=100,101"
22:19:40.746 PriCmd::exec. Print started. Superset Job 1 - NGNI Job 4
22:19:40.746 Keypad Output: "Pri Y Job=1"
22:19:40.997 Keypad Input: "DEL DEF IMG=100,101"
***** Fri Jun 25 *****
4–40 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting

22:19:53.755 DBIntf::Store()
***** Fri Jun 25 *****
22:19:54.326 DBIntf::Store()
22:19:55.167 Keypad Input: "PRI FMT=102 IMG=151,152,153,154"
End of SUPERSET Filter log.
8628588 - 2001 March 4–41

SERIALCOMM (Input Log)

This log file is created when the PACS Link 9410 system is configured for a serial connection in SMT. The log
applies only to the serial ports provided by the RocketPort board and the 2-Port Serial Port board.
The SERIALCOMM log contains a record of communication between the control device (IMS Keypad or host
control) connected to the serial port and the PACS Link 9410 system. The log can contain either SUPERSET or 952
commands. If an IMS Keypad is connected, the log will contain SUPERSET commands and responses. If a host
control device is connected, the log will contain 952 commands and responses. Information in the SERIALCOMM
log is the same type of information as contained in the SUPERSET Filter or PARSER952 logs but with less detail.
A separate copy of this log is created for each serial port connection to the RocketPort board or 2-Port Serial Port
board configured in SMT.
SERIALCOMM Command Sequence

Table 4–5 contains a sequence of commands and responses that were extracted from an actual SERIALCOMM log.
This example contains SUPERSET commands and has been deciphered using the IMS SUPERSET Command Set
Specification. The unedited log file follows this example.
Table 4–5 SERIALCOMM Log Command Sequence

Command
STA Keypad (or host control) requests status from PACS Link 9410 system.
Sta Y KeyMail Y indicates the command was successful. KeyMail indicates that there is
currently mail in the Keypad mailbox. This is the mailbox the PACS Link
9410 system uses to send data and commands to the keypad.
SND KEYMAIL Keypad requests the contents of the keypad mailbox from the PACS Link
9410 system.
Snd Y KeyMail="Net Y Done Y indicates that the command was successful. The contents of the mail box
Rot=Clk90 Fmt=1,2 follows the first equal sign. The PACS Link 9410 system automatically
Film=BWGen,E14x17 clears the mailbox after the contents is sent.
Mag=1.0,64.0
Pixels=4096,5223
BoxSize=4096,5223
BordWid=16"
SND KEYMAIL Keypad requests mailbox contents again.
Snd N Empty N Empty indicates that the command failed because there is no message in
the mailbox.
RCV NETMAIL="NET FMT Keypad directs the PACS Link 9410 system to receive a message and place
'F5,2,2x2’ it in the NETMAIL mailbox. The message follows the equal sign.
Rcv Y Keypad directs the PACS Link 9410 system to receive a message and place
it in the NETMAIL mailbox. The message follows the equal sign.
4–42 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
SERIALCOMM Log
The SERIALCOMM log used in the previous command sequence is shown below. The commands in this example
are SUPERSET commands. Note that the log contains entries other than SUPERSET commands and responses. In
most cases it is only the SUPERSET or 952 commands and responses that are useful for troubleshooting.
You can identify the commands from the keypad or host control device by looking for the prefix From Port that
precedes each command. For responses to commands, look for the prefix To Port that precedes each response from
the PACS Link 9410 system.
to locate each occurrence of From Port and To Port.
22:07:34.792 From Port: "STA"
22:07:34.802 To Port: "Sta Y KeyMail"
22:07:34.802 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "Sta Y KeyMail13d1"
22:07:34.933 SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet "SND KEYMAIL1173"
22:07:34.933 From Port: "SND KEYMAIL"
22:07:34.933 To Port: "Snd Y KeyMail="Net Y Done Rot=Clk90 Fmt=1,2 Film=BWGen,E14x17
Mag=1.0,64.0 Pixels=4096,5223 BoxSize=4096,5223 BordWid=16""
22:07:34.933 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "Snd Y KeyMail="Net Y Done Rot=Clk90 Fmt=1,2
Film=BWGen,E14x17 Mag=1.0,64.0 Pixels=4096,5223 BoxSize=4096,5223 BordWid=16"801c"
22:07:35.553 From Port: "SND KEYMAIL"
22:07:35.553 To Port: "Snd N Empty"
22:07:35.553 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "Snd N Empty1124"
22:07:35.764 SuperSet::getPacket. End of packet "RCV NETMAIL="NET FMT ’F5,2,2x2’ "275C"
22:07:35.764 From Port: "RCV NETMAIL="NET FMT ’F5,2,2x2’ ""
22:07:35.764 To Port: "Rcv Y"
22:07:35.764 SuperSet::putPacket. Sending packet "Rcv Y0b36"
***** Fri Jun 25 *****
8628588 - 2001 March 4–43

IMAGRAPHTM (Image Acquisition Log)

This log is created when the PACS Link 9410 is configured for a Video input in SMT. The information in this log
consists of the images and storage directory path that are acquired via the Imagraph board. The following shows a
typical IMAGRAPH input log.
22:18:04.508 Imagraph Server starting - Initializing boards
22:18:07.132 Server "IMAGRAPH", "IMAGEACQUIRESERVER", 1 = port 4004
22:18:07.142 localCreate complete.
22:18:10.777 MessageServer 0x93 starts
22:18:10.777 MessageAccept::startServer(). Server name "IMAGRAPH" type "ImageAcquireServer"
Thread 147 starting.
22:18:59.227 DBIntf::Store(D:\NGNI\images\Img9906252218580.bmp)
4–44 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
DPI4IMAGE (Image Acquisition Log)

This log is created when the PACS Link 9410 system is configured for a Digital input in SMT. The information in
this log consists of the images and storage directory path that are acquired via the Digital board.
The following is an actual DPI4IMAGE Log file (the time stamp column has been removed). This log shows the
actual image that the DPI-4 board acquired and whether the PACS Link 9410 system was able to store the image.
When the DPI-4 board is not acquiring images, no communication is recorded in this log. On initial startup the board
configuration is recorded in this log.
globalCreate. Program startup
Server "DBSERVICE", "DBSERVER", -1 = port 4002
MessageIntf::connectToServer(). Server DBService,DBServer Instance -1.
MessageIntf::connectToServer(). Host 9410-4b210a Port 4002/fa2
MessageIntf::connectToServer(). Server Supervisor,SupervisorServer Instance 0.
MessageIntf::connectToServer(). Host 9410-4b210a Port 4000/fa0
Server "DPI4IMAGE", "IMAGEACQUIRESERVER", 2 = port 4003
MessageServer 0x103 starts
MessageAccept::startServer(). Server name "DPI4IMAGE" type "ImageAcquireServer" Thread 259
starting.
The following lines list the actual setup parameters that were entered earlier in SMT for Channel 2 when the DPI-4
Board was setup. This information is only displayed after the PACS Link 9410 software has been stopped and started
(if the user turns the PACS Link 9410 system off or if the field engineer stops and then starts the acquisition software).
Image Channel: 2 config params
header=1
depth=8
aspectX=1
aspectY=1
rows=0
columns=0
parity=2
memAllocated=25
timeout=60
The following two lines show the acquired image that the PACS Link 9410 system stored and will send out to a laser
imager for printing.
DBIntf::Store(D:\NGNI\images\Img9907141405330.bmp)
LocalImageAcquireServer::AcquireImage. Acquisition Time 00:12
8628588 - 2001 March 4–45

DISOL (Input Log)

This log file is created when the PACS Link 9410 system is configured for a DICOM input. The information in this
log consists of the communication that occurs over a network between a DICOM modality and the PACS Link 9410
SCP.
Depending on the OEM’s preferences and their interpretation of the DICOM specifications, the DICOM sequences
between the OEM SCU and the PACS Link 9410 SCP may vary. The following sequences, extracted from a DISOL
log, provide a sampling of what can be expected when monitoring a DISOL.log in the PACS Link 9410.
The following section is displayed when a new association is requested.

10:14:51.844 MessageIntf::connectToServer(). Host tc9410ps Port 4002/fa2
10:19:41.851 newAssociationRequest
This dialogue exchange provides information that describes SCU and SCP capabilities:
• SOP class support
• Transfer syntax
• SCU AP Title, maximum PDU, IP address
10:19:41.891 Rejected SOP 1.2.840.10008.1.1

10:19:41.891 Accepted SOP 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.9, contextID=1, trSyntax=1.2.840.10008.1.2
10:19:41.891 Rejected SOP 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.16
10:19:41.891 PeerInfo:
10:19:41.891 APTitle: IMN_9410
10:19:41.891 maxPDU: 1000000
10:19:41.891 implClassUID: 1.2.840.113720.1.9410.1
10:19:41.891 implVersion: IMN_9410
10:19:41.891 Called AETitle:
10:19:41.891 IP: 207.242.212.107
10:19:42.172 new association: a
10:19:42.172 AssocHandler attempting Mutex Lock ...
***** Wed Mar 31 *****
10:19:42.172 input from net
4–46 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
The following is a message from the SCU requesting printer status. This request may or may not always occur.
10:19:43.203 DIMSE_GetMessage: bitFlags=100e

10:19:43.203 classUID:1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.16, contextID:1
10:19:43.203 handlePrinter()
10:19:43.203 ** prNGet **
10:19:43.213 tag:21100010
10:19:43.213 status=NORMAL
10:19:43.213 tag:21100020
10:19:43.213 statusInfo=NORMAL
10:19:43.213 tag:21100030
10:19:43.213 printer=DV 8700
10:19:43.213 tag:80070
10:19:43.213 manufacturer=Imation
10:19:43.213 tag:81090
10:19:43.213 model=M_8700
10:19:43.213 tag:181020
10:19:43.213 swVersion=
10:19:43.213 ** private tags **
10:19:43.213 private creator=IMATION1.2.840.113720.1.9410.2
10:19:43.213 sheetsleft=120
10:19:43.213 dumpSendMessage:10:19:43.213 cmdField:8110
***** Wed Mar 31 *****
10:19:43.213 msgID:1
10:19:43.213 Aff classUID:1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.16
10:19:43.213 Aff instanceUID:1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.17
10:19:43.213 status:0
This message from the SCU requests the creation of a film session. Various items may be tagged by the SCU as
allowed by DICOM. Any items not tagged by the SCU, but nonetheless required, will be set to a default value by the
PACS Link 9410 SCP.
10:19:43.644 DIMSE_GetMessage: bitFlags=d

10:19:43.644 handleFilmSession
10:19:43.654 ** fsNCreate **
10:19:43.654 SessionHandler::handleEvent (state= 0 event=0)
10:19:43.654 ->openSessionHandler
10:19:43.654 Session (sid=1) opened
10:19:43.654 SessionHandler::handleEvent (sid=1): nextstate=1
10:19:43.654 <rc: 5, tag:20000010, vm:1>
10:19:43.654 numCopies=1
10:19:43.654 <rc: 5, tag:20000020, vm:1>
10:19:43.654 priority=LOW
10:19:43.654 <rc: 5, tag:20000030, vm:1>
10:19:43.654 mediumType=BLUE FILM
10:19:43.654 <rc: 5, tag:20000040, vm:1>
10:19:43.654 filmDest=PROCESSOR
10:19:43.654 <rc: 95, tag:20000040, vm:1>
10:19:43.654 return numCopies=1
10:19:43.654 return printPriority=LOW
10:19:43.654 return mediumType=BLUE FILM
***** Wed Mar 31 *****
10:19:43.654 return filmDest=PROCESSOR
10:19:43.654 umpSendMessage:10:19:43.654 cmdField:8140
10:19:43.654 msgID:2
10:19:43.654 Aff classUID:1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.1
10:19:43.654 Aff instanceUID:1.2.840.113720.1.9410.2.19990331101943.1
10:19:43.654 status:0
10:19:43.854 Input from net
8628588 - 2001 March 4–47

This message from the SCU requests the creation of a film box. Various items may be tagged by the SCU as allowed
by DICOM. Any items not tagged by the SCU, but nonetheless required, will be set to a default value by the PACS
Link 9410 SCP

10:19:44.685 handleImageBox
10:19:44.685 ** ibNSet **
10:19:44.685 <rc: 5, tag:20100060, vm:1>
10:19:44.685 <rc: 5, tag:20100080, vm:1>
10:19:44.685 <rc: 5, tag:20100150, vm:1>
10:19:44.685 <rc: 5, tag:20200010, vm:1>
10:19:44.685 position=1
10:19:44.685 <rc: 5, tag:20200020, vm:1>
10:19:44.685 <rc: 80, tag:20200110, vm:0>
10:19:44.685 GreyScaleImageSequence
10:19:44.685 <rc: 90, tag:fffee000, vm:0>
10:19:44.685 <rc: 5, tag:280002, vm:1>
10:19:44.685 samplesPerPixel=1
10:19:44.685 <rc: 5, tag:280004, vm:1>
10:19:44.685 photoInterp=MONOCHROME2
10:19:44.685 <rc: 5, tag:280010, vm:1>
10:19:44.685 rows=512
10:19:44.685 <rc: 5, tag:280011, vm:1>
10:19:44.685 cols=512
10:19:44.685 <rc: 5, tag:280034, vm:2>
10:19:44.685 aspect[x:y]=1:1
10:19:44.685 <rc: 5, tag:280100, vm:1>
10:19:44.685 bitsAlloc=8
10:19:44.685 <rc: 5, tag:280101, vm:1>
10:19:44.685 bitsStored=8
10:19:44.695 <rc: 5, tag:280102, vm:1>
10:19:44.695 highBit=7
10:19:44.695 <rc: 5, tag:280103, vm:1>
10:19:44.695 pixRep=0
10:19:44.695 <rc: 5, tag:7fe00010, vm:131072>
10:19:44.695 pixData ptr=9940098, len=262144
10:19:44.695 Filename=D:\NGNI\images\Img9903311019440.bmp
10:19:44.705 ->storeImageObject (sid=1)
10:19:44.705 DBIntf::Store(D:\NGNI\images\Img9903311019440.bmp)
10:19:44.805 <rc: 92, tag:7fe00010, vm:131072>
10:19:44.805 <rc: 85, tag:7fe00010, vm:131072>
10:19:44.805 magType=CUBIC
10:19:44.805 smoothingType=3
10:19:44.805 polarity=NORMAL
10:19:44.805 ImageBox cfgInfo=CS001
10:19:44.805 <rc: 95, tag:20200110, vm:0>
10:19:44.805 return position=1 10:19:44.805 return samplesPerPixel=1
10:19:44.805 return photoInterp=MONOCHROME2
10:19:44.805 return rows=512
10:19:44.805 return cols=512
10:19:44.805 return aspectRatio=1\1
10:19:44.815 return bitsAlloc=8
10:19:44.815 return bitsStored=8
10:19:44.815 return highBit=7
10:19:44.815 return pixelRep=1
10:19:44.815 return polarity=NORMAL
10:19:44.815 return magType=CUBIC
10:19:44.815 return smoothType=3
10:19:44.815 return config Info=CS001 10:19:44.815 return reqImageSize=-1
10:19:44.815 msgID:4
10:19:44.815 Aff classUID:1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.4
10:19:44.815 Aff instanceUID:1.2.840.113720.1.9410.2.19990331101944.1.1.1
10:19:44.815 status:0
4–48 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
This message from the SCU requests a “print” operation.
***** Wed Mar 31 *****

10:19:45.216 handleFilmBox
10:19:45.216 ** fbNAction **
10:19:45.216 ->filmAttrhandler (sid=1)
10:19:45.216 copying film box 1 to job (sid=1)
10:19:45.216 ->printHandler: PrintCmd received (sid=1)
10:19:45.616 ->printHandler: Job 19 (sid=1) stored in database
10:19:45.616 ->Calling m_jobIntf->Process(19) ...
10:19:46.197 jobID=19
10:19:46.197 msgID:5
10:19:46.197 Aff classUID:1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.2
10:19:46.197 Aff instanceUID:1.2.840.113720.1.9410.2.19990331101944.1.1
10:19:46.197 actionID:1
10:19:46.197 status:0
***** Wed Mar 31 *****
This message from the SCU requests a “delete session” operation. This request may or may not always occur.

10:19:46.668 handleFilmBox
10:19:46.668 ** fbNDelete **
10:19:46.668 ->deleteFilmBoxHandler (sid=1)
10:19:46.668 ---- only 1 filmbox, deleting entire job
10:19:46.668 removed filmBox 1.2.840.113720.1.9410.2.19990331101944.1.1
10:19:46.668 removed imageBox from recordList
10:19:46.668 msgID:6
10:19:46.668 Aff classUID:1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.2
10:19:46.668 Aff instanceUID:1.2.840.113720.1.9410.2.19990331101944.1.1
10:19:46.668 status:0
8628588 - 2001 March 4–49

This message from the SCU requests a “delete session” operation. This request may or may not always occur.

10:19:46.918 handleFilmSession
10:19:46.918 ** fsNDelete **
10:19:46.918 removing filmSession
***** Wed Mar 31 *****
10:19:46.918 msgID:7
10:19:46.918 Aff classUID:1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.1
10:19:46.918 Aff instanceUID:1.2.840.113720.1.9410.2.19990331101943.1
10:19:46.918 status:0
10:19:46.918 ->closeSessionHandler (sid=1)
10:19:47.049 Session (sid=1) closed
4–50 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
This message from the SCU requests a “shutdown” of this association.

10:19:47.249 ->errorHandler (sid=1)
10:19:48.180 Association Server going away, decrement number connections
10:19:48.180 ~MessageIntf.Shutting down remote client("JobIntf")
File: F:\9410_Projects\NGNI Out\source\NGNIDB\Message\MessageRcv.cpp Line 133. Message
"Message::Receive shutting down. Name "JobSpooler" Type "JobServer". Socket closed"
Exception.
10:19:48.180 Message::Receive shutting down. Name "JobSpooler" Type "JobServer". Socket
closed
10:19:48.180 MessageIntf::startClient. Shutting down ("JobIntf", 0x6E).
8628588 - 2001 March 4–51

Event Viewer Log

The Event Viewer displays a series of events logged by WindowsNTTM. Some of the entries in the event log can be
useful for troubleshooting. The Error and Warning events may provide useful information when you are
troubleshooting. A typical Event Viewer display is shown below.
Three event types are logged, identified by a symbol in the left-most column.
Symbol Event Type Description

Red stop sign Error Significant problems, such as loss of data or loss of functions. For
example, an Error might be logged if a software module was not
loaded during system startup.
Yellow circle with Warning Events that are not immediately significant but may indicate future
exclamation point. problems. For example, a Warning event might be logged when
disk space is low.
Blue circle with letter I. Information Significant events that indicate successful operations.
4–52 2001 March - 8628588

Troubleshooting
Event Viewer Column Descriptions
Column Description
Type See previous description.
Date/Time When the event was logged.
Source The software module that logged the event.
Category Not used in PACS Link 9410 systems.
Event A number identifying a particular event type. The Event ID and Source can be used
by Service Engineering to troubleshoot system problems.
User Not applicable in PACS Link 9410 systems.
Computer The name given to the PACS Link 9410 computer when the system was installed.
An Event Detail screen that provides additional information about an event is available for each entry in the Event
log. Double-click on an event to see the detail screen. A typical Event Detail screen is shown below.
8628588 - 2001 March 4–53

4–54 2001 March - 8628588

Replacement Procedures
Section 5: Replacement Procedures
Introduction
This section contains procedures for removing and replacing the Kodak PACS Link 9410 system (PACS Link 9410
system) hardware components.
Note
To access the components, remove the side panel and/or the front panel from the computer.
The following components on the PACS Link 9410 system can be replaced in the field:
• Power supply
• Hard disk drive
• CD-ROM drive
• 3.5-inch Floppy disk drive
• Input/output boards:
– ImagraphTM HI*DEF video input board
– RocketPort serial port (COM) board
– 2-Port serial port (COM) board
– DPI-4 Digital input board
– FOPCIL Fiber optic output board
– COPCIL copper output board
– Modem board
Floppy Diskette Drive
Power Supply
CD ROM Drive
Input/Output
Boards (In
Card Cage)
Hard Disk 9410-34L
Figure 5–1 Field Replaceable Components
8628588 - 2001 March 5–1

Removing the Side Cover
Warning
When the computer power cord is plugged in, hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the computer. These
voltages can cause severe injury or death. Before removing the computer side cover, turn off the computer power and
disconnect the power cord from the AC power source.
Note
On newer units, a slide bar on the back of the box must be moved to allow the release button to unlock the side cover.
1. Press the Release button.

2. Swing the cover up and pull it off.
Release Button
410-29L
Removing the Front Cover

1. Remove power from the computer, disconnect the power cord, and remove the side cover.
2. Press the Release button on the top front of the computer.
3. Pull the top of the front cover forward and lift up to remove the cover.
Release
Button
9410-40L
5–2 2001 March - 8628588

Removing the Power Supply

1. Remove power from the computer, disconnect the AC power cord, and remove the side cover.
2. Press down the locking tab and rotate the power supply to the up position.
3. Disconnect the power cables from the following components:
• Hard disk
• CD-ROM drive
• Disk drive
• Computer main board (two power cables)
4. Remove one attaching screw.
5. Press up on the mounting bracket locking tab, and pull the power supply to the right to remove it from its
mounting bracket.
Note
To replace the power supply, perform this procedure in reverse order.
Mounting Bracket
Bracket Locking Tab
Screw
Press Down
Locking Tab 9410-49L
8628588 - 2001 March 5–3

Removing the Hard Drive

1. Remove power from the computer, disconnect the AC power cord, and remove the computer side cover.
2. Disconnect two cables from the hard drive, and remove one attaching screw.
Screw
Disconnect
Flat Cable
Hard Drive
Disconnect
Power Cable
9410-39L
3. Swing the hard drive out of the computer.
Drive-Cage
Slide Rail
Hard Drive
9410-42A
5–4 2001 March - 8628588

4. Lift the hard drive out of its hinge slots.
Drive-Cage Slide Rail
Hinge Slots
Hinge Tabs
Sliding Tab
Hard Drive
9410-37A
5. Remove four screws to separate the hard drive from its bracket.
Note
To replace the hard drive, perform this procedure in reverse order.
Hinge Tabs
ard Drive
Drive
Bracket
9410-36A
8628588 - 2001 March 5–5

Removing the CD-ROM Drive

1. Remove power from the computer, disconnect the AC power cord, and remove the side panel.
2. Remove the front panel.
3. Press down the locking tab and swing the power supply to its up position.
Power Supply
Press Down
Locking Tab 9410-38A
4. Disconnect two cables from the rear of the CD-ROM drive.
Disconnect
Interface Cable
CD ROM Drive
Disconnect
Power Cable
9410-41A
5–6 2001 March - 8628588

5. Press in the bracket tabs and pull out the CD-ROM drive.
6. Remove four screws to separate the CD-ROM drive from its bracket.
Note
To replace the CD-ROM drive, perform this procedure in reverse order.
Bracket
Tabs (2)
CD ROM
Drive
Bracket
Tabs (2)
Bracket
9410-35L
8628588 - 2001 March 5–7

Removing the 3-1/2 Inch Disk Drive

1. Remove power from the computer, disconnect the AC power cord, and remove the side panel.
2. Remove the front panel.
3. Press in the two bracket tabs and slide the CD-ROM part way out of the computer. This will allow more room
for disconnecting the cables from the disk drive in the next step.
4. Disconnect two cables from the rear of the disk drive.
Disconnect Disconnect
Power Cable Interface Cable
9410-44L
5. Press the Release button and pull out the disk drive.
6. Remove one attaching screw and remove the disk drive from its bracket.
Note
To replace the disk drive, perform this procedure in reverse order.
Diskette
Drive
CD Rom
Drive
Diskette
Bracket Drive
Tabs (2)
Release
Button
Attaching
Screw
Bracket
9410-50L
5–8 2001 March - 8628588

Replacing Input/Output Boards

The procedure for replacing any PACS Link 9410 circuit board includes the following steps.
Removing the Board

1. Remove power from the computer, disconnect the AC power cord, and remove the computer side cover.
2. Pull out the expansion card cage.
Expansion
Card Cage
Cover
Release
Button
Release
Lever
9410-27L
Caution
Static electricity can damage sensitive components in the computer or on circuit boards. Always use a wrist strap
connected to an unpainted surface on the expansion chassis when you are installing or removing circuit boards. Also
avoid touching components or connector pins on the circuit boards you are installing.
3. Disconnect the cable from the board.

4. Remove one screw and pull out the board.
Note
If you are removing a DPI-4 digital input board, remove the 32 MB memory SIMM from the board. You will install
this SIMM on the replacement DPI-4 digital input board.
8628588 - 2001 March 5–9

5. Place the input/output board in an anti-static bag.

6. Proceed to the next paragraph for instructions for installing a replacement board.
Screw
Disconnect
Cable
9410-46L
5–10 2001 March - 8628588

Installing the Replacement Board
Caution
Static electricity can damage sensitive components in the computer or on circuit boards. Always use a wrist strap
connected to an unpainted surface on the expansion chassis when you are installing or removing circuit boards. Also
avoid touching components or connector pins on the circuit boards you are installing.
1. Observe the following special instructions for digital and video boards:
• If you are replacing an ImagraphTM HI*DEF video board, check that the jumpers on the new board are set as
shown in the figure.
• If you are replacing a DPI-4 digital board, install a 32 MB memory SIMM on the new board. Use the SIMM
that you removed from the defective board. Also make sure that rotary switch 1 is set at position 3 (midway
between the 2 and 4 marks).
LED’s J3
Green J7 J4
Red J8 J5
J9 J6
J10
Pin 1
D D
1 4
Pin 8
Coax
Connector
ISA Bus
J11
J12
J13
J14
J15
J16
Connector
J17
J18
J19
J20
J21
J22
Note: J2 through J22 are jumper blocks.

1 2 3 1 2 3
9410-06L
Key: Jumper Jumper Jumper Jumper
Present not Present Across Across
Pins 1 and 2 Pins 2 and 3
8628588 - 2001 March 5–11

2. Insert the board-edge connector into the card cage connector from which you removed the defective board.
Gently rock the board into the connector until it is seated.
3. Secure the board to the card cage with the screw previously removed.
4. Reconnect the cable to the end of the board.
5. Replace the card cage in the computer and replace the computer side cover.
6. Reconnect the power cord to the computer. This completes installation of a replacement board.
7. You can now apply power to the computer and test the new board.
Screw
econnect
able
9410-45L
5–12 2001 March - 8628588

Additional Information
Section 6: Additional Information
Introduction
This section contains the following information that field engineers need to service and maintain the
Kodak PACS Link 9410 system (PACS Link 9410 system):
• pcANYWHERE
• Cable Pinouts
• Transfer Function Table Sets
Tools and Accessories

You will need the following items to service the PACS Link 9410 system.
Item Part Number

1. Service PC - a laptop computer with WindowsTM 95 or higher, a network interface,
modem, pcANYWHERETM remote connection software and communication
software (such as Hyperterminal) installed.
2. pcANYWHERE remote control software (installed on Service PC). 78-9998-2937-3
3. 10bT/100bT network card (installed in Service PC). 78-9998-2934-0
4. Network cross-over cable 96-0000-3918-8
5. Ethernet hub (10bT/100bT). 78-9998-2935-7
6. Monitor kit - a standard monitor, keyboard and mouse. 96-0000-5311-4
7. 10 BaseT Cable 96-9998-2936-5
8. PACS Link 9410 Image CD and companion Ghost diskette.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–1


The SMT is a software tool for service technicians that is part of the PACS Link 9410 software package. SMT has
three main functions: 1) system configuration. 2) system management and 3) diagnostic.
The system configuration features are used to enter parameters that tailor a PACS Link 9410 system to match the
modalities and output devices connected to the PACS Link 9410 system.
The system management features include:
• Stop and start PACS Link 9410 application software.
• Restore configuration settings from backup disk.
• Create configuration backup disk.
• Compact and repair the database.
The diagnostic features allow service technicians to check job status and view several logs and records that are useful
for troubleshooting.
Starting SMT
1. From your Service PC or Monitor Kit, access the PACS Link 9410 system.
2. From the PACS Link 9410 desktop double-click the SMT icon. The SMT top screen appears.
The main window contains five tabs, one for each of the five main sections within SMT. Clicking on a tab brings the
tab panel to the front.
Note
Before you use SMT for system configuration, you must stop the system software. (From the System Management
tab, click Stop System.)
6–2 2001 March - 8628588

SMT Help
SMT includes a context-sensitive Help system that explains the functions SMT can perform and also describes the
configuration parameters that can be entered with SMT. Press F1 from any point within SMT to see Help information
for the current SMT screen. The following is a typical Help screen.
Click To See An
Click To See Alphabetical List Of Click To Search For
Contents Topics A Topic
(shown)
Contents:
Context Sensitive
Click On These Icons To
Help Information
Navigate Throughout The Help
System
8628588 - 2001 March 6–3

System Info Tab

The System Info tab shows the input and output interface boards and some of the serial ports physically present in
the PACS Link 9410 system.
The following optional image input and output boards are displayed, if present:
• IMAGRAPHTM Video Input Board
• DPI-4 Digital Input Board
• FOPCIL Fiber Optic Output Board
• COPCIL Fiber Optic Output Board
Note
COM 1 and COM 2 are RS232 ports and cannot be used to connect keypad or host control inputs through a UKEIB.
UKEIBs must connect to RS422 ports.
The System Info screen also shows the following PACS Link system parameters:
• Computer = network name.
• IP Address = assigned IP Address.
• System = version of installed application software.
• SMT = version of installed SMT software.
The colored indicators next to each interface board and serial port mean:
• Dark Green = Device Not Available: indicates an unused status box on the System Info tab.
• Light Green = Device Available: the interface board or serial port is present but has not been configured for use.
• Yellow = Device In Use: the interface board or serial port has been configured for a specific use.
• Red = Device Error: not currently functional.
6–4 2001 March - 8628588

I/O Card Setup Tab

Click the I/O Card Setup tab to display the I/O Card Setup screen. The buttons on the I/O Card Setup screen navigate
to screens for the following:
• Serial Ports
• DPI-4 Digital Input Board
• IMAGRAPHTM Video Input Board
8628588 - 2001 March 6–5

Serial Port Setup

With this screen you can activate serial ports and set communications parameters for ports that are used for keypad
and host control inputs. Except for ports COM 1 and COM 2, the ports on this screen are usually used only for keypad
and host control inputs associated with video modalities. The following serial ports are displayed if physically
present:
• COM 1 and COM 2: two standard RS232 serial ports supplied with the computer.
• COM 3 and COM 4: ports are provided by the optional 2-port RS422 serial port board.
• COM 5 through COM 8: ports are provided by the optional RocketPort serial port board and companion 4-port
breakout box.
Note
The COM 1 and COM 2 ports are RS232 ports and cannot be used to connect keypad or host control inputs through
a UKEIB. UKEIBs must connect to RS422 ports.
6–6 2001 March - 8628588

Setup
• Check boxes: used to activate individual ports. Check only the ports that have keypad or host control inputs
physically connected to them.
Set the following parameters to match the device connected to the serial port (usually a UKEIB).
• Baud Rate: 1200 Baud to 115,200 Baud (eight choices)
• Parity: Odd, Even, None
• Protocol: SuperSet or 952
• Data Bits: 8
• Stop Bits: 0,1
Specific Settings
Device(s) Serial Port Settings

Connected to
Serial Port Baud Rate Parity Protocol Data Bits Stop Bits
IMS Keypad/UKEIB 19200 None SuperSet 8 1
Host Control/UKEIB 1200 Even 952 8 1
Host Control and 1200 Even 952 8 1
HPT
Keypad/UKEIB
Button Descriptions
Add New Port Opens the WindowsNTTM Port Add application. Currently there is no reason to use this function.
Save Saves the serial port settings to the configuration database.
Cancel Returns to the I/O Card Setup tab without saving. Any unsaved inputs entered on the Serial Port
Setup screen are lost.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–7

DPI-4 Digital Input Board Setup

From this screen you can set up each of the digital boards in the PACS Link 9410. (Currently only one DPI-4 board
is allowed.)
Digital Boards
The PACS Link 9410 system is currently limited to one DPI-4 board, therefore, only a single board is displayed on
this screen. Checking the box next to the board name activates the board.
Image Data Ports

This part of the screen contains parameters for the two image data ports on the DPC breakout box.
• A DATA and B DATA check boxes: Used to activate one or both image input channels. A channel must be
activated before the channel can be set up or used for image input.
• Header check box: If checked, the PACS Link 9410 system expects to find the image size (number of columns
and number of rows) in a header appended to each digital image. This box should always be checked.
• Columns: The number of pixels in each image line. Not applicable if the Header check box is checked.
• Rows: The number of horizontal lines in the image. Not applicable if the Header check box is checked.
• Bit Depth: The number of bits in each pixel.
• Time Out: The time interval (seconds) allowed to capture an image. Timing starts with an acquire command. If
the time-out interval elapses before the image is captured, an Acquire Error occurs. The Time Out interval should
be set slightly longer than [A channel acquire time + B channel acquire time]. Because the two channels cannot
acquire simultaneously, this is the worse case acquire time. The recommended setting for most situations is 60
seconds.
• Parity: Choices: Odd, Even, or None. Set to match the type of parity bit generated by the digital modality. Use
None if you don't know the parity type.
• Aspect Ratio: Width divided by height of the digital image.
• Memory Allocated: The DPI-4 board has 31 MB of memory available for acquiring images. This can be
allocated between the A DATA and B DATA channels in any proportion.
6–8 2001 March - 8628588

ImagraphTM Video Input Board Setup Screen

From this screen, you configure the Imagraph video interface boards to capture video images. This screen has two
main functions:
• Initiate a video Auto SYNCTM operation.
• Perform a Fine Tune operation.
Click Here To Display The

CHP File For This Channel
Auto SYNC
An Auto SYNC operation analyzes video input signals on all channels of a video board and automatically adjusts the
set up parameters on the board to acquire the image on each channel. You must perform a separate Auto SYNC
operation for each video board in the system (usually there is only one video board).
Before starting Auto SYNC, verify that each video source modality is connected to the video board and transmitting
an image (up to three video modalities can be connected).
For each input channel the Auto SYNC parameters are automatically stored in a file (CHP file). They can be viewed
and, if necessary, can be altered to acquire or optimize a difficult video image. For step-by-step Auto SYNC
instructions, refer to Section 3.
Video Fine Tune

The Fine Tune feature lets you adjust some of the video parameters to optimize image quality. After an
Auto SYNC operation, fine tuning is performed separately for each video channel with an active video input. Refer
to Section 3 for the Fine Tune procedure.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–9

Video Parameter Files

The video board parameters set up by an Auto SYNC operation, are automatically stored in a separate file for each
channel. These files are called "CHP" files because they are given a file extension of .chp. You can view and edit
these files to improve image quality. To display a CHP file, click above the channel label in the IMAGRAPH Video
Setup screen (for example A1). The file will be displayed in an editing window.
Sample CHP file:
;----------------------------------------------------------
; HI*DEF Common Hardware Profile
;----------------------------------------------------------
;
; Filename: D:\NGNI\Config\Card1Port0.chp
;
; Creation Time: Tue Feb 23 11:58:04 1999
;
; Channels: Video=CA1, CSync=CA1.
;
; Generated by: HI*DEF Auto SYNC
; Version: 3.1
; Library Version: 3.1
; Release Date: August 27, 1998
; A product of IMAGRAPH Corporation, a Lumisys Company.

;----------------------------------------------------------
[HIDEFPLUS]
Video Channel = CA1
Composite Sync Source = CA1
Ttl Pixel Clock = NONE
Vertical Total = 525
Frame Period = 34
Interlace = ON
Vertical Sync Type = NORMAL
Vertical Back Porch = 17.0
Image Height = 478
Horizontal Frequency = 15745
Horizontal Total = 794
Horizontal Back Sync = 130
Image Width = 640
Horizontal Sync Width = 4486
Horizontal Back Porch = 124
Gain = 0.6000
Black Level = 0.0727
Black Reference = 0.0115
White Reference = 0.7022
Zoom Down = 0x00
Pitch = 2048
Pass Mode = SINGLE
Phase Delay = 48.5
Video Attributes = 0x49
Signal Control = 0x00
Imaport = OFF
Horizontal Start = 0
Vertical Start = 0
6–10 2001 March - 8628588

Device Setup Tab

Click the Device Setup tab to display the set up screen.
The buttons on this screen navigate to set up screens for keypads and printers.
• Local Printers: Set up a local (direct connected) laser imager.
• SCU Printers: Set up network (DICOM) printers.
• SCU Stores: Not currently implemented.
• IMS Keypads: Set up IMS Keypad inputs (including destination switching keypads).
• Host Keypads: Set up host control/HPT keypad inputs.
• SCP Printers: Set up for image input from the network (set up PACS Link 9410 system as a print server).
8628588 - 2001 March 6–11

Local Laser Printer Select Screen

This is the first of two local printer set up screens. From this screen you can configure the PACS Link 9410 system
to print to one or two local laser imagers.
If two local printers are connected to the PACS Link 9410 output board through a DryView 8800 Multi-Input
Manager, you can configure to print to both printers. If a local printer is connected directly to the PACS Link 9410
output board, you can configure to print only to one local printer.
The names of the configured local printers display on this screen. Click the name of the printer to select it for any of
the operations listed on this screen (except Add/New).
Button Descriptions
Add/New Click to display the parameter screen for the selected printer. You can then change any of
the parameters
Edit Click to go to the Local Laser Printer parameter screen. You can enter parameters for a new
local printer on this screen
Delete Click to delete the selected printer. The printer name is deleted from the Local Laser Printer
screen and the parameters are deleted from the configuration file
Print 1UP SMPT Prints a single SMPTE image on the selected printer
Print 1UP SMPT Ball Prints a single ball; good for checking pixel loss.
Contrast Test Initiates a contrast test film print. The most recently acquired image is printed, at reduced
size, in a 15-up format. A different contrast value is applied to each image. (Does not apply
to the DryView 8300, 8500 or 8600 Laser Imagers. These models do not support a 15-up
format.)
Cancel Exits back to the Device Setup tab.
6–12 2001 March - 8628588

Local Printer Parameter Screen

Use this screen to enter or edit configuration parameters for a local printer interface board (FOPCIL or COPCIL
board).
Button Descriptions
Save Saves digital parameter values to the configuration data base. Save any time you change
parameter values.
Cancel Returns to the previous screen without saving. Any unsaved parameter entries are lost..
8628588 - 2001 March 6–13

Parameter Descriptions
Printer Name Type in a descriptive name for the local printer. This name appears on the keypad Destination
Select menu (IMS Keypads only).
Model Click to see list of laser imager models. Select the model physically connected to the PACS
Link 9410 system.
8800 Printer Setup Two choices are active only if a DryView 8800 MIM is used to connect two local printers to
the PACS Link 9410 system, and you select 8800 in the Model field. Select the printer (Printer
1 or Printer 2) that you want to configure.
Manufacturer Manufacturer of the local printer. Default: Imation. (This is an information field only. Does
not affect operation of the PACS Link 9410 system.)
Output Board Select the type of local printer interface board present in the PACS Link 9410 system,
Fiber for FOPCIL board, Copper for COPCIL board.
Communication These parameters apply to the serial port on the FOPCIL or COPCIL interface board. The
Parameters communication parameters must be set to match the parameter values of the corresponding
COM port in the local printer.
• Command Set - the set of commands the PACS Link 9410 system uses to communicate
with the local printer. Choices: SuperSet, 952, 831 and Unknown
• Baud Rate - The data transmission rate to the local printer. 8 choices: 4800 - 1155200
• Data Bits - The number of data bits in each pixel. Choices: 5, 6, 7, 8, Unknown.
• Stop Bit - The number of stop bits included with each pixel. Choices: 1, 1.5 or 2.
• Parity Bit - Choices: Odd, Even, None, Unknown.
For parameter values that apply to specific printers, refer to Section 3.
Image Transfer These parameters apply to the digital image port on the local printer output board. They must
Parameters be set up to match the corresponding parameters in the connected laser printer.
• Pixel Depth - the number of bits in each pixel. Choices: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12. (Must match the
local printer Pixel Width or Pixel Depth setting.)
• Header - Choices: Header, No Header, Unknown.
• Acquire Mode - Line, Frame, Unknown.
• Acquire Timeout - The time interval allowed to transfer the image to the local printer. If
the image is not successfully transferred within this interval, an Acquire Failure error
occurs (reported on keypad.)
• Transfer Rate - The data transfer rate to the local printer.
• Choices: 1 MHz, 2 MHz. (Applies to COPCIL board only.)
For parameter values that apply to specific printers, refer to Section 3.
Default Parameters To prevent a print job from hanging up, the following parameters are applied to the print job
if parameters are not supplied by a host or keypad.
Film Mismatch Choices: Print Always, Queued and Unknown.
This parameter specifies how the printer should respond if the type of film specified in a print
job does not match the film type (Clear or Blue) currently in the printer.
If Always is selected, the printer will print jobs even if there is a film mismatch.
If Queued is selected, the printer will place jobs in a print queue until the proper film is loaded
in the printer.
Interpolation Type Specifies the interpolation algorithm used for smoothing.
Choices: Imation 831, Generic DICOM, Imation DICOM, Unknown.

Interp Num Specifies the interpolation to use for smoothing if none is supplied with the print job.
Choices: -1 (Mag None)
0 (Replicate)
1 - 5, 7 - 15 (Cubic Smoothing)
6 (Bilinear)
6–14 2001 March - 8628588

Installed TFT/ULUT
Specifies TFT for laser; If using TFT Emulation, this should always be set for
Ver 693c0.w87 (for 8100, 8500, 8700, 8800) and upmsv3k.w8u (for 8300).
TFT/ULUT Emulation Allows the application of separate TFT/ULUTs for each modality printing through a PACS
LINK 9410 system.
Max Density The default DMax if none is supplied with the print job.
Range:
969 170 - 310 170 - 320
DryView 8100 200 - 350 200 - 350
DryView 8300 170 - 300 170 - 30
DryView 8600 200 - 350 200 - 350
DryView 8700/8500 170 - 300 170 - 310
Contrast The default contrast if none is supplied with the print job. Range: 0-15
Border Density The default density for the film border if not supplied with the print job. Applies only to
models 952 and 959, which are not currently supported.
Range: 0 (black) to 4095 (white)
8628588 - 2001 March 6–15

SCU Printer Select Screen

From this screen you can set up the PACS Link 9410 to print to network printers. Click on a printer name to select it
for editing or any of the other operations represented by buttons on this screen.
List of Network Printers
Button Descriptions
Add/New Click to go to the SCU Printer Setup screen. You can enter parameters for a new network printer
on this screen.
Edit Click to display the parameter screen for the selected network printer. You can then change any
of the parameters.
Delete Click to delete the selected network printer. The printer name is deleted from the SCU Printer
Selection screen and the parameters for the printer are deleted from the configuration file.
Ping Printer Click to test communication over the network with the selected network printer. If the printer is
communicating with the PACS Link 9410 system, you will see a message similar to:
Reply from (IP Address): bytes = 32 time<10ms TTL = 128
SMPTE Print 1UP Prints a single SMPTE image on the selected printer.
Print 1UP Ball Prints a single Ball image on the selected printer.
Contrast Test Initiates printing of a contrast test film on the selected printer. An acquired image is printed 15
times with 15 different contrast settings.
6–16 2001 March - 8628588

SCU Printer Setup Screen

This screen is used to enter parameters that create a network connection from the PACS Link 9410 to a network
printer or print server.
Printer Identification
Printer Name Type in a descriptive name for the network printer. This name will appear on the keypad
Destination Select menu (IMS Keypads only).
Model Click in this box to display a list of laser imager models. Select the model to be
connected as a network printer.
Manufacturer Type in the name of the printer manufacturer. The default is Imation.
(This is an information field only. Does not affect operation of the PACS Link 9410
system.)
Network Parameters
Port
Enter 104 if the network printer is a DryView 8300 or 8600; enter 1024 or 1025 if the
network printer is a PACS Link 9410 Print Server. Must be approved by the site
network manager.
IP Address The IP Address of the network printer.
SCU AE Title The AE Title of the PACS Link 9410 system.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–17

SCP AE Title The AE Title of the network printer.
Printer Options
LUT String Supported Specifies the type of DICOM protocol for contrast selection sent from the PACS Link
9410 system to a network printer.
Checked: The PACS Link 9410 system sends a (LUT=m,n) string to the network
printer.
Unchecked: The PACS Link 9410 system sends a (CSnnn) string to the network printer.
Default: Unchecked
Recommended Setting: Depends on the protocol supported by the network printer.
This option allows the PACS Link 9410 system to interface to DICOM printers that use
an older implementation of DICOM, where the only supported protocol is (LUT=m,n).
Imation Annotation If checked, the PACS Link 9410 system sends Imation annotation to the network
Supported printer. Check this box if the network printer is any DryView Laser Imager or a 969
Laser Imager (this includes any of the printers listed in the Model drop down list on this
screen).
Print Guaranteed Checked - The PACS Link 9410 system will consider a print job as complete if the job
has been successfully sent to the network printer. It will not look for a job complete
status message from the network printer. If the PACS Link 9410 system does a system
restart, it will not resend any print jobs.
Unchecked - The PACS Link 9410 system will not consider a print job complete until
it receives a job complete status message from the network printer. If the PACS Link
9410 system does a system restart, it will resend any print jobs whose status is not
complete.
Default: Checked
Recommended setting: Checked

Advanced Vendor This button displays a parameter entry screen for network printers other than DryView
Options or 969 Laser Imagers.
To prevent a print job from not responding, the parameters below are sent to the
Default Parameters network printer if they are not supplied by a host or keypad.
Film Size The film size in the default printer. Choices: 14x17, 11x14 and 8x10
Film Type The film type in the default printer. Choices: Blue, Clear
Film Destination The film destination. Choices: Processor, Magazine, Processor 2, Magazine 2 and
Current
Contrast The contrast selection. Range: 1-15
Min Density Not applicable to DryView or 969 Laser Imagers. Contact Service Engineering, if you
are designating another type of printer as the default printer.
6–18 2001 March - 8628588

Interpolation Type Choices:Imation 831, Generic DICOM, Imation 831 DICOM and Imation 8300
DICOM
- Select Imation 831 DICOM if default printer is a PACS Link 9410 print server.
- Select Imation 8300 DICOM if default printer is a DryView 8300 or 8600 Laser
Imager.
- Select Generic DICOM if default printer is any other type.
Interp Num Interpolation Number. Use the default setting (3). Range 1 -15
TFT/ULUT Should be set to ver693co.w87 for 8100, 8500, 8700, 8800 and upmsv3k.w8u for 8300.
Button Descriptions
Save Saves the parameter values to the configuration data base.

Cancel Returns to the SCU Printer Select screen. Any unsaved parameter entries are lost..
8628588 - 2001 March 6–19

Advanced Vendor Options Screen

This screen is used to enter parameters that allow the PACS Link 9410 system to print to network printers other than
DryView or 969 Laser Imagers. Contact Service Engineering for the appropriate parameter values.
Replicate Smoothing A vendor-specific text string used if the smoothing type is Replicate. Default is
NONE if the network printer is a DryView or 969 Laser Imager. Other vendor’s
printers may require specific test string.
Bilinear Smoothing A vendor-specific text string used if the smoothing type is Bilinear. Default is NONE
if the network printer is a DryView or 969 Laser Imager. Other vendor’s printers may
require specific test string.
Cubic Smoothing A vendor-specific text string used if the smoothing type is Cubic. Default is blank (no
value) if the network printer is a DryView or 969 Laser Imager. Other vendor’s
None Smoothing A vendor-specific text string used if the smoothing type is None. Default is NONE if
the network printer is a DryView or 969 Laser Imager. Other vendor’s printers may
require specific test string.
Blue Film Type A vendor-specific text string used when the media is blue film. Default is BLUE
FILM if the network printer is a DryView or 969 Laser Imager. Other vendor’s
Clear Film Type A vendor-specific text string used when the media is clear film. Default is CLEAR
FILM if the network printer is a DryView or 969 Laser Imager. Other vendor’s
None Film Type A vendor-specific text string used when the media type is not specified. Default is
CURRENT if the network printer is a DryView or 969 Laser Imager. Other vendor’s
6–20 2001 March - 8628588

IMS Keypad Setup Screen

This is the first of three IMS keypad set up screens. From this screen you can add a new keypad or select an existing
keypad parameter file for editing.
Each of the configured IMS Keypads are listed on this screen. Click on a keypad name to select it for editing or
deletion.
Keypads
Set Up
Button Descriptions
Add/New Click to go to the IMS Keypad parameter screen. You can enter parameters for a new keypad on
this screen.
Edit Click to display the IMS Keypad parameter screen for the selected keypad. You can then change
any of the parameters.
Delete Click to delete the selected keypad. The keypad name is deleted from the above screen and the
parameters for the keypad are deleted from the configuration file.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–21

IMS Keypad Parameter Screen

This screen is used to enter parameters for a new IMS keypad. It is also used to edit the parameters for a keypad that
has previously been set up.
IMS Keypad Identification

Keypad Name Type in a descriptive name for the keypad.
Hospital name Type in the hospital name or a name that identifies the keypad you are setting up.
This name will be printed on all films printed from this keypad and overrides any User
ID set up in the destination printer.
Hardware Options (not applicable to destination switching keypads)
Serial Port Click in the box to see a list of all serial ports in the PACS Link 9410 system that have
been activated with SMT. Select the port to which the keypad you are setting up is
connected (through a UKEIB).
The serial ports provided by the 2-port COM Board and the RocketPort breakout box
display here if physically present and if they have been activated with SMT.
Image Card Click in the box to see a list of image input boards in the PACS Link 9410. Select the
video or digital input board that connects to the modality that this keypad will control.
For a digital input board there will one entry for each image channel on the board.
This choice (along with the channel selection for a video input) associates the keypad
you are setting up with a specific modality. The keypad then controls acquisition and
printing of images from this modality.
Channel (applies only to This is the input channel on a video board that is associated with keypad.
video board)
Click in the box and select the appropriate channel from the list.
6–22 2001 March - 8628588

Printer Options
Available Printers All of the local and network printers that have been set up for the PACS Link 9410
system appear in this list. Select one or more printer names. Each printer name selected,
along with a film destination selected below, will appear on the keypad Destination
Select menu.
Film Destination When you select a printer, also select a film destination.
Choices: Processor, Processor 2, Magazine and Magazine 2.
All four of the choices appear even if they are not all appropriate for the selected printer.
(For example, Processor would be the only valid choice for a DryView 8700).
For a printer with only one destination, select the appropriate destination (e.g., for a
DryView 8700, select Processor). This destination will appear on the keypad
Destination Select menu along with the printer name.
• For a printer with more than one destination, you can select all of the appropriate
destinations (e.g., for a 969 you can select both Processor and Magazine.) If you
select both destinations, both will appear on the keypad Destination Select menu.
Interpolation Values Used to adjust sharpness and smoothness. Defaults: Max Sharp = 3, Max Smooth = 15.
Keypad Options
Foreground/Background These parameters control the density of the name entered in the Hospital field. This
name is printed on each image printed from the keypad you are setting up.
TFT/ULUT Used to set unique TFT for each modality.
Defaults This button displays a defaults parameter screen.
Destination Switching If the keypad you are setting up will be used as a destination switching keypad for a
Options host control input, check the box labeled Use As a Destination Switching Keypad.
If the Destination Switching box is checked, the following check boxes become active:
Contrast Frame
DMax Rotation
Beta Border Density
If any of these six boxes is checked, the selected parameters can be controlled from the
destination switching keypad. For example, if the Contrast box is checked, there will
be a contrast control on the Destination switching keypad.
Button Descriptions
Save Saves the parameter values to the configuration database.

Cancel Exits back to the IMS Keypad Setup screen. Unsaved parameter entries are lost.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–23

IMS Keypad Defaults Screen

The default parameters on this screen are intended for use if a host control console that uses the SuperSet command
set is connected in place of an IMS keypad. These values will be applied to a print job if the host does not supply
these parameters. These defaults are not used for an IMS Keypad.
Destination Name Click in this box to see a list of printers available to the host. Select one as the default
printer.
Media Type Choices: Use Default, BWGen, BWRAB, BWRAC, BWDryB, BWDryC, Other
Choose the type of film that will be used in the default printer.
Media Size Choices: 14x17, 11x14, 8x10
Choose the size that will be used in the default printer.

Acquire TO Specifies the time (in seconds) allowed for an image acquisition. If this time is
exceeded, the acquire fails and a time out error is generated.
Range: 0 to 4095
Recommended Setting: Set to a value slightly higher than the time required for a
normal acquire.
Note: Do not set the time out to 0. This disables time out checking, which could hang
up the system if there is an acquire problem.
Contrast Specifies a default contrast setting.
Range: 1 to 30 (1 to 15 are positive tables, 16 to 30 are negative tables).
Note: When AIQC in the printer is not active (open loop operation), image contrast
can be affected by the Density setting.
6–24 2001 March - 8628588

Density Specifies a default density setting for host control users. Range: 1 to 16.
Recommended Setting: Print several films using different settings and ask the
customer which they prefer.
When AIQC in the printer is active (closed loop operation), the Density setting is
ignored. When AIQC is inactive (open loop operation), this setting works in
conjunction with the Dmax setting to adjust the density of printed images.
DMax Specifies a default Dmax setting. Range: 170 to 320
customer which they prefer. Typically, ultrasound users want a Dmax around 200 and
MRI/CT users want a Dmax around 320.
Note: Each type of film has a maximum rated Dmax (320 for HQB, 310 for HQC,
310 for DryB, and 300 for DryC). Although this parameter can be set to a maximum
value of 320, it should not be set to a value that is higher than the maximum rated
Dmax of the film being used. The HQ keypad and the DryView 8700 local panel will
reflect the maximum rated Dmax; for example, if DryC film is being used, the HQ
keypad and DryView 8700 local panel will not allow the Dmax setting to be
increased beyond 300.
When AIQC is active (closed loop operation), image Dmax will be printed to match
the Dmax setting. When AIQC is not active (open loop operation), the Dmax setting
functions as a target Dmax that is used in conjunction with the Density setting to
adjust the density of printed images.
Bit Depth Specifies the number of bits per pixel of image data. Set this to match the image
source bits per pixel.
Size Y Default image size in Y direction (number of rows). Applies to non-header digital
images. Set to 0 for video images or for digital images when header mode has been
selected (in the DPI-4 Setup screen).
Size X Default image size in X direction (number of columns). Applies to non-header digital
images. Set to 0 for video images or for digital images when header mode has been
selected (in the DPI-4 Setup screen).
Beta Y Interpolation (smoothing) value for the Y direction. Range 0-15.
Beta X Interpolation (smoothing) value for the X direction. Range 0-15.
Border Specifies a gray level to use for image borders. This value is only used for host
control users that do not set image border.
Applies only to the 969
Laser Imager
Range: 0 (black) to 4095 (clear).
Recommended Setting: Ask the customer if they prefer clear or dark borders.
Note: DryView Laser Imagers always print black borders regardless of this
parameter.
Button Descriptions
OK Saves the default parameter values.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–25

Host Keypad Setup Screen

This is the first of three host control set up screens. From this screen you can add a new host control input with or
without an HPT keypad. You can also select an existing host control parameter file for editing.
Each of the host control inputs that have been set up are listed on this screen. Click on a host control name to select
it for editing or deletion.
Host Control 1
Host Control 2
Host Control Inputs

That Have Been Set
Up. Click to Select
Button Descriptions
Add/New Click to go to the Host Keypad parameter screen. You can enter parameters for a new host control
input on this screen.
Edit Click to display the Host Keypad parameter screen for the selected host control input. You can
then change any of the parameters.
Delete Click to delete the selected host control input entry. The host control name is deleted from the
above screen and the parameters for the host control input are deleted from the configuration file.
6–26 2001 March - 8628588

Host Keypad Add Screen

This screen is used to enter parameters for a new host control input with or without an HPT keypad. It is also used to
edit the parameters for a host control input that has previously been set up.
Button Descriptions

Cancel Exits back to the Host Keypad Setup screen. Any unsaved parameter values are lost.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–27

Host Keypad Parameter Descriptions
Host Keypad Identification

Keypad Name Type in a descriptive name for the HPT Keypad or host control input.
Hospital Type the hospital name or a name that identifies the host control input you are
setting up.
This name will be printed on all films printed from this host control input.
Hardware Options
Serial Port Click in the box to see a list of all serial ports in the PACS Link 9410 system that have
been activated. Select the port to which the host control input you are setting up is
connected (through a UKEIB).
The serial ports provided by the 2-port COM Board and the RocketPort breakout box
show up here if physically present and if they have been activated in the Serial Port
set up screen.
Image Card Click in the box to see a list of image input boards in the PACS Link 9410 system.
Select the video or digital input board that connects to the modality this host control
input will control. For a digital board there will be two entries, one for each image
channel.
This choice (along with the Channel selection for a video board) associates the host
control input you are setting up with a specific modality. The host control input then
controls acquisition and image printing from this modality.
Channel (applies only to This is the input channel on the video input board that is associated with this host
video board) control input.
Click in the box and select the appropriate channel from the list.
Printer Options
Available Printers All of the local and network printers that have been set up for the PACS Link 9410
system appear in this list. Select the printers to be available to this host control input.
Film Destination When you select a printer, also select a film destination. Choices: Processor,
Processor 2, Magazine and Magazine 2.
All four of these choices appear even if they are not all appropriate for the selected
printer. (For example, Processor would be the only valid choice for a DryView
8700).
For a printer with only one destination, select the appropriate destination (e.g., for a
DryView 8700, select Processor).
• For a printer with more than one destination, you can select all of the appropriate
destinations (e.g., for a 969 you can select both Processor and Magazine.)
The following four options must be enabled or disabled for each printer/film destination combination selected.
Image 300 DPI Mode Select this parameter only if the host control user is configured to print on a 300 dpi
laser imager with a very accurate calculated magnification factor (i.e., different from
zero). This means that the corresponding 952 host control command should look like
the following example:
DZO,4800,30,1,1.13,1.13,H22,1,14 where 1.13 is the magnification factor.
The system will magnify images according to the laser imager resolution.
Rotate All Images Rotates images 90 degrees. (Not currently implemented.)
6–28 2001 March - 8628588

Scale Format/Pixel When this box is checked, both of the following parameters will be applied to print
Correction jobs sent to the printer currently selected.
Scale Format: For printers that support film sizes other than 14 x 17 inch, specifies
whether or not to scale formats to fit smaller film sizes. When set to Yes, SFO and
DZO formats sent by the host are scaled to fit on 11 x 14 inch or 8 x 10 inch film.
(The formats sent by the host are based on a 14 x 17 inch film size.) When set to No,
formats are not scaled.
Pixel Correction: Specifies whether or not to scale formats to correct for the
difference in resolution between the 969 (311.5 pixels per inch), the DryView 8700
(325.2 pixels per inch), and the 831/952/959 (300 pixels per inch). The host defines
formats based on a resolution of 300 pixels per inch. When Pixel Correction is set to
Yes, an enlargement factor (311.5/300 for the 969, 325.2/300 for the DryView 8700)
is applied to formats sent by the host. When set to No, images printed on the 969 or
DryView 8700 will appear smaller than the same images printed on an 831/952/959.
(Note: 831/952/959 laser Imagers are not currently used in PACS Link 9410
systems.)
Scale Magnification This parameter specifies whether or not to scale magnification values sent by the host
(in the DZO command) on film sizes smaller than 14x17. When set to yes,
magnification values are scaled by the same factor that formats are scaled. When set
to No, magnification values are not scaled.
Recommended Setting: No
Printer 1 - Printer 4 Boxes These boxes are used to specify up to four printers that will appear on the HPT
Keypad Output button display or on a host control console capable of destination
switching. When you place a printer name in one of these boxes, the printer displays
on the HPT keypad or host control console as an output destination.
The following screen shows the relationship between the printer boxes and the HPT
keypad output destinations.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–29

Select Printers and

Film Destinations To
Be Available On HPT
Keypad
Click in Box to Imager 1 Imager 2 Imager 1 Imager 2

See List of Magazine Magazine Processor Processor
Available
Printer/Destination
Combinations Output Choices That
Select One Appear On The HPT
Keypad
Perform the steps below to place printer names in the Printer 1 - Printer 4 boxes:
1. Click in the Printer 1 box to see the list of available Printer/Film Destination combinations you previously set up.
2. Click on one of the printer names to place it in the Printer 1 box.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each printer box until all of the available printer/destination names have been placed in
one of the printer boxes.
Each of the printer/film destination combinations you place in one of the Printer boxes will be displayed on the HPT
keypad. However, the names of the output choices on the keypad will not be the same as in the printer names in the
Printer boxes.
6–30 2001 March - 8628588

Keypad Options
Foreground Not implemented in current software version.
Background Not implemented in current software version.
Width Not implemented in current software version.
Leading Not implemented in current software version.
EOM Char Not implemented in current software version.
Multi-Printer Response If checked, all configured printers will be shown in the host control commands. If
unchecked, the host control response only shows the current selected destination.
TFT/ULUT Specify TFT/ULUT to be used for modality.
Automatic Routing Not implemented in current software version.
Alarm Mode Choices: Checked = Old, Unchecked = New
Specifies how the PACS Link 9410 reports alarms to a host. When set to Old, all
alarms are reported to the host. When set to New, operator-recoverable alarms (e.g.,
supply cartridge empty) are not reported to the host.
Note: When set to New, the PACS Link 9410 does not send out an asynchronous
alarm or an ARS (Alarm Reset) for alarms 19 and under. However, it still reports
alarms 10-19 in the status line when responding to an RQS (Request Status) from the
host. When set to Old, the PACS Link 9410 does send out an asynchronous alarm and
an ARS for alarms 10-19. It also declares the alarm in the status line when responding
to an RQS from the host.
Recommended Setting: Old

Memory Full Response Specifies the response sent by the PACS Link 9410 to notify the host of a memory
full condition. Choices: Checked = BSY, Unchecked = MOV
Recommended Setting: Checked = BSY

Image Size Mode Choice: Checked = Old, Unchecked = New
Specifies how the PACS Link 9410 responds to an image size request from a host.
When set to Old, the PACS Link 9410 returns the actual image size. When set to New,
the PACS Link 9410 returns SZI,1,1.
Recommended Setting: Checked (Old)

Frame Enables or disables image framing. When checked, a one pixel frame is printed
around each image. When unchecked, a frame is not printed.
Recommended Setting: Customer preference.

Defaults This button brings up a defaults parameter screen.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–31

Host Keypad Default Screen

This screen is used to enter defaults that are applied to a print job if the host, HPT keypad or destination switching
keypad does not supply these parameters.
Default Parameter Descriptions
Destination When you click in this box, Printer 1, Printer 2, Printer 3 and Printer 4 will be
displayed. Select one as the default printer.
Media Type Choices: Use Default, BWGen, BWRAB, BWRAC, BWDryB, BWDryC, Other
If “Use Default" is selected, images will be printed on any film that is loaded in the
printer.
If a specific type of film is selected, images will be printed only if this film type is
loaded in the printer.
Recommended setting: Use Default

Media Size Choices: 14x17, 11x14, 8x10, Current
Choose the size used in the default printer (the printer selected in the Destination
field).
969 - capable of all three sizes
DryView 8100, 8700 - size 14x17
DryView 8500 - size 11x14
DryView 8300, 8600 - size 8x10
Choose the choice “Current" only for printers that can answer which media size is
loaded (support the 952 host control command MSZ).
Note: Do not select “Current" for printers other than the 969 and DryView Laser
Imagers.
6–32 2001 March - 8628588

Acquire TO Specifies the time (in seconds) allowed for a successful acquisition. If this time is
exceeded, the acquire fails and a time out error is generated.
Range: 0 to 4095
Recommended Setting: Set to a value slightly higher than the time required for a
normal acquire.
Note: Do not set the time out to 0. This disables time out checking, which could hang
up the system if there is an acquire problem.
Contrast Specifies a default contrast setting for host control users.
Range: 1 to 30 (1 to 15 are positive tables, 16 to 30 are negative tables)
Note: When AIQC in the printer is not active (open loop operation), image contrast
can be affected by the Density setting.
Density Specifies a default density setting for host control users. Range: 1 to 16.
customer which they prefer.
When AIQC in the printer is active (closed loop operation), the Density setting is
ignored. When AIQC is inactive (open loop operation), this setting works in
conjunction with the Dmax setting to adjust the density of printed images.
Border (applies only to 969 Specifies a gray level to use for image borders. This value is only used for host
Laser Imager) control users that do not specify an image border.
Range: 0 (black) to 4095 (clear)
Recommended Setting: Ask the customer if they prefer clear or dark borders
Note: This parameter has no effect on DryView Laser Imagers. They always print a
black border.
Bit Depth Specifies the number of bits per pixel of image data. Set this to match the image
source bits per pixel.
Beta Y Interpolation (smoothing) value for Y. Range 0 to 15.
Beta X Interpolation (smoothing) value for X. Range 0 to 15.
Button Descriptions
OK Saves the default parameter values.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–33

SCP Printer Selection Screen - Current Provider Screen

From this tab you can set up the PACS Link 9410 system to be a print server (also called a Service Class Provider or
SCP). As a print server, the PACS Link 9410 system receives images over the network and prints these images on a
local printer. When you set up as a print server, the name you give the print server will appear in the SCP Printer
Selection screen.
From this screen you can also edit existing print server set up parameters or delete a print server set up. Click on an
SCP name to select it You can then edit it or delete it.
Because the print server provides printing services to remote users on the DICOM/Ethernet network, it is classified
as a DICOM Service Class Provider or SCP. The remote users that send images to the print server are classified as
DICOM Service Class Users or SCUs because they are users of the print server.
If two local printers are connected to the PACS Link 9410 system through a DryView 8800 Multi-Input Manager,
two SCPs can be configured within the PACS Link 9410 - one for each printer.
SCP Names
Button Descriptions
Add/New Click to go to the print server (SCP) parameter screen. You can enter parameters to configure the
PACS Link 9410 system as a print server on this screen.
Edit Click to display the parameter screen for the selected SCP. You can then change any of the
parameters.
Delete Click to delete the selected SCP. The SCP name is deleted from the above screen and the SCP
parameters are deleted from the configuration file.
6–34 2001 March - 8628588

Print Server Parameter Screens

The following screen is used to set up the PACS Link 9410 system as a print server.
Button Descriptions

Cancel Exits back to the SCP Printer Selection screen. Any unsaved parameter values are lost.
Printer The name of the local printer to be used for the SCP (print server) you are setting up.
Click in this box to see a list of all the printers (both local printers and network
printers) that have been set up for the PACS Link 9410 system. Click to select the
local printer you want assigned to the print server. (Usually there is only one local
printer but there can be two if they are connected to the PACS Link 9410 system
through a DryView 8800 MIM.)
Do not select a network printer for a print server output device.

Port Recommended Port Numbers
• Single SCP:1024
• Dual SCPs: 1024 for the first SCP
1025 for the second SCP
These port numbers should be approved by the site network manager.
SCP AETitle The AETitle of the PACS Link 9410 system. The default is IMN_9410.
Max # of Assoc. The maximum number of network users (SCUs) that can send images to the SCP for
printing. The default is 5, the recommended maximum. Print server performance will
usually be better with fewer users.
Button Descriptions
Add/New Click to go to the Remote SCU parameter screen. You can enter parameters to register a new
print server remote user.
Edit Click to display the Remote SCU parameter screen for the selected remote user. You can then
change any of the parameters.
Delete Click to delete the selected remote user. The remote user name is deleted from the screen and the
parameters for the remote user are deleted from the configuration file.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–35

SCP Printer Selection Screen - Registered User Tab

From this tab you can register print server users. Every remote user (SCU) that will send images to the print server,
must be registered to use the print server. If the PACS Link 9410 print server has been configured with two SCPs,
users are registered separately for each SCP.
Remote User
(SCU) Names
Click to Select
Button Descriptions
Add/New Click to go to the Remote SCU parameter screen. You can enter parameters to register a new
print server remote user.
Edit Click to display the Remote SCU parameter screen for the selected remote user. You can then
change any of the parameters.
Delete Click to delete the selected remote user. The remote user name is deleted from the screen and the
parameters for the remote user are deleted from the configuration file.
6–36 2001 March - 8628588

Remote User (SCU) Registration Screen

Use the following screen to register a remote user (SCU) of a print server.
Button Descriptions

Cancel Exits back to the SCP Printer Selection screen. Any unsaved parameter values are lost.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–37

SCU Identification
SCU AETitle The AETitle of the remote user.
SCU IP Address The network address of the remote user.
SCP The name of the SCP to which the remote user will print.
Click in this box to see the names of the SCPs that have been set up.
If the PACS Link 9410 system has been set up as a single SCP, only one SCP name
will appear. If configured with two SCPs, two SCP names will show. Click the name
of the SCP the remote user will use.
Default Parameters The default parameters below will be applied to print jobs from a remote user only if
the remote user does not supply them. These should be set based on
customer preference.
# of Copies The number of copies to print.
Contrast Table The contrast table to be used. Default: 4, Range 0-15
Contrast Group Currently applies only to DryView 8100 and 8600 Laser Imagers.
Specifies the contrast group to be used. Each contrast group can include a number of
contrast tables.
Default: 0
Max Density Range:
Laser ImagerClear BaseBlue Base
969170 - 310170 - 320
DryView 8100200 - 350200 - 350
DryView 8300170 - 300170 - 30
DryView 8600200 - 350200 - 350
DryView 8700/8500170 - 300170 - 310
Border Density (applies to The density of the border the printer places around the image.
969 Laser Imager only)
Default: 4095 (black)
Range: 0 (black) to 4095 (white)
Note: DryView Laser Imagers always print black borders regardless of this
parameter setting.
Mag Type Magnification Type: Valid values: 1 (No magnification), 2 (Replicate),
4 (Bilinear), 8 (Cubic)
Smoothing Default: 5, Range 1-15
Polarity Default 1 (Normal), Choices: 1 (Normal) and 2 (Reverse)
Orientation Default: 1 (Portrait), Choices: 1 (Portrait) and 2 (Landscape)
Req Image Size A non-zero value directs the printer to print the image at the size specified by this
field.
Default:0, Range: Dependent on film size.

Priority Default: Low, Choices: Low, High
The PACS Link 9410 print server will print high priority jobs ahead of any low
priority jobs in the print queue.
6–38 2001 March - 8628588

Pixel Data Interceptor Enables a special mode in the PACS Link 9410 system that improves performance
when handling large images - greater than 16 Mb (4K x 4K). Check this box if the
remote user normally sends images of 16 Mb or larger.
N-Event Print Job Enables a DICOM status reporting feature. When enabled, the PACS Link 9410 print
server will return a print job status message (N-Event-Report for print job) to the
remote user for each print job.
Enable based on customer preference if the remote SCU supports this reporting
feature. Default: Not checked
N-Event Printer Enables a DICOM status reporting feature. When enabled, the PACS Link 9410 print
server will return a printer status message (N-Event-Report for printer) to the remote
user for each print job.
Enable based on customer preference if the remote SCU supports this reporting
feature.
Default: Not checked

Trim Enables the trim feature. When enabled, a one pixel white line will surround each
printed image.

Attribute Warning Enables a DICOM warning message feature. If Enabled, the PACS Link 9410 sends
warning messages to the remote user in addition to success or failure messages for
print jobs.
Enable based on customer preference if the remote SCU supports Attribute Warning
messages.

Contrast Test Mode Check if the user wants a contrast test film each time the SCU prints to the SCP. A
15-up contrast film will be printed using the first image in the film format the SCU
sends to the print server. Note: Does not work currently.
Contrast Test Mode Density setting for the contrast test.
Density
Range:
969 170 - 310 170 - 320
DryView 8100 200 - 350 200 - 350
DryView 8300 170 - 300 170 - 30
DryView 8600 200 - 350 200 - 350
DryView 8700/8500 170 - 300 170 - 310
8628588 - 2001 March 6–39

System Management Tab

The System Management Tab provides several functions used by service technicians to maintain the PACS Link
9410 system.
Button Descriptions
Start System Restarts the application software after it has been stopped with the Stop System
button.
The processes within the application software will appear in the task bar at the bottom
of the screen when the software is started.
Stop System Stops the PACS Link 9410 application software. This must be done before using any
of the SMT configuration features on the I/O Card Setup tab or Device Setup tab.
The process buttons in the task bar disappear, indicating the processes are not
running.
Backup DB Backs up the configuration database to a floppy disk. Network parameters for the
PACS Link 9410 are not backed up.
You should make a backup disk after initial installation of a PACS Link 9410 system,
after any configuration changes and after installing a new version of the application
software.
Restore DB Reads in and replaces the configuration database from a backup diskette previously
made using the Backup DB feature.
You will need to restore configuration settings after a full software reload or if the
configuration database becomes corrupted. It is not necessary to restore databases
after a installing only the PACS Link 9410 application software.
Because of database incompatibility, a backup disk sometimes will not restore if a

new version of the application software has been installed since the backup disk was
made.
Compact DB Cleans up the PACS Link 9410 database by removing unused and old data.
Do not use without authorization from Service Engineering.

Repair DB Attempts to repair damage to the database.
Do not use without authorization from Service Engineering.
6–40 2001 March - 8628588

Diagnostics Tab
The following tab lets you display several types of logs that are useful in maintaining the PACS Link 9410.
Button Descriptions
Event Viewer This is a shortcut to the WindowsNT/Start/Programs/Administrative Tools/Event

Viewer. Refer to Section 4, Troubleshooting, for more information on Event Viewer.
Monitor Monitors communication and activities in the application software processes that are
running.
Trace Logs This is a shortcut to WindowsNT Explorer for viewing various log files. Refer to
Section 4, Troubleshooting, for more information on the various logs kept by the
PACS Link 9410 system.
Job Status Shows the status of individual print jobs. Possible status conditions are: Completed,
Stopped/killed, In process, and All.
Statistics Displays a summary page of activities such as system start-ups, jobs performed by
connected modalities etc.
Note: DBClean.exe program clears the statistics file.

Service History Not implemented.
Test Hardware Tests the FOPCIL and COPCIL local printer interface boards.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–41

pcANYWHERETM on Service PC
With pcANYWHERE remote control software you can use your Service PC to access and display a PACS Link 9410
system desktop on your Service PC monitor. You can then use the keyboard and mouse to control the PACS Link
9410 as though you are directly connected. The main purpose of the pcANYWHERE connection is to allow you to
use the Service Maintenance Tool (SMT) software on the PACS Link 9410 system.
There are four ways to connect your Service PC to a PACS Link 9410:
• On the customer's Ethernet network. Your Service PC must have a network card for this connection.
• With a network cross-over cable or Ethernet hub tool. Your Service PC must have a network card for this
connection.
• Over a telephone line. Both your Service PC and the target PACS Link 9410 system must contain a modem for
this connection. (Not all PACS Link 9410 units contain a modem.)
• Combination telephone/network connection.
pcANYWHERE software must be resident both on your Service PC and on the PACS Link 9410 system. It is factory-
installed on all PACS Link 9410 units and configured to respond to calls from your Service PC at all times. You will
have to install pcANYWHERE on your Service PC.
Installing pcANYWHERE on a Service PC

pcANYWHERE software and installation instructions are supplied on CD-ROM.
1. Load pcANYWHERE on your Service PC and follow the installation instructions included in the package. When
installed, pcANYWHERE will appear in the WindowsNT program list.
2. Select Start->Programs->pcANYWHERE32 to start pcANYWHERE. The pcANYWHERE window will
appear.
6–42 2001 March - 8628588

Set Up pcANYWHERE Connection Items

This procedure creates pcANYWHERE connection items to simplify the process of connecting to a PACS Link 9410
system. A connection item is a file containing modem or network interface information and other settings.
Connection items appear as icons in the pcANYWHERE window. To make a pcANYWHERE connection to a PACS
Link 9410 system, double-click one of the connection item icons.
You should set up at least two connection items, one for a generic network connection and another for a generic
telephone connection. When you use the generic connection items, the system will prompt for the host name or
telephone number of the target PACS Link 9410 unit. You can also set up connection items to connect to specific
PACS Link 9410 units (i.e., call specific telephone numbers or network host names).
Procedure
1. Configure network connection item.
a. Click the Remote Control button.
b. Double-click Add Remote Control Item.The following panel appears:
Type In
Descriptive
Name
c. Type in a descriptive name for the connection item (e.g., 9410network).

d. Click Next. The Remote Control Wizard displays.
e. From the drop-down list, select TCP/IP. For a generic connection item, leave the Host Name blank then click
Next.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–43

Note
The Host Name is the network name of a target computer on the network. If you leave the Host Name blank, you will
be prompted to select a host (a PACS Link 9410) from a list of computers on the network when you use this
connection item to establish a pcANYWHERE connection. Enter the Host Name or IP Address of the unit to connect
to a specific PACS Link 9410 unit.
Click To See
Drop Down List
6–44 2001 March - 8628588

f. In the following panel, uncheck the box and click Finish. A connection item will appear in the
pcANYWHERE window with the name you entered (e.g., 9410network).
9410network
Connection Item
You Created
8628588 - 2001 March 6–45

2. Set up telephone remote control Connection Item:

a. Click the Remote Control button.
b. Double-click Add Remote Control Item. The following window appears.
Type In
Descriptive
Name
c. Type in a descriptive name for the telephone connection item (e.g., 9410modem).
d. Click Next. The Remote Control Wizard displays.
e. From the drop down list, select the type of the modem installed in your Service PC.
If your modem doesn’t appear in the list, the modem probably hasn’t been set up in Windows. From the Control
Panel select Start->Settings->Control Panel. Double-click Modems and follow the instructions to set up the
modem.
Click To See
Drop Down List
6–46 2001 March - 8628588

f. If you are creating a generic telephone connection item, leave the Telephone Number blank, then click Next.
Note
If you leave the Telephone Number blank, you will be prompted to enter the phone number of the target PACS Link
9410 system when you use this connection item to establish a pcANYWHERE connection. Enter the telephone
number of the unit, if you want the connection item to call a specific PACS Link 9410 unit.
g. In the next window, uncheck the box and click Finish. A telephone connection item icon appears in the
pcANYWHERE window with the name you entered (e.g., 9410modem).
9410network 9410modem
Connection Items
You Created
h. This completes set up of two generic connection items. If you want, you can set up additional connection items
with specific host names or telephone numbers.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–47

Connecting Service PC via Remote Access

Use this procedure to connect your Service PC to a PACS Link 9410 over the dial-up telephone system. To use this
procedure you must have previously set up a telephone connection item in pcANYWHERE.
Required Tools/Information
• Service PC
• Telephone drop cable
• The telephone number assigned to the PACS Link 9410 system you want to access.
Caution
Always connect to an analog telephone line. A digital telephone line may damage your Service PC modem.
Procedure
1. Connect your Service PC modem to a telephone line.
2. From the task bar at the bottom of your Service PC screen, select Start->Programs->pcANYWHERE.
3. In the pcANYWHERE window, double-click the generic telephone connection item.
4. When prompted, enter the telephone number of the PACS Link 9410 system. (If your connection points to a
specific PACS Link 9410 unit, the system won't prompt for a telephone number.) pcANYWHERE initiates a call
and establishes a connection.
5. When a message prompts you to press Ctrl-Alt-Del, click on the C-A-D icon in the pcANYWHERE upper tool
bar. (Do not press the Ctrl-Alt-Del keys.)
6. When prompted for the host password, enter the password imagenet (lowercase).
pcANYWHERE now displays the PACS Link 9410 desktop on top of the Service PC desktop. This
completes the telephone connect procedure.
7. You can now start SMT (double-click the SMT icon) or perform WindowsNT-based tasks such as viewing logs
or revising network settings.
You can also use your Service PC keyboard and mouse to control as if they are directly connected to the
PACS Link 9410.
Crossover
Cable
Technician
Dongle 9410
PC
Straight-through
Cable
Technician HUB
Dongle 9410
PC
6–48 2001 March - 8628588

Combination Telephone/Network Connection

When several PACS Link 9410 units are connected on the same network, usually only one will contain a modem.
With this type of system you can make a telephone connection from your Service PC to a PACS Link 9410 system
that does not contain a modem by using the unit containing a modem as an intermediary.
First set up a pcANYWHERE telephone connection to the unit containing a modem (the intermediate PACS Link
9410 system). Then establish a another pcANYWHERE connection over the network from the intermediate
computer to the unit without a modem (the target PACS Link 9410).
pcANYWHERE Connection
Over Network
Network
Modem
PACS Link 9410 PACS Link 9410 PACS Link 9410

(Intermediate) (Target)
Modem pcANYWHERE Connection

Over Telephone Line
Service PC
r
8628588 - 2001 March 6–49

1. From your Service PC, establish a pcANYWHERE telephone connection to the PACS Link 9410 unit that
contains a modem. This will be the intermediate unit. When you connect, the intermediate PACS Link 9410
desktop is displayed on your Service PC.
Host Name of the

Intermediate PACS Link 9410
Service PC
Desktop
Intermediate PACS
Link 9410 Desktop PACS Link 9410
Taskbar
2. From the 9410 task bar select START->Programs->pcANYWHERE. A pcANYWHERE window will appear
on top of the intermediate PACS Link 9410 desktop.
Double-Click
3. In the pcANYWHERE task bar, select the Remote Control button.

4. Double-click the NETWORK icon. A list of network connect devices appears.
5. Double-click the host name of the target PACS Link 9410 system.
6–50 2001 March - 8628588

6. When a message prompts you to press Ctrl-Alt-Del, click on the C-A-D icon in the pcANYWHERE upper tool
bar. (Do not press the Ctrl-Alt-Del keys.)
7. When prompted for the host password, enter the password imagenet (lowercase). pcANYWHERE now connects
to the target PACS Link 9410 unit. This completes the pcANYWHERE connect procedure.
• The WindowsNT desktop for the target PACS Link 9410 system will appear on top of the pcANYWHERE
window.
• You can also use your Service PC keyboard and mouse to control the target PACS Link 9410 unit as if they
are directly connected to the PACS Link 9410.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–51

Disconnecting Service PC from PACS Link 9410

To end a pcANYWHERE session:
1. Quit SMT if it is still running.
2. Click the C-A-D icon in the upper tool bar. The Task Manager window appears.
End Remote Control Session
3. In Task Manager, click Lock Workstation. A message confirming that the workstation (the PACS Link 9410)
is locked will appear.
4. Click End Remote Control Session in the upper tool bar and then click Yes. The PACS Link 9410 desktop
disappears.
5. Quit pcANYWHERE.
6. You can now shutdown your Service PC and disconnect it from the network or phone line.
6–52 2001 March - 8628588

Cable Pinouts
The following figures show the pinouts for the various adapter cables used in the PACS Link 9410 systems.
Adapter Cables
RS422 Host Adapter Cable (78-8077-4159-6)
37 Pin 9 Pin Signal

1 1 GND
21 2 RXD+
3 7 RXD-
20 3 TXD+
2 8 TXD-
4
5
8
9
22
23
26
27
RS232 Host Adapter Cable (78-8071-8331-0)
25 Pin 9 Pin Signal

2 4 TX
3 68 RX
7 1 GND
6
8
20
4
5
Genesis Cables (GE only)
78-8075-2600-5 10 m
78-8075-2569-2 30 m
78-8075-2570-0 60 m
78-8075-2601-3 100 m
25 Pin 9 Pin Signal

1 1 GND
9 2 RXD+
8 3 TXD+
22 7 RXD-
21 8 TXD-
8628588 - 2001 March 6–53

Cable, Adapter, UKEIB to Multiport (96-0000-3684-6)
9 Pin 25 Pin Signal

Female Male
Connects 1 1 GND Connects To
To UKEIB 2 15 RXD+
RockePort
COM Cable 7 17 TXD+
3 19 RXD- Breakout Box
8 25 TXD-
Cable, Adapter, UKEIB to RS422 (96-0000-3517-8)
9 Pin 25 Pin Signal

Female Male
Connects 1 1 GND Connects To
To UKEIB 2 8 RXD+
2-Port COM
COM Cable 7 9 TXD+
3 4 RXD- Board
8 5 TXD-
Cable, Adapter, UKEIB to DPI-4 (96-0000-3518-6)
9 Pin 25 Pin Signal

Female Male
Connects 1 1 GND
To UKEIB 2 5 RXD+ Connects To DPC
COM Cable 7 17 TXD+ Breakout Box
3 2 RXD-
8 14 TXD-
6–54 2001 March - 8628588

Digital Cable Pinouts

The figure shows the pin-outs for the cable that connects a digital modality to the DPC breakout box. This is a
straight-through cable; pin-outs are the same on both ends of the cable. There are four versions of this cable:
78-8075-4697-6 CABLE, Digital Image, 37-pin, RS422, 3m

1 Spare 2 +
Spare 2 - 20
2 Spare 1 +
Spare 1 - 21
3 Retransmit +
Retransmit - 22
4 Request +
Request - 23
5 Mode +
Mode - 24
6 Strobe +
Strobe - 25
7 Parity +
Parity - 26
8 D7 +
D7 - 27
9 D6 +
D6 - 28
10 D5 +
D5 - 29
11 D4 +
D4 - 30
12 D3 +
D3 - 31
13 D2 +
D2 - 32
14 D1 +
D1 - 33
15 D0 +
D0 - 34
16 NC
NC 35
17 NC
NC 36
18 NC
NC 37
19 NC
NC = No Connection
8628588 - 2001 March 6–55

Transfer Function Table Sets

This document describes the following 9410 TFT Emulation software features:
• TFT Set
• Curve_Shape/LUT/Contrast_Value representation
• Selecting a TFT Set
References
• MPC (maintenance software package) TFT Help file for laser imagers
• KHI Documentation Database (USLN331/US/EKC/IOL Product Info)
• TFTSV3.4 T S.Rev6.document
• meta_ULUTs.document
Definitions
Note
Do not confuse a TFT set with a TFT. Image quality is significantly affected by the single, specific TFT that was used
in making the print. Image quality is totally unaffected by the other TFTs in the set. The TFT set is simply a container,
and all of its contents may not be useful or appropriate for a given modality or a given density setting. In fact, some
TFT sets are quite diverse (i.e., offer a wide variety of looks within one set of fifteen TFTs). Some TFTs in a given
TFT set may be completely unacceptable to a customer for a specific modality, while one may be just right (i.e.,
preferable to any other TFT in any other TFT set).
TFT: A table (curve) used in closed-loop Kodak (formerly Imation) laser imagers that relates each digital input value
to a corresponding target value of perceived brightness.
TFT Set: A set of 15 TFTs that represent 15 different curve shapes, each of which is associated with a corresponding
user-selectable contrast selection (1-15).
Contrast: A user-selectable setting from 1 through 15 on the imager that initiates the associated TFT for the current
print.
Density: A user-selectable setting that determines the maximum Dmax density used in printing.
ULUT: The curves that are used on 8300, 8600, and 8610 laser imagers.
6–56 2001 March - 8628588

TFT Set Selections

The following are the set choices available when using the TFT set for 969,8800,8500,8700 and 8100 laser imager
applications.
AIRIS2A: Designed to meet Hitachi requirements for a TFT set which, when used for printing on DryView, can
perceptually match films printed on an HQ (wet) imager when TFT Set VER693C0 (with Contrast=6 and Dmax=3.0)
is used in the HQ.
To accomplish this, the AIRIS2A TFT Set is designed for overall similarity to the VER693C0 TFT Set, but gives
slightly lower measured densities in the darker part of the density range. Specifically, in the AIRIS2A Set, the
Contrast=8 TFT is designed to give dry prints which perceptually match the Contrast=6 wet prints made using
VER693C0 on an HQ, with Dmax=3.0 for both prints.
B3C5AX4: Allows moderate departures from the basic VER693C0 curves. Curves 2, 5, 8, 11 and 14 roughly cover
the span of VER693C0. The remaining curves provide more mid-tone brightness choices (curves 1, 4, 7, 10, and 13
= the brightest, and curves 3, 6, 9, 12, and 15 = the darkest). In all, there are 5 mid-tone contrast choices for each of
3 mid-tone brightness choices.
C3B5AX4: Allows moderate-to-strong departures from the basic VER693C0 curves. Curves 7 through 9 cover
roughly the span of VER693C0 and the remaining curves provide more choices of mid-tone brightness (curves 1
through 3 = the brightest, and curves 13 through 15 = the darkest). In all, there are 3 mid-tone contrast choices for
each of 5 mid-tone brightness choices.
FCR302C4: Created specifically for use with the 3M Model 2210 CREIB interface to a Fuji Computed Radiography
system. This TFT set should not be used for any other application.
GEHYB01: A hybrid (multi-modality) TFT set that supports the various imaging modalities which may be
connected to a GE (Amber) Workstation. These modalities include Fuji Computed Radiography (CR), CT, MR,
Ultrasound and any modality that expects a linear-in-density printer.
GSDF0: A TFT set in which all 15 curves are designed to conform to the NEMA Grayscale Standard Display
Function. For optimum conformity with the standard, set the contrast setting in this TFT set based upon the Dmax
density setting as follows:
Dmax Optimum Contrast Setting

1.7 1
1.8 2
1.9 3
2.0 4
2.1 5
2.2 6
2.3 7
2.4 8
2.5 9
2.6 10
2.7 11
2.8 12
2.9 13
3.0 14
3.1 15
8628588 - 2001 March 6–57

HYB60516: A hybrid (multi-modality) TFT set that supports the diverse needs of several imaging modalities, such
as may be operating within a Lockheed (formerly Loral) network. These modalities include Fuji Computed
Radiography (CR), Digital Subtraction Angiography (DSA or DSI), C-Arm applications, CT, MR, Ultrasound and
Nuclear Medicine. The following table defines how these 15 individual TFTs can best be applied to the needs of
various imaging modalities supported by this TFT set.
HYB60516 Applications
Suitable TFTs Preferred TFT
Imaging Modality Suitable Dmax Range Preferred Dmax (Contrast Settings) (Contrast Setting)
Fuji CR 2.7 - 3.0 3.0 2 2
DSI (DSA) 3.0 3.0 4-7 4
C-Arm 3.0 3.0 1-4 1
CT 3.0 3.0 2-7 2
MR 3.0 3.0 1-7 2
Ultrasound 2.5 2.5 3, 5-7, 11-15 9
Nuclear Medicine 2.3 2.3 12
MAXXUS: Created specifically for use with the YMS SPECT to match Konica film. All 15 curves are very close to
a single curve. The MAXXUS TFT Set provides a set of tables suitable for certain nuclear medicine
applications. Specifically, to provide a relatively flat (low contrast) curve shape in the brightest portions of
an image. This minimizes the visibility of soft tissue in a bone nuclear medicine image in which bone is
printed as black on a white background. This is a relatively tight TFT set, offering limited variation with
contrast setting.
MSFDUP1: Designed to meet the density printing requirements of a Kodak TFT-based imager that is used as the
printer in a Kodak Duplicator equipped with a multi-sheet feeder. The 15 individual TFTs of this TFT set are
designed to map 15 different Dmin and Dmax nominal input ranges (original film) into the full density range of the
imager (approximately 0.2 to 3.1, for DryView Blue film).
Example: if the original film is a blue-based film from a laser imager (with a film Dmin of about 0.2 and a printed
Dmax of about 3.0), a reasonable contrast setting for duplicating this film would be 11. However, since these input
density ranges are approximate, other, “similar” settings (6 in this example) could give optimal results from a user
perspective. Refer to the following table of nominal contrast settings
Nominal Contrast Settings*

Dmax ~ 3.0 Dmax ~ 3.2 Dmax ~ 3.4 Dmax ~3.6 Dmax ~ 3.8
Dmin ~ 0.05 C=1 C=2 C=3 C=4 C=5
Dmin ~ 0.12 C=6 C=7 C=8 C=9 C = 10
Dmin ~ 0.20 C = 11 C = 12 C = 13 C = 14 C = 15
* For various original film density ranges.
PMSB: Developed as a slight modification to the PMSV3K TFT Set that was previously developed for Philips
Medical Systems. This set was created by adjusting the t-values within the PMSV3K TFT Set so that when using
Contrast 9 of the PMSB TFT Set match, the densities print, as accurately as possible, the latest target densities
requested by Philips Medical Systems. All 15 of these tables have essentially the same mid-tone contrast (slope), but
have a wide variety of brightnesses (with contrast setting 1 = the darkest image and contrast setting 15 = the
brightest).
6–58 2001 March - 8628588

PMSV3K: A set of non-S-curve TFTs, with mid-tone density gradually decreasing as the TFT number (contrast
setting) is increased. This set was originally requested by Philips Medical Systems who preferred saggy curve shapes
to the S-shaped curves of VER693C0 and VER713C0. All 15 of these tables have essentially the same mid-tone
contrast (slope), but have a wide variety of brightnesses (with contrast setting 1 = the darkest image and contrast
setting 15 = the brightest).
SFH301A4: Composed of 15 non-S-curve curves, designed specifically for the Siemens Fluorospot H system.
SIECT87: A set in which all 15 curves are very close to a single, Siemens-defined curve for CT.
SIECT87B: A slight modification to the SIECT87 TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the Siemens
requirements for CT.
SIEFC969: Designed to satisfy the requirements of Siemens for use with the Fluorospot Compact modality.
SIEFL87B: A slight modification to the SFH301A4 TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the Siemens
requirements for Fluorospot DSA.
SIEFL87C: A slight modification to the SIEFL87B TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the latest
Siemens requirements for the Fluorospot DSA.
SIEFLTOP: A slight modification to the SIEWS87B TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the Siemens
requirements for Fluorospot Top systems.
SIEMR87: A set in which all 15 curves are very close to a single, Siemens-defined curve for MR.
SIEMR87B: A slight modification to the SIEMR87 TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the Siemens
requirements for MR.
SIEPOLY: Equivalent to the PMSV3K TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the Siemens requirements
for Siemens Polytron/8700 installations.
SIEWS87B: A slight modification to the WRKSTN2A TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the
Siemens requirements for the Sienet Workstation.
TLII: Created for use with the Toshiba Laser Imager Interface (TLII) for nuclear medicine applications. It provides
several linear-in-density curves (5 with increasing density plus 5 with decreasing density). Also provides 5
approximately linear-in-brightness curves, similar to some of the VER693C0 curves, for an MR modality (Toshiba
Flexart).
VER693C0: A popular, general-purpose TFT set of S-shaped curves, widely used for CT, MR and certain other
modalities. Curve 6 of this set is designed to be linear-in-perceived-brightness. Contrast settings below 6 give
increased contrast (slope) near the endpoints and decreased “mid-tone” (near 50% of digital input) contrast. Contrast
settings above 6 give decreased contrast near the endpoints and increased mid-tone contrast.
VER703C0: Created to provide a set of S-shaped curve choices that are intermediate-in-perceived- brightness
(between those of VER693C0 TFT Set and those of VER713C0 TFT Set). All 15 of these tables have essentially the
same mid-tone brightness, which is slightly brighter than the mid-tone brightness of the VER693C0 tables and
slightly darker than the mid-tone brightness of the VER713C0 TFT Set. As with the VER693C0 and VER713C0 TFT
Sets, there are varying degrees of an S-shape contribution which gives the strongest end-points contrast (slope) to
Table 1 and the strongest mid-tone contrast (slope) to Table 15.
VER713C0: Nearly as popular as the VER693C0 Set, with a somewhat lower mid-tone density than the VER693C0
Set. This set is similar to the VER693C0 TFT Set, but with a slight increase in brightness (i.e., the VER713C0 TFT
Set can be characterized as having slightly lower “mid-tone density” than the VER693C0 TFT Set). All 15 of these
tables have essentially the same mid-tone brightness, which is noticeably brighter than the mid-tone brightness of the
VER693C0 tables. As with the VER693C0 TFT Set, there are varying degrees of an S-shape contribution which gives
the strongest end-points contrast (slope) to Table 1 and the strongest mid-tone contrast (slope) to Table 15.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–59

VER723C0: Designed to offer another choice of curves, similar to the S-shaped curves of VER713C0, but at a
brightness higher than VER713C0 (which, in turn, is brighter than VER703C0, which is brighter than VER693C0).
This choice is needed at certain customer sites (e.g., at GE CT-I sites where higher brightness is desired for mid-brain
gray/white matter and/or abdominal soft tissue).
WRKSTN2A: Designed for post-processing imaging workstations in which curves 1 through 8 are designed to
produce linear in optical density results on film, for density settings of 3.2 through 1.8, respectively. Curves 9 through
11 are the same as VER693C0 curves 6 through 8. Curves 12 through 14 are designed for film digitizer applications.
Curve 15 is the same as curve 9.
6–60 2001 March - 8628588

ULUT Set Selections

The following are the set choices available when using the ULUT set for 8300,8600 and 8610 laser imager
applications.
GSDF6: Comprised of 12 curves, all based on the DICOM Grayscale Standard Display Function, with parameters
chosen to support the range of density (Dmax) settings available on the 8600 laser imager. The curves are designed
so the contrast and density (Dmax) settings should be chosen according to the following table
Recommended Contrast Settings

Maximum Density1 Recommended Contrast Setting2
2.0 1
2.1 2
2.2 3
2.3 4
2.4 5
2.5 6
2.6 7
2.7 8
2.9 9
3.1 10
3.3 11
3.5 12
1. As controlled by density setting.
2. For best conformance with Grayscale Standard Display Function.
GSDF6AA0: Comprised of 12 curves, all based on the DICOM Grayscale Standard Display Function, applied to an
8600 imager printing at its highest density setting (Dmax = 3.5). All the curves in this ULUT set were designed based
on an assumed film Dmin of 0.2 and an assumed light box luminance of 5500 cd/sq.m. The variable parameter in this
family of curves is the assumed reflected ambient light (values used in the following table) for the different contrast
settings.
Assumed Reflected Ambient Light Values

Assumed Reflected Ambient
Contrast Setting Light (cd/sq.m)
1 5.5
2 11
3 16.5
4 22
5 27.5
6 33
7 38.5
8 44
9 49.5
10 55
11 60.5
12 66
8628588 - 2001 March 6–61

GSDF6LL0: Comprised of 12 curves, all based on the DICOM Grayscale Standard Display Function, applied to an
8600 imager printing at its highest density setting (Dmax = 3.5). All of the curves in this ULUT set were designed
based on an assumed film Dmin of 0.2.
In this family of curves (see the following table), the assumed light box luminance was set to different values for the
different contrast settings, and, at each contrast setting, the reflected ambient light was set to be 0.5% of the light box
luminance of that setting.
Assumed Light Box Luminance Values

Assumed Light Box Luminance
Contrast Setting (cd/sq.m)
1 2000
2 2210
3 2442
4 2699
5 2982
6 3295
7 3641
8 4024
9 4447
10 4914
11 5430
12 6000
LORAD03: A moderately “tight” ULUT set, intended for printing Lorad digital mammography images using an
8600 imager in linear-in-transmittance1/3 gamma mode. All of the curves of this ULUT set are close to each other
and close to a single, central curve (curve 6), which was designed to provide printed densities that match as closely
as possible a table of target densities desired by Lorad (to match the density-vs-input characteristics of an Agfa
printer). The table of densities (i.e., as measured on an Agfa film) is as follows:
Desired densities vx. Step Numbers

Step Number Desired Optical Density
1 3.65
2 2.67
3 2.17
4 1.82
5 1.54
6 1.31
7 1.13
8 0.97
9 0.84
10 0.70
11 0.59
12 0.49
13 0.41
14 0.32
15 0.25
16 0.20
17 0.16
6–62 2001 March - 8628588

The desired densities are converted into desired t-values (for the “central” curve 6) by the WARP15 program import
function. In an actual 8600 print, t-values are mapped into the available density range of the 8600 imager (i.e., from
approximately 0.20 film Dmin to approximately 3.5 using the highest density 8600 setting).
A small range of brightness is provided in this ULUT set. Brightness increases as the contrast setting is increased
from 1 through 12.
LORAD04: Similar to the LORAD03 ULUT Set that was created for Lorad, but with one difference. In the
LORAD03 ULUT Set, curve 12 is the brightest of all 12 ULUTs in the relatively tight set. In the LORAD04 ULUT
Set, curve 12 is linear (i.e., a straight line). As a result, in the LORAD04 ULUT Set, curve 12 (contrast setting 12)
can be used on an 8600 that is set to linear-in-density gamma mode to print images with a linear-in-density overall
response.
SIECT83C: A “tight” ULUT set, with all of its curves close to each other and close to a single, central curve that
was designed to provide printed densities which match, as accurately as possible, a table of target densities defined
by Siemens for their CT systems.
There is a very small variation range provided in this ULUT set. Curves 1, 4, 7, and 10 give a slightly lowered mid-
tone brightness. Curves 2, 5, 8, and 11 give the nominal (target) mid-tone brightness, and curves 3, 6, 9, and 12 give
a slightly elevated mid-tone brightness. Within each of these three groups, the mid-tone contrast increases very
slightly as the contrast setting is increased (e.g., from 2 to 5 to 8 to 11).
SIEMR83C: A “tight” ULUT set, with all of its curves close to each other and close to a single, central curve that
was designed to provide printed densities which match, as accurately as possible, a table of target densities defined
by Siemens for their MR systems.
There is a very small variation range provided in this ULUT set. Curves 1, 4, 7, and 10 give a slightly lowered mid-
tone brightness. Curves 2, 5, 8, and 11 give the nominal (target) mid-tone brightness, and curves 3, 6, 9, and 12 give
a slightly elevated mid-tone brightness. Within each of these three groups, the mid-tone contrast increases very
slightly as the contrast setting is increased (e.g., from 2 to 5 to 8 to 11).
U1_109B: The original standard ULUT set for the 8300 laser imager. A recommended (but nearly identical)
replacement for this ULUT set is the newer ULUT Set, U1_109S (described below.
U1_109B has a diversity of curve shapes designed to accommodate the needs of a variety of imaging modalities. Its
twelve curves consist of six saggy curves that span a wide range of mid-tone brightnesses and three S-shaped curves
at each of two mid-tone brightnesses. The saggy curves are often used for printing ultrasound and nuclear medicine
images, while the S-shaped curves are widely used for printing CT and MR images.
The order (numbering) of the curves (tables) in this set is designed so that when a contrast test is requested (yielding
two films, with three columns of two images on each film), the first film shows the six images (from upper left to
lower right) printed using the six saggy curves. On the second film, the left column shows the images printed using
the first group of three S-curves and the right column shows the images printed using the second group of three S-
curves. For these curves, overall image brightness increases as the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 6. These
curves are often preferred over S-shaped curves by radiologists who are working with modalities such as ultrasound
or nuclear medicine.
Curves 7, 9, and 11 of this ULUT set are a subset of the U713C0 ULUT Set. A contrast setting of 7 gives the lowest
mid-tone contrast in this group of three, while a contrast setting of 11 gives the highest mid-tone contrast in this group
of three. These three curves have a higher mid-tone brightness than curves 8, 10, and 12 of this ULUT set.
Curves 8, 10, and 12 of this ULUT set are a subset of the U693C0 ULUT Set. A contrast setting of 8 gives the lowest
mid-tone contrast in this group of three, while a contrast setting of 12 gives the highest mid-tone contrast in this group
of three. These three curves have a lower mid-tone brightness than curves 7, 9, and 11 of this ULUT set.
Because this ULUT set has such a variety of curve shapes, with no simple relationship between contrast setting and
either mid-tone brightness or mid-tone contrast, this set may be useful primarily as a “finder” set, to help a user decide
on some other ULUT set as a final choice, within which the curve shape varies in a more continuous, intuitive way
as the contrast setting is changed (e.g., UPMSV3K, U693C0, or U713C0).
8628588 - 2001 March 6–63

U1_109S: Like the U1_109B ULUT Set it replaces, this set has a diversity of curve shapes designed to accommodate
the needs of a variety of imaging modalities. Its twelve curves consist of six saggy curves that span a wide range of
mid-tone brightnesses, and three S-shaped curves at each of two mid-tone brightnesses. The saggy curves are often
used for printing ultrasound and nuclear medicine images, while the S-shaped curves are widely used for printing CT
and MR images.
The order (numbering) of the curves (tables) in this set is designed so that when a contrast test is requested (yielding
two films, with three columns of two images on each film), the first film shows the six images (from upper left to
lower right) printed using the six saggy curves. On the second film, the left column of shows the images printed using
the first group of three S-curves and the right column shows the images printed using the second group of three S-
curves.
The U1_109S ULUT Set is a nearly identical replacement for the U1_109B TFT Set (described previously). Whereas
U1_109B had some tables that only reached 1020 instead of the full maximum scale value of 1023, all the tables of
U1_109S do reach the maximum scale value, therefore, printed densities can reach the lowest possible Dmin.
For these curves, overall image brightness increases as the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 6. These curves are
often preferred over S-shaped curves by radiologists who are working with modalities such as ultrasound or nuclear
medicine.
Curves 7, 9, and 11 of this set are a subset of the U713C0 ULUT Set. A contrast setting of 7 gives the lowest mid-
tone contrast in this group of three, while a contrast setting of 11 gives the highest mid-tone contrast in this group of
three. These three curves have a higher mid-tone brightness than curves 8, 10, and 12 of this ULUT set.
Curves 8, 10, and 12 of this set are a subset of the U693C0 ULUT Set. A contrast setting of 8 gives the lowest mid-
tone contrast in this group of three, while a contrast setting of 12 gives the highest mid-tone contrast in this group of
three. These three curves have a lower mid-tone brightness than curves 7, 9, and 11 of this ULUT set.
Because this ULUT set has such a variety of curve shapes, with no simple relationship between contrast setting and
either mid-tone brightness or mid-tone contrast, this set may be primarily useful as a “finder” set, to help a user decide
on some other ULUT set as a final choice, within which the curve shape varies in a more continuous, intuitive way
as the contrast setting is changed (e.g., UPMSV3K, U693C0, or U713C0).
U693C0: Consists of “S-shaped” variations about a linear-in-perceived-brightness response. For this ULUT set, all
curves intersect at the 50% point (of maximum input), meaning that all contrast settings will give the same mid-tone
brightness.
As the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 12, the mid-tone contrast (i.e., the contrast in the middle part of the
grayscale) is increased, while the contrast in the very dark and very light parts of the grayscale is decreased. This
ULUT set is very suitable for CT, MR, and C-Arm applications and is also sometimes useful for nuclear medicine
applications.
U713C0: Consists of S-shaped variations about a central curve which is somewhat brighter than the central linear-
in-perceived-brightness curve of the U693C0 ULUT Set. As with the U693C0 ULUT Set, all curves of this set also
intersect at the 50% point (of maximum input), but the mid-tone brightness of the curves in this set is somewhat
higher than the mid-tone brightness of the U693C0 ULUT Set.
As with the U693C0 ULUT Set, as the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 12, the mid-tone contrast (i.e., the
contrast in the middle part of the grayscale) is increased, while the contrast in the very dark and very light parts of
the grayscale is decreased. This ULUT set has rather wide applicability and is often used for ultrasound, nuclear
medicine and DSA. It may also be used for other modalities when a brightness greater than that from the U693C0
ULUT Set is desired.
UPMSV3K: A relatively wide-ranging set of saggy curves. This set provides a wider choice of brightnesses than
curves 1-6 of the U1_109S (or U1_109B) ULUT Set. This set is widely used in applications including ultrasound,
nuclear medicine, and others where an S-shaped response curve is not desired.
For these curves, overall image brightness increases as the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 12. The brighter
curves in this set are often preferred by radiologists who are working with modalities such as ultrasound or nuclear
medicine.
6–64 2001 March - 8628588

WKSTN83A: Most of the curves in this set are designed to give a linear-in-density response, while the remaining
curves are designed to give an approximately linear-in-perceived-brightness response (assuming, in both cases, that
the subsequent gamma table processing in the imager is of the linear-in-transmittance1/3 type, as is always the case
in the 8300 laser imager).
Because of its linear-in-density curves, this ULUT set can be used, even on an 8300 laser imager, with certain
modalities or workstations (e.g., Toshiba nuclear medicine or some Siemens workstations) that are designed to work
with an imager that has a linear-in-density characteristic.
The best curve (contrast setting) to use to obtain a linear-in-density response depends on the current Dmax density
setting, as indicated in the following table.
Preferred Pairings of Density and Contrast Settings

Contrast Setting
for
Density Setting Linear-in-Density Response
15,16 1
13,14 2
11,12 3
9,10 4
7,8 5
5,6 6
3,4 7
1,2 8
1. When using linear-in-density curves from WKSTN83A on an 8300
operating in linear-in-transmittance1/3 mode
When you choose the contrast setting from this table, the density printed by an 8300 laser imager should decrease in
approximately equal steps of Optical Density as the digital input is increased by a given step size.
The approximate linear-in-brightness curves in this ULUT set are obtained at Contrast settings of 9 through 12. As
the Contrast setting is increased from 9 to 11, mid-tone contrast is increased slightly while the contrast in the near-
black and near-white portions of the image is decreased slightly. Curve 12 is a repeat of curve 9. For further details
on these U693C0-type curves, see the description of the U693C0 ULUT Set.
8628588 - 2001 March 6–65

Selecting Transfer Function Table Sets

To connect to a given modality, try the contrast and density settings for the TFT set suggested here first. The typical
selections are recommended for the majority of users and should normally be tried first. The others selections are
useful in certain other situations, depending on radiologist preference, etc..
It is important to print using all of the available TFTs (by using all fifteen contrast settings or doing one contrast test
film) when determining, with the customer, which TFT set to select. It is equally important to note the specific
contrast setting (i.e., the specific TFT) as well as the TFT set that best satisfies the customer.
Note
Do not confuse a TFT set with a TFT. Image quality is significantly affected by the single, specific TFT that was used
in making the print. Image quality is totally unaffected by the other TFTs in the set. The TFT set is simply a container,
and all of its contents may not be useful or appropriate for a given modality or a given density setting. In fact, some
TFT sets are quite diverse (i.e., offer a wide variety of looks within one set of fifteen TFTs). Some TFTs in a given
TFT set may be completely unacceptable to a customer for a specific modality, while one may be just right (i.e.,
preferable to any other TFT in any other TFT set).
6–66 2001 March - 8628588

Similar or identical individual TFTs may occur in multiple TFT sets. For example, in VER693C0, the popular
perceived linear TFT 6 is essentially the same as TFT 9 of PMSV3K and is also similar to TFT 8 of C3B5AX4. Where
more than one TFT set contains a TFT that is satisfactory to the customer, deciding which set to install can be based
on the set that gives the customer more usable choices on a contrast test
Modality TFT Set Contrast (TFT#) Density Comments

Cemax Wkstn (typical) VER693C0 6 3.0 Limited experience
Cemax Wkstn (others) C3B5AX4 8 3.0 Limited experience
C3B5AX4 10 3.0 GE Workstation with
Cemax board (limited
experience)
WKSTN2A 2 3.0 Most CR’s (Kodak
CR800,Agfa VIPs,
Kodak CR400);
MagType=cubic;
smoothing=5; local
printer set up for 12-bit
CT (typical) VER693C0 6 or higher 3.0 Head and body
CT (others) VER713C0 6 or higher 3.0 Head and body
SIECT87B 6 2.8 For Siemens, Europe.
Contrast setting has
little effect
PMSV3K 9 3.0 Philips
VER693C0 8 2-8 Elscint
VER713C0 6 2.9-3.0 Picker PQ
VER723C0 GE CTi
DSA (typical) VER713C0 6-8 2.7-3.0
DSA (others) VER713C0 6-8 2.9 GE DF5000 DSA
PMSV3K 9 3.0 Philips DSI
VER713C0 8-12 3.0
C3B5AX4 2 3.0
C3B5AX4 8 3.0 ATS Dig. Fluoro
SFH301A4 Set to density (1-15) 2.9 Siemens Fluorospot H
(developed for HQ)
SIEFL87B 5 3.0 Siemens Fluorospot
DSA
Fuji CR through 2210 FCR302C4 12 2.8
CREIB or Analogic
SD100
MR (typical) VER693C0 6 3.0
MR (others) VER693C0 4 3.0 Picker MR
VER713C0 11 3.0 Lunar Arthroscan
SIEMR87B 5 2.6 For Siemens, Europe.
Contrast setting has
little effect
PMSV3K 9 3.0 Philips Gyroscan
VER693C0 6 3.0 Elscint
AIRIS2A 8 3.0 Hitachi Airis
8628588 - 2001 March 6–67

Nuc. Med. (typical) VER713C0 9 2.2

Nuc. Med. (others): PMSV3K 7 2.2 YMS (bone)
MAXXUS 8 2.2 YMS (SPECT)
WRKSTN2A 7-8 1.9 Toshiba. Limited
experience
B3C5AX4 10 2.3 Picker (Limited
Experience)
Philips Easyvision PMSV3K 9 3.0
Philips Thoravision B3C5AX4 11 3.0
Philips V3000/V4000 PMSV3K 15 3.0
Picker Digital VER693C0 6 3.0
Reconstructed
Radiography (DRR)
Siemens Camera Server WRKSTN2A 3 2.8 Note that TFTs 1-8 are
(Set to output linear-in- designed for densities
density) of 3.2 - 1.8,
respectively
Siemens Camera Server SIEWS87B 3 2.8 A slight modification to
(Others) WRKSTN2A , to
match Siemens Sienet
WS test requirements in
Europe
Siemens Polytron (TOP SIEPOLY 10 3.0 Equivalent To
interface) PMSV3K
Ultrasound (typical) PMSV3K 8-13 2.4-2.8
Ultrasound (others): PMSV3K 9 2.4 - 2.8 Acuson Ultrasound
(depends on
radiologist)
PMSV3K 12 2.4 GE Ultrasound
PMSV3K 9 2.4 Toshiba Ultrasound
6–68 2001 March - 8628588

Parts Breakdown
Section 7: Parts Breakdown
Introduction
This section contains the illustrated parts breakdown for the Kodak PACS Link 9410 system (PACS Link 9410
system).
Figure 7–1 System Components
5 Disk Drive, 3-1/2 inch
2 Power Supply
4 CD ROM Drive
1 Computer
3
Hard Drive
Item No. Part Number Description Qty

1A............... 44-0022-7904-8...... COMPUTER, Dell, Gn+, ...................................................................................1
1B ............... 74-0401-7747-4...... COMPUTER, Dell, G1 ......................................................................................1
1C ............... 8572448.................. COMPUTER, Dell, GX100 ...............................................................................1
2.................. 74-0401-7550-2...... Power Supply, Dell G1, Gn+, GX100................................................................1
3A............... 74-0401-7530-4...... HARD DRIVE, 3.2 Gigabyte Ultra DMA/33, Dell Gn+ ...................................1
3B ............... 74-0401-7542-9...... HARD DRIVE, 4.3 Gigabyte, Dell G1..............................................................1
3C ............... 7E7052 ................... HARD DRIVE, 10 Gigabyte, Dell GX100 or G1..............................................1
4.................. 74-0401-7544-5...... CD ROM DRIVE 14 to 32x...............................................................................1
5.................. 74-0401-7545-2...... DISK DRIVE, 3.5 inch (floppy disk drive) ......................................................1
6.................. 74-0401-7561-9...... MODULE - MEMORY, DIMM 64MB, Dell Gn+ (Not shown).......................1
7.................. 42-0015-1542-0...... MODULE - MEMORY, DIMM 128MB, Dell G1 (Not shown), GX100 .........1
8.................. Call TAC Center .... PACS Link 9410 APPLICATION SOFTWARE CD ROM ..............................1
9.................. Call TAC Center .... PACS Link 9410 GHOST FLOPPY DISK........................................................1
8628588 - 2001 March 7–1

Computer Internal/External Components

Expansion Chassis Boards:
1 ..................74-0401-8429-8 ..... MODEM, 56K Int. ISA ..................................................................................... 1
2 ..................22-0001-1151-2 ..... PERIPHERAL, 4/8 Port, Comtrol Corp., 94820-9 (Rocketport) ...................... 1
3 ..................96-0000-3531-9 ..... COM BOARD ASSEMBLY, Ext. Dual RS422................................................ 1
4 ..................74-0401-8213-6 ..... FOPCIL BOARD PWA (PCI) ........................................................................... 1
5 ..................6E7328................... COPPER OUT ASSEMBLY (COPCIL Board) ................................................ 1
6 ..................96-0000-4199-4 ..... IMAGRAPH HI DEF PLUS VIDEO PWA (ISA) #012030-100...................... 1
7 ..................96-0000-3672-1 ..... DPI-4 DIGITAL BOARD PWA (No memory SIMM) ..................................... 1
External Components:
8 ..................7E2617................... DIGITAL Y-Cable (replaces DPC) ................................................................... 1
8A................96-0000-3673-9 ..... Digital Interface Assembly (DPC) - reference only
9 ..................22-0001-1152-0 ..... PERIPHERAL, Interface, Comtrol Corp., 95160-5 (Rocketport B-Box) ......... 1
10A..............42-0007-5387-3 ..... UPS, APC-300 ................................................................................................... 1
10B..............74-0500-5100-7 ..... UPS, APC-BK300MI (International)................................................................. 1
10C..............84-0000-0339-6 ..... Smart UPS, BP420S .......................................................................................... 1
10D..............44-0022-7955-0 ..... Smart UPS, BP420SI (International) ................................................................. 1
10E ..............No P/N ................... UPS, BK350J (Japan only) ................................................................................ 1
11 ................96-0000-3689-5 ..... FILTER, Eliminator, Ground Loop ................................................................... 1
12 ................74-0500-5139-5 ..... PACS Link Keypad............................................................................................ 1
13 ................78-8079-0478-0 ..... SHPT Keypad .................................................................................................... 1
14 ................78-8079-0477-2 ..... THPT Keypad .................................................................................................... 1
15 ................78-8079-0117-4 ..... YHPT Keypad.................................................................................................... 1
16 ................78-8077-4135-6 ..... UKEIB ............................................................................................................... 1
Miscellaneous Components:
17 ................44-0022-7922-0 ..... KINGSTON KTA-Q800/32 MEM, 32MB, (DPI-4 MEMORY) ...................... 1
18 ................83-1610-0154-6 ..... CONNECTOR, BNC Barrel.............................................................................. 1
19 ................26-1011-8279-3 ..... ADAPTER, Gender Changer............................................................................. 1
20 ................74-0401-7528-8 ..... BATTERY, UPS Replacement.......................................................................... 1
21 ................96-0000-3676-2 ..... CABLE, DPI-4 to DPC...................................................................................... 1
22 ................22-0001-1161-1 ..... CABLE, Interface, RocketPort .......................................................................... 1
7–2 2001 March - 8628588

Parts Breakdown
Figure 7–2 Standard Input/Output Board Locations
Expansion
Board
Connectors
PCI1
Slot 1
Slot 2 PCI2
PCI3
Slot 3
PCI4
Slot 4 ISA1
PCI5
Expansion Slot 5 ISA2
Card Cage
ISA3
Slot 6
ISA4
Slot 7
Location Board Type

Slot 1 PCI1 Vacant
Slot 2 PCI2 Vacant
Slot 3 PCI3 FOPCIL Board or COPCIL Board
Slot 4 PCI4 DIP-4 Digital Board
Slot 5 ISA2 Imagraph HI DEF Video Board
Slot 5 PCI
Slot 6 ISA Modem Board, U.S. Robotics, 33.6 Int.
Slot 7 ISA COM Board Ext. Dual RS422
slot 7 ISA or COMTROL CORP., 4/8 Port Serial COM Board (Rocket Port)
Note: This table shows the factory locations of the boards. Board locations may change as options are added in
the field. Board locations are not critical. Any PCI board will work in any PCI connector. Likewise, any ISA board
will work in any ISA connector. Exception: The COPCIL and FOPCIL boards cannot be installed in slots 1 or 2.
8628588 - 2001 March 7–3


1 ..................42-0007-5371-7 ..... CABLE ASSEMBLY, UTP CAT5-7FT-STR................................................... 1
2 ..................96-0000-4227-3 ..... CABLE, DPI-4 to Interface Keypad.................................................................. 1
3 ..................96-0000-3517-8 ..... CABLE, Adapter, UKEIB to RS422, 304.8mm ................................................ 1
4 ..................96-0000-3518-6 ..... CABLE, Adapter, UKEIB to DPI-4 .................................................................. 1
5 ..................96-0000-3684-6 ..... CABLE, Adapter, UKEIB to Multi-port............................................................ 1
6 ..................96-0000-3679-6 ..... CABLE, 8 Port................................................................................................... 1
7 ..................78-8077-4097-8 ..... CABLE, Keypad ................................................................................................ 1
8 ..................78-8053-4695-0 ..... CABLE, Video Image, BNC, 3m ...................................................................... 1
9 ..................78-8053-4059-9 ..... CABLE, Video Image, BNC, 10m .................................................................... 1
10 ................78-8053-4034-2 ..... CABLE, Video Image, BNC, 30m .................................................................... 1
11 ................78-8053-4033-4 ..... CABLE, Video Image, BNC, 60m .................................................................... 1
12 ................78-8075-4697-6 ..... CABLE, Digital Image, 37-pin, RS422, 3m...................................................... 1
13 ................78-8053-4134-0 ..... CABLE, Digital Image, 37-pin, RS422, 10m.................................................... 1
16 ................78-8075-2602-1 ..... CABLE, Com, 9-pin, RS422, 3m ...................................................................... 1
17 ................78-8063-3964-0 ..... CABLE, Com, 9-pin, RS422, 10m .................................................................... 1
18 ................78-8063-3965-7 ..... CABLE, Com, 9-pin, RS422, 30m .................................................................... 1
19 ................78-8063-3966-5 ..... CABLE, Com, 9-pin, RS422, 60m .................................................................... 1
20 ................78-8053-4631-5 ..... CABLE, Com, 25-9 pin, RS232, 15ft................................................................ 1
21 ................78-8053-4632-3 ..... CABLE, Com, 25-9 pin, RS232, 25 ft............................................................... 1
22 ................78-8053-4633-1 ..... CABLE, Com, 25-9 pin, RS232, 50 ft............................................................... 1
23 ................78-8077-4159-6 ..... CABLE, Host Adapter, 37-9 pin, RS422........................................................... 1
24 ................78-8071-8331-0 ..... CABLE, Host Adapter, 25-9 pin, RS232........................................................... 1
25 ................78-8079-0361-8 ..... CABLE, Host Adapter, 25-9 pin, SHPT............................................................ 1
26 ................78-8079-0094-5 ..... CABLE, Host Adapter, 25-9 pin, THPT............................................................ 1
27 ................78-8075-2600-5 ..... CABLE, Host Adapter, 25-9 pin, Genesis, 10m................................................ 1
30 ................78-8075-2601-3 ..... CABLE, Host Adapter, 25-9 pin, Genesis, 100m.............................................. 1
31 ................78-8075-2605-4 ..... CABLE, Fiber-optic, 3m.................................................................................... 1
32 ................78-8063-3684-4 ..... CABLE, Fiber-optic, 10m.................................................................................. 1
35 ................78-8063-3687-7 ..... CABLE, Fiber-optic, 100m................................................................................ 1
41 ................42-0007-5371-7 ..... CABLE, Ethernet, RJ-45 ................................................................................... 1
42 ................74-0500-5864-8 ..... CABLE, Copper Out to L.I................................................................................ 1
43 ................22-0001-1161-1 ..... CABLE, Interface, Rocketport, 9410 to B-Box................................................. 1
7–4 2001 March - 8628588

Configuration Worksheets
Section A: Configuration Worksheets
Introduction
This section contains miscellaneous information that field engineers need to maintain the Kodak PACS Link 9410
system (PACS Link 9410 system).
Worksheets
This appendix contains worksheets on which you can record network parameters and printer configuration
information. There are two worksheets:
Worksheet 1: Provides space to record:

- Network parameters for the PACS Link 9410 system you are installing.
- Network parameteres for a Service PC when used to connect to a PACS Link 9410 on the site network.
- Local printer configuration information.
Worksheet 2: Provides space to record network parameters and other configuration information for network printers
that will receive images from the PACS Link 9410 system you are installling.
Collect the data on the worksheets before you begin installation of a PACS Link 9410 system. You will need one
copy of each worksheet for each PACS Link 9410 system you install. Network parameter values should be available
from the site network administrator. Make additional copies as needed.
8628588 - 2001 March A-1

This page is intentionally left blank
A-2 2001 March - 8628588

PACS Link 9410 Worksheet 1
Site Name/Location____________________________________________
PACS Link 9410 Network Parameters -- Obtain and record the following information for the PACS Link 9410
system you are installing. This information should be available from the site network administrator.
Parameter PACS Link 9410 System

IP Address
IP Mask (Subnet Mask)
Default Gateway Address (Gateway IP Not required for some networks.
Address)
AE Title Always IMN_9410
Computer Name
Workgroup Name Not required for some networks.
Service PC Network Parameters -- You will need the following network parameters when you use your Service
PC to access PACS Link 9410 systems on the site network. This information should be available from the site
network administrator.
Parameter Service PC
IP Address
Address
AE Title Not applicable.
Computer Name Not required.
Local Printer Information -- The following information is required to configure the PACS Link 9410 to send
images a local printer.
Item Local Printer

Printer Model
Printer Manufacturer
Printer Name (will appear on keypad menus)
Telephone Number _____________________________
(Phone number of the telephone line connected to the PACS Link 9410. Applies only if the PACS Link 9410
contains a modem.)
8628588 - 2001 March A-3

A-4 2001 March - 8628588


(Network Printer Information)
Item Network Printer Network Printer Network Printer

Printer Model
Port
IP Address
AE Title
Film Size
Choices: 14x17
11x14
8x10
Film Type
Choices: Blue
Clear
Film Destination
Choices: Processor
Magazine
Processor 2
Magazine 2
Current
Contrast Default (0-15)
Interpolation Type
Choices: Imation 831
Generic DICOM
Imation 831 DICOM
Imation 8300 DICOM
Interpolation No. (1-19)
8628588 - 2001 March A-5

A-6 2001 March - 8628588


IP Address
Address)
Computer Name
IP Address
Address
Item Local Printer

Printer Model
contains a modem.)
8628588 - 2001 March A-7

A-8 2001 March - 8628588



Printer Model
Port
IP Address
AE Title
Film Size
Choices: 14x17
11x14
8x10
Film Type
Choices: Blue
Clear
Film Destination
Choices: Processor
Magazine
Processor 2
Magazine 2
Current
Interpolation Type
Generic DICOM
Imation 831 DICOM
Imation 8300 DICOM
8628588 - 2001 March A-9

A-10 2001 March - 8628588


IP Address
Address)
Computer Name
IP Address
Address
Item Local Printer

Printer Model
contains a modem.)
8628588 - 2001 March A-11

A-12 2001 March - 8628588



Printer Model
Port
IP Address
AE Title
Film Size
Choices: 14x17
11x14
8x10
Film Type
Choices: Blue
Clear
Film Destination
Choices: Processor
Magazine
Processor 2
Magazine 2
Current
Interpolation Type
Generic DICOM
Imation 831 DICOM
Imation 8300 DICOM
8628588 - 2001 March A-13

A-14 2001 March - 8628588

SM 9410

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SM 9410

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Return to CD-ROM Collection Menu

Kodak PACS LINK 9410 ACQUISITION SYSTEM

Service Manual, Rev. C

Warnings and Cautions

8628588 - 2001 March v

vi 2001 March - 8628588

Safety, Regulatory, EMC and CE Marking Compliance

8628588 - 2001 March vii

This page is intentionally left blank.

viii 2001 March - 8628588

About this Document

Warranty and Limitation of Liability

8628588 - 2001 March ix

Revision History ........................................................................................................... iii

x 2001 March - 8628588

Software Components.................................................................................................. 2-18

Test Local Laser Printer ......................................................................................... 3-80

Additional Information .................................................................................................. 6-1

8628588 - 2001 March xiii

This page is intentionally blank.

xiv 2001 March - 8628588

Section 1: System Description

Figure 1–1 PACS Link 9410 - Basic System.

8628588 - 2001 March 1–1

The two main types of PACS Link 9410 systems are:

1–2 2001 March - 8628588

The FOPCIL board plugs into a PCI slot in the computer.

The COPCIL board plugs into a PCI slot in the computer.

8628588 - 2001 March 1–3

Fiber Optic Input Copper Input

• 969 Laser Imager

1–4 2001 March - 8628588

Service Maintenance Tool (SMT)

8628588 - 2001 March 1–5

Figure 1–2 Basic System

Figure 1–3 Standalone System

1–6 2001 March - 8628588

Figure 1–4 Two Systems Sharing One Laser Imager

Figure 1–5 Two Systems Linked to Shared Laser Imagers

8628588 - 2001 March 1–7

DICOM Modalities Kodak

DICOM 3.0 Print

Figure 1–6 PACS Link 9410 Systems used as Print Servers

1–8 2001 March - 8628588

• Machine size: width: 20.6 cm [8.1 in]

Destination Available Formats

8628588 - 2001 March 1–9

This page is intentionally left blank.

1–10 2001 March - 8628588

Section 2: Theory of Operation

8628588 - 2001 March 2–1

Figure 2–1 PACS Link 9410 Computer

2–2 2001 March - 8628588

Serial Communication Ports

Port Name Description

8628588 - 2001 March 2–3

2-Port RS422 Serial Port Board

Host Control Input

COM3 IRQ COM4 IRQ

Figure 2–2 2-Port Serial Board (RS422)

2–4 2001 March - 8628588

Rocket 4-Port Breakout Box

Figure 2–3 RocketPort Board and Breakout Box